910 3383_Chameleon_32_Users_Manual_Volume_1_Ver_5.2_Oct91 3383 Chameleon 32 Users Manual Volume 1 Ver 5.2 Oct91
910-3383_Chameleon_32_Users_Manual_Volume_1_Ver_5.2_Oct91 manual pdf -FilePursuit
910-3383_Chameleon_32_Users_Manual_Volume_1_Ver_5.2_Oct91 910-3383_Chameleon_32_Users_Manual_Volume_1_Ver_5.2_Oct91
User Manual: 910-3383_Chameleon_32_Users_Manual_Volume_1_Ver_5.2_Oct91
Open the PDF directly: View PDF
.
Page Count: 358
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
CHAMELEON 32 .
USER'S MANUAL
Version 5.2
This manual, Version 5.2, corresponds to Standard Software Release 4.3.2.
TEKELEC
26580 Agoura Road
Calabasas, California
91302
Assembly Part Number
Text Part Number
Information in this documentation is subject to change without notice. Any software which is furnished in conjunction with or
embedded within the product(s) described in this documentation is furnished under a license agreement andlor a
nondisclosure agreement. and may be used only as expressly permitted by the terms. of such agreements(s).
Unauthorized use or copying of the software or this documentation can result in chtil or criminal penalties.
No part of this documentation may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means. electronic or mechanical,
including photocopying or recording, for any purpose without the express written permission of an authorized
representative of Tekelec.
Copyright Tekelec 1991. All rights reserved.
Chameleon 32 is a registered trademarks of Tekelec.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only, and may be trademarks of their respective
companies.
The hardware. software and documentation comprising the product(s) are provided under a Teke/ec limited 12 month
wamanty. Other than the Dmited warranties that are expressly stated therein. and without limiting the generality thereof,
Tekelec makes no warranty, express or implied. to you or to any other person or entity, concerning the hardware, the
softWare and this documentation. Tekelec will not be liable for incidental. consequential. lost profits. or other similar
damages. or for damages resulting from loss of use. data, revenues or time. In no event wi II Tekelec's liability, regardless of
the form of claim. for any damages ever exceed the pricellicense fee paid for the specific product. You may have other
rights which vary from state to state.
READ THIS FIRST
STATIC ELECTRICITY DISCHARGE
Sensitive electronic equipment can be damaged or caused to malfunction by the discharge
of static electricity. Carpets, synthetic fibers, and a dry atmosphere usually increase the
risks of static electricity buildup and equipment damage.
Follow the guidelines given below to minimize damage due to the discharge of static
electricity.
1.
Always make sure the equipment chassis is grounded to the AC ground.
2.
When approaching a unit, discharge any static buildup to a discharge panel (often
used with office computers) or to the equipment chassis by touching any exposed
metal area of the chassis.
3.
Use the following precautions to reduce the static levels in your work area:
•
•
•
Treat carpets with anti-static coatings
Use anti-static carpet covers and mats
Humidify the air.
WARNING!
The Chameleon 32 and 20 have real-time clocks that are backed
up by a lithium battery. If this battery is replaced incorrectly, there is
a danger of its exploding. Replace this battery only iri strictest
accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and with the same or
equivalent type of battery as recommended by the manufacturer.
Discard used batteries according to manufacturer's instructions.
DISK-DRIVE INSERT
Save the yellow, plastic disk-drive insert included with your Chameleon disk drive. This
insert MUST be used every time you ship your equipment. Failure to use this insert
will result in a damaged drive and a possible additional cost to repair the damaged drive.
PLEASE CALL TEKELEC CUSTOMER SUPPORT IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS:
1-800--441_9990
In Alaska and California, call collect:
1-800-880-5656
T ekelec Warranty Agreement
I. Term and Price
A. The term of this Agreement shall be for one year
from the date of shipment to Customer of the
equipmer)t ("Equipment") and software ("Software")
identified on the reverse side of this Agreement. The
Equipment and Software are collectively referred to as
the "Products".
Upon an advance payment by
Customer, not less than 30 days prior to expiration of
this warranty agreement or any renewal term hereof,
of Tekelec's then current annual maintenance fees
with respect to any Product, Customer may renew this
Agreement for a period of one year with respect to
such Product. Notwithstanding the foreg01ng, Tekelec
shall not, be obligated to maintain any Product after the
initial term of this Agreement.
B. In the event Customer requests Tekelec to
perform on-site maintenance service, and Tekelec so
agrees, Customer shall reimburse Tekelec for any outof-pocket expenses incurred by Tekelec in performing
such service and for the time of Tekelec personnel
who performed such service at Tekelec's then
standard rates. All such amounts shall be paid by
Customer within thirty (30) days of the date of invoice.
C. In addition to any other amounts due hereunder,
Customer shall pay to or reimburse Tekelec the
amount of any sales, use, value added or other tax,
duty, tariff or other assessment (other than any tax
based solely on Tekelec's net income) and related
interest and penalties which Tekelec is at any time
obligated to payor collect in connection with or arising
out of the transactions contemplated by this
Agreement.
'
11_ Procedure
A. If the Equipment is defective in materials or
workmanShip, Customer will call Tekelec Customer
Support at (818) 880-5656 for a Return Material
Authorization (RMA) number.
The following
information is required:
Customer Name, Address and Telephone Number
Model Number
'
Serial Number of Equipment
Detailed Description of Problem
All repairs will require return of the entire Equipment to
Tekelec. No individual modules or subassemblies will
be accepted for repair under this Agreement unless
prior authorization is granted by Tekelec.
All
Customer returned units or subassemblies must be
shipped to Tekelec freight prepaid in the original
carton or equivalent with an RMA number.
The
diskette inserts originally shipped in the disk drives
must be place back in the drives before shipping.
Failure to do so will result in damaged drives and a
corresponding charge. Tekelec is not responsible for
damage in transit. Tekelec will use commercially
reasonable efforts to repair or replace and return the
Customer's units within five business days of receipt
and subassemblies within three business days of
receipt. Tekelec will return them freight prepaid. In
the event that Tekelec is unable to repair or replace
such Equipment within a reasonable period of time,
Tekelec will, as Customer'S sole remedy, refund the
price paid by the Customer for such Equ.ipment.
B.By requesting the privilege of performing
subassembly maintenance, Customer hereby
represents and warrants that:
1. Customer is knowledgeable in the safety
procedures required for subassembly maintenance
of computers and test equipment in general and
the Equipment in particular.
2. Customer is specifically knowledgeable
regarding the dangers of high voltage CRT tubes,
RF and X-Ray radiation, power supplies, and all
other dangers which may be encountered in the
maintenance of computers and test equipment.
3. Customer knowingly assumes for itself and its
'employees and agents any risk associated with the
subassembly maintenance.
4. Customer will follow all safety precautions
stated in all applicable Tekelec documentation, as
well as all other reasonable safety precautions as
may be required in the repair and maintenance of
the Equipment, and agrees to indemnify and hold
Tekelec, its directors, employees, agents.
assignees and successors harmless from and
against any and all claims, expenses, losses and
damages which arise from Customer's
maintenance of the Equipment, including
Customer's failure to follow all such safety
precautions.
III. Warranty
A. All Equipment repaired or replaced by Tekelec
shall be covered by this Agreement for the remaining
term hereof or for 30 days from the date of shipment
to Customer, whichever is longer.
B. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS SECTION III,
TEKELEC DOES NOT MAKE BY VIRTUE OF THIS
AGREEMENT, AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMS, ANY REPRESENTATION OR
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH RESPECT TO THE
SERVICES, EQUIPMENT OR SOFTWARE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
C. T EKE L E C S HAL L NOT, UNO ERA N Y
CIRCUMSTANCES, BE LIABLE TO CUSTOMER FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS OR OTHER
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE SERVICES,
EQUIPMENT OR SOFTWARE PROVIDED OR TO BE
PROVIDED HEREUNDER, EVEN IF TEKELEC IS
APPRISED OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH
DAMAGES OCCURRING, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY
ANY OTHER PARTY.
IN NO EVENT SHALL
TEKELEC'S LIABILITY TO CUSTOMER HEREUNDER
(WHETHER BASED ON AN ACTION OR CLAIM IN
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) ARISING OUT
OF OR RELATED TO ANY SERVICES, EQUIPMENT
OR SOFTWARE PROVIDED OR TO BE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER EXCEED CUSTOMER'S ANNUAL
MAINTENANCE FEE HEREUNDER.
IV. Limitations
A. Tekelec shall have no obligation under this
Agreement if the Products are misused, neglected,
modified, improperly installed or tested or if they are
damaged by accident, inadequate packaging or repairs
performed by Customer or any third party or by causes
external to the Products such as, but not limited to,
failure of or faulty electric power or air conditioning,
operator error, failure or malfunction of the data
communications system or any equipment which was
not ,provided to Customer by Tekelec of from any
cause other than ordinary use.
The services provided hereunder do not include
installation, relocation or removal of the Products or
any accessories, apparatus, attachments or other
devices or the furnishing of accessories or supplies.
8. In the event any Equipment returned by Customer
to Tekelec is determined by Tekelec not to be
defective in materials or workmanship, Customer shall
reimburse Tekelec for all related shipping costs
incurred by Tekelec under Section IIA hereof, and
shall pay Tekelec an amount equal to Tekelec's
standard service charge applicable to erroneous
warranty claims.
V. Software
Tekelec agrees to provide, without charge, all
upgrades or modifications to the Software published
by Tekelec during the term hereof. All such upgrades
and modifications become part of the Software
licensed to Customer pursuant to the terms of
Tekelec's standard Software License Agreement.
Customer's license for such upgrades and
modifications shall automatically terminate upon
termination of Customer's license to use such
Software.
VI. Customer Support
Tekelec, through its customer support staff, will
provide telephone consultation to Customer in the use
and operation of the Equipment and the most recent
and immediately preceding versions of the Software.
VII. Miscellaneous
A. Customer may assign or transfer this Agreement
to any entity which acquires all or substantially all of
Customer's operating assets or into which Customer is
merged or reorganized pursuant to any plan of merger
or reorganization.
Except as set forth in the
immediately preceding sentence, Customer may not
assign or transfer this Agreement or any interest
herein (including rights and duties of performance)
without the prior written consent of Tekelec, which
This
consent shall not be. unreasonably withheld.
Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and shall be
binding upon the parties hereto and their permitted
successors and assigns.
This Agreement will be governed by the laws of
the State of California which are applicable to the
construction and enforcement of contract between
parties resident in California which are entered into and
fully performed in California. In the event that any
provision is found invalid or unenforceable pursuant to
judicial decree or decision, the remainder of this
Agreement shall remain valid and enforceable
according to its terms. No waiver of any provision of
this Agreement shall be effective unless made in
writing. No waiver of any breach of any provision
hereof shall constitute a waiver of any subsequent
breach or of any other provision of this Agreement.
This Agreement and any Software License
Agreements between Tekelec and Customer are the
complete and exclusive statement of the agreement
between Tekelec and Customer which supersedes any
proposal, prior or contemporaneous agreement, oral or
written, and any other communications between
Tekelec and Customer relating to the subject matter of
this Agreement.
PREFACE
Introduction
The Chameleon 32 User's Guide is intended as a comprehensive
overview of the Chameleon 32 for engineers and network
managers who use the unit to design, test, install, maintain, and
repair telecommunications and computer equipment. It also
p~vides a comprehensive overview for both the new and
experienced user who may need to review the basic concepts and
operations of the Chameleon 32.
The Chameleon 32 is a powerful multi-protocol and ISDN test
system. With the standard configuration, each phYSical port
provides independent monitoring or simulation with a BOP
acquisition rate of up to 64 kbps with dense traffic (one flag between
frames). A 256k-acquisition option is available, which enables the
Chameleon to monitor traffic up to 256 kbps on one port.
The Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual, Volume II,
contains all protocol-specific information', including details on the
ISDN ANSI Primary Rate, ISDN CEPT Primary Rate, ISDN Basic
Rate and 2B10 Interfaces.
Monitoring
The Chameleon 32 Monitoring applications interpret and display
data communication traffic. The Chameleon 32 provides up to one
megabyte of acquisition with a display in easy-to-read mnemonic
text. Using the Chameleon 32's Monitoring applications, you can:
Tekelec
•
Analyze 2810, X.25, SNA, X.75, 0.921,0.931, BSC, Async,
OLLC, PSH, DPNSS, V.120, DMI MODE 2, DASS 2, DDCMP,
and SS#7 protocols
•
Simultaneously view a Real-Time and History display of
interpreted traffic
•
Display and print statistics for 2B10, X.2S, SNA, BSC, ISDN, .
SS#7 and the Primary Rate Interface (Layer 1 error counters)
•
Capture up to 30 Mbytes of data to disk for later analysis
•
Filter HOLC, X.2S, 0.921, Q.931, DASS 2 and SS#7 traffic
using the Triggering application
•
Display Dual Line traffic.
p-1
09/27/91
Preface
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Simulation
The Chameleon 32 Simulation packages save you valuable
development time. Simulation allows you to emulate either side of
the line in a 2B1 0, X.25, SNA, Async, BSC, ISDN 0.921/0.931, or
SS#7 environment. Simulation traffic (except SS#7 and Async) can
be simultaneously analyzed using any of the monitoring
applications described above.
Using the Chameleon protocoi-specific programming languages,
.
you can:
•
Create a controlled, live environment to test both hardware
and software
•
Test both common and less common error conditions
•
Simulate network or individual devices such as:
•
•
•
•
•
Mainframes or Front End Processors
Modems
Terminals or Terminal Controllers
ISDN Network Terminator (NT) or Terminal Equipment
(TE) Devices
Other intelligent communications devices
You can also use Simulation languages for the following
applications:
Teke/ec
•
To write certification packages to test equipment or software
functionality, by writing protocoi-specific scenarios.
•
After identifying a specific problem usrng Chameleon 32
Analysis (for example, SABM collision), to develop simulation
programs to duplicate the problem.
•
If .having problems running certification packages (for
example, DON tests), to copy just the portion of the test
package you need, modify it, and run it.
p-2
09/27191
Preface
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Chameleon 32 BASIC Simulation Language
The Chameleon BASIC language is an interpreted test language
based on standard BASIC. Since BASIC is a widely-used
language, many Chameleon users are already familiar with its
general format and usage, and can adapt quickly to Chameleon
BASIC language.
Chameleon BASIC is structured so that you can develop programs
quickly. It also has the added benefit of providing an interactive
interface to the user. You can enter many commands directly at the
BASIC prompt.
The ability to write your programs and run them without compiling
means that you can reduce the amount of time required to debug
programs.
BASIC provides a user-friendly interface for configuring various
parameters through the use of set-up menus. It is possible to use
Chameleon BASIC to determine your fundamental test design, and
then develop the complete test system using C.
C Development System
The optional C Development System allows you to write C
applications programs tailored to your individual testing needs.
With the Chameleon 32 C Development System, you have:
•
Automatic support of layers 1 and 2, with Simulation and
Analysis libraries for upper layer programming
•
UNIX-like libraries for input and output
•
Full-feature C compiler, per standard Kernighan & Ritchie,
producing 68010 object code
•
vi Editor, linker, and loader via the C Menu Shell
•
Libraries for screen displays for user-created windows
The Chameleon 32 C Development System includes the following
special libraries with protocol-specific functions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
~
•
Teke/ee
Bit Oriented Protocols (BOP)
HOLC
SOLC
LAPO
Asynchronous
BSC
ISDN Basic Rate Interface
ISON Primary Rate Interf~ce
p-3
09/27/91
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
•
•
Preface
Analysis
2B1 a U-Interface
.
.
TheC Development system, combined with the Chameleon 32
multi-tasking operating system, M8-DOS file compatibility, and
Kermit file transfer, provides you with a truly flexible application
development capability.
ISDN Primary Rate Interface
ISDN Basic Rate Interface
2B1 aU-Interface
The Chameleon 32 can be configured for ISDN ANSI Primary Rate,
CEPT Primary Rate, ISDN Basic Rate Interface, or ISDN Basic
Rate U-Interface testing, inc::luding powerful Simulation capabilities
and comprehensive Analysis interpretation.
The ISDN Primarx Rate Interface lets you connect directly to either
a 1.544-Mbps (23B+0) or 2048-kbps CEPT (30B+D) ISDN
interface. There is also a Primary Rate Interface Statistics
application which displays error statistics.
The ISDN Basic Rate Interface lets you connect directly to an ISDN
192-kbps (2B+0) interface.
a
The 2B1
U-Interface lets you connect directly to a Layer 1
64-kbps (2B+D) network.
Dual Port System
The Chameleon 32 Dual Port system allows you to:
•
Simulate different communications channels on two physical
ports simultaneously
•
Test any two, different protocols simultaneously
The Dual Port system gives you access to a variety of testing
applications. Each port can perform independently, providing
multiple interface configurations, including the following
combinations:
Take/ec
•
Two V-series interfaces (V.24, V.3S, V.36)
•
One V-series and one ISDN Basic R~te Interface
•
One V-seri$s and one Primary Rate Interface
•
One Basic ~ate and one ISDN Primary Rate Interface
09/27191
Preface
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
•
•
Two ISDN Basic Rate Interfaces
Two ISDN Primary Rate Interfaces
Each physi9al port provides independent monitoring or simulation
with a BOP acquisition rate of up to 64 'kbps with dense traffic (one
flag beween frames). Like the Single Port system, Dual Port,offers:
•.
ISDN Basic. Rate access at 192 kbps,
•
ISDN ANSI Primary Rate access at 1.544 Mbps
•
ISDN CEPT Primary Rate access at 2.048 Mbps
•
281Q U-Interface access at 64 kbps (8 channels) and 16
kbps (0 channel)
•
Hardware containing 8 microprocessors
•
Optional C Development system
With the unique page format of the Chameleon 32, you can view the
activity of both ports on separate display pages and relate events.
The LED display can be switched between the ports for physical
interface monitoring.
.
All existing Chameleon 32 hardware and software options are
compatible with the Dual Port system.
Relatea
Documents
In addition to this manual, the following documentation is available
for the Chameleon 32, depending on the software options you
purchased with your machine.
•
•
•
•
•
Taka/ae
Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual, Volume II
(Part No. 91 0-4002)
Chameleon 32 Simulation Manual, Volume III
(Part No. 910-3372)
Chameleon 32 C Manual, Volume IV
(Part No. 910-3384)
Chameleon 32 Quick Reference Guide
(Part No. 910-3353)
.
Chameleon 32 Tutorials
(Part No. 910-3374)
p-5
09/27/91
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
CHAPTER
List of illustrations
Preface
One
Express Instructions
Introduction .................................................................... 1-1
Power Up ...................................................................... 1-1
Booting the System .............................................................. 1-3
Port Configuration ...................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Application Selections . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
. Page Manipulation Keys ......................................................... 1-11
TWo
Hardware and Installation
Setting Up the Chameleon 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Front Panel .................................................................... 2-3
LED Overlays .................................................................. 2-4
Chameleon 32 ................................................................. 2-4
Chameleon 32 Rear ............................................................. 2-5
. Chameleon 32 Internal Components '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Display ..................•.................................................. 2-7
Card Cage ..............•..•...................................•. ~ . ... . . . . . . . 2-8
Disk Drives .............•.................................................... 2-8
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
250 Volt Operation ........• ~ . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Temperature Requirements . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Case DeSign ..............•.................................................... 2-9
Hardware Self-Tests ................................ :. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 0
Coupler Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
RAM Test .................................................................. 2-14
Software Installation ............................................................ 2-15
Three Using the Chameleon
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Simulation and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Configuration Menus .. . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
, Setup Mode Parameter ....•..•..............•................................. 3-5
Mode of Operation Parameter ..•................... '.......•..................... 3-7
Physical Interface Parameter • • . . . • • . • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Protocol Parameter ..•..•..••.....•.••................•.•.•................... 3-9
MonitOring Data Source ....•.......•..•...............•........ ... " . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Capture Mode . . . 4 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 3-12
Function Keys .....••...•..••..•....•............•............................. 3-13
F6 Setup .........••.....••••......•.•................•••................... 3-13
F7 Physicl ........• ; .....••...•.............•.•••.....•.•................... 3-13
F8 Version ..............•••.......•.........••..................•.......... 3-13
TOC-1. 09/27/91
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
CHAPTER
F9 Save .................................................................... 3-14
F10SetT.O .•......•.•.......•••...•..............•••...•.................. 3-15
Creating an Autobooting DEFAULT file ......•......•..•.....•....•..•••... , ......... 3-16
Applications Selection Menu .................... ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Monitoring Applications ...•.................... ,.............................. 3-18
Simulation Applications ..............................•.......•................ 3-18
Function Keys ................................ : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
F1 Load/Stop A . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
F6 Reset . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
F7 Menu •.•...........................................•................. 3-21
F8 Save ....•.........................................•.................. 3-22
F9 Set T.O. . .•............••.•......•.•.................•............... 3-23
F10 Exit . . . . . . • . . . . • . . • . . . • • . . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Acquisition : .•..•.........................•........••........••............. 3-24
Stopping Applications ..........................................•..........•..... 3-24
Time Stamping ...••......•.........................•.......................... 3-24
Dual Port on the Chameleon 32 ........................................... ;....... 3-25
Configuration Menu .......................................................... 3-27
Port B Configuration ...................................•................... 3-27
LED Display ..•...........•........................ ; ..................... 3-27
Protocol Selection . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Applications Selection Menu ......•...............•••...•••...••....•...•...... 3-28
F1 Load A •...•••.•........•...........•.....•.......•................... 3-28
F2 Load B ..........•............•................•.•.................... 3-28
F3 Load AB .•........•...............•...........•.•..................... 3-28
Time Stamping ........•..•.......... '.' ..•••.......•.................•....... 3-30
Chameleon 32 Pages ............•....................•....................... 3-31
Multiple Pages. . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
The Active Page .....•.•......•...................•.••........... . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Chameleon 32 Keyboard .•...........•..............•........' ................. 3-33
Dedicated Key Fundions .................•................................. 3-33
Left-Hand Keys .....••............................•......•................ 3-34
Right-Hand Keys ..........•.............................................. 3-35
Arrow Keys ...........•.............•...•................................ 3-36
ASCII Keys ...........•..........................................•....... 3-36
Page Manipulation .....•.............................•.......•....•. ; ........ 3-37
On-Line Help ......•...•.•.............•..........•.•.•..••.••......•....... 3-38
Soft Function Keys ...•.......•...•.•. '. . . • . . . • . . . . . . • . . . • • . . • • • • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . 3-39
!
Four
Analysis
Starting Analysis •••••••••.•••.. ,..................................................
AnalySis Applications .•.••.••••••.•••.•..••.•.........•••.•••..•.••••..•••..•.....
Saving Data .••••.••....•••.•••.••.•.•.......•..••...••.•....••.•••..••..•......
General Features of the Analysis Page •..••..•.•...••..•...•••••.••••.•••.•.•..••..•.
DCEIOTE Display •.••.•.•••.••..••.•••..•.•.•...••••.•...••••..••....•..••.•.•
TOC-2. 09/27/91
4-1
4-1
4--1
4-2
4--2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
PAGE
tMM!!f!i!i!/!¥h!;WiiBWtMi¥!!i!j!j!fii#!ii!!iiiWiitiiHtfHii!if.Mit§fNtfj![!,#?i!!fii!!it!i!im&iii!!.~1ti!MitifhlMiii!!iili!!i!iliitMW!ffi!Hii!!KWii¥WiM!iiii¥!¥@i!filMifW4!iiltWWtii$i!¥tJMH
Colors ...................................................................... 4-3
Interlace Lead Transitions ...................................................... 4-3
Baud Rate Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Incomplete Event Display ....................................................... 4-4
TIme Stamping ................................................................ 4-4
History Trigger Feature ........................................................... 4-5
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
F1 ...................................................................... 4-6
F2 ...................................................................... 4-7
F3 ...................................................................... ~
F4-F9 .....................................................•............ ~
FlO ................................................................... , . ~
Function Key Files .......................................... :................. 4-9
Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 0
Aora .................................................................. 4-10
Borb ............................................................... ·... 4-10
Ctrl B . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 0
Ctrl C ................................................................... 4-11
Ctrl E ................................................................... 4-11
Ctrl N ................................................................... 4-11
Ctrl P ....•.............................................................. 4-11
History Printing: Method 1: .......•..................................... . . 4-12
History Printing: Method 2: ........... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Ctrl Z ................................................................... 4-14
Acquisition Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Event Overwritten Message ................................................. 4-16
History Page Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
History Lock . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
History Freeze Mode ......................................................... 4-17
History Display Commands .................................................... 4-17
Five
Dual Line
Introduction .................................................................... 5-1
Dual Une vs. Analysis ............................................... ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Dual Une Modes ................................................................ 5-3
Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . '.' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Display ...•............•.......................•.•.................•.....'. 5-4
Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . • . • . • . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . 5-4
Function Keys .... . . . . . . . . • . . • . . • • • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . • . • • . . • . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . 5-5
Freeze Mode ...•........ : ............................•.........•...•........ 5-7
Display ......•.................•.....•..........•.••..•.•................ 5-7
Cursor Keys ....................•.. .. ' . • . . • . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Function Keys .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Marking Bytes .............•..........................•..•......•..•....•....•.. 5-9
Clearing Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . 5-1 0
TOC-3. 09/27/91
•
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
CHAPTER
Six
Dlrect-To-Disk
Introduction ......•••.•.. .-......................................................
General Notes ... '.' . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... • . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording Traffic with Direct-To-Oisk .........................•...............•......
Replaying Direct-To-Oisk Traffic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Dir~To-Disk Data to a File ..................•................•............
Loading a Direct-To-Oisk File ............... '.......................................
Seven Statistics
Introduction .•.•..••.......•...•................•...............................
Statistics Display •.•••..•......•................. : ...............................
Statistics Function Keys .........................................................
Address Function Keys ..••.•.......•..........•........... ~ . • . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . .
Protocol Layer Function Key .•................•.........•..........••...........
Print Function Key ....................................•.•.....................
Reset Function Key ..........•................•................•..•... '.' .......
lime/Date Function Key ................................•......•....•...........
Bytes Function Key .................•..... , ...................••..............
Utilization Statistics ••.•.•......•.....•.•..•.•••..........••.........•.....••.....
Performance Page •••••.•••••.••••...•••••.......•....•.••.•...•...•.•....•••....
Function Keys ••••••.••••...••.••.••••...••.•....•...•••...•......• '.' . . . • • . . . .
Interpretation •••••••••.•••••...••.•••••..•.•...•.•.•••••...•.•.•..•....•.....
Calculation of Statistics Performance .................................••...........
Eight
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-6
6-7
7-1
7-2
7-2
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-6
7-6
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-8
7-9
7-9
Triggering
Introduction .........•...•.•..•................................................. 8-1
Condition!Action ...•................•.....................................•..... 8-1
Default .•..............•..•.........•...•...••.... : . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Starting Triggering .•.•.....•.••......••.••.....•.••..........................•... 8-4
The Triggering Page ....•....•........•..........•............................... 8-5
F1 Start a New Session ..•........•....•.......••.......••..................... 8-5
F2 Load a Triggering File from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Triggering Editor •......•.••.......•...................•....................... 8-7
Name Parameter ..•.............•.......................................... 8-7
F1 Addtrig ••...•.•...•......•.........•.•.................•......••.... 8-7
F2 NewName ...•..••••..•.....••...•••.•.•....••••......•..•.......•... 8-7
F3 Deltrlg ••..••••.••.•.•••..•.• ; .....•.•••..••••..••....•. ; • . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
F8 Restart •••.••••••.•...••••.•••••••••••.•.•.•••••...•••.••.....•.••.. 8-8
F9Load ............ ~ ..........
8-8
F10 Save ........................................
8-8
Status Parameter •..•••••••..•.••••••••••••.••••...•••..••.•••••.••...••... 8-9
F1 1stlime ••••..••.•••.•..•.••.••••••..•••.•••••••.•••....••••..•.•••.. 8-9
F2 Disable ••••.•.•••••••.••••••.•..••••••••.• , •••••.•••••.•....•.•• ; •.. 8-9
F3 Whenever .••.••••.••.•.•.••••..•.•••••••••.••.•••••.•.••.......••... 8-9
Conditions Parameter ••••••..•••••••••.••••.•••.••••••....••.•••••••..•..•. 8-10
o.o.o • • • • • • • • • • • • • • o •• a
II
TOC-h 09/27/91
•••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••
It
•••
e' • •
TABLE OF'CONTENTS
PAGE
CHAPTER
Logical NOT ............................................................ 8-10
Conditions Menu Structure •.............................................. 8-11
DTElDCE . . . . . • • . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Error .........•........•................•............................. 8-12
Counter .............................................................. 8-12
limer .........•...................................................... 8-13
RLlime ............................................................... 8-13
Frame ............................................................... 8-13
FramLen ............................................................. 8-15
Protocol ......... ; ..............•..•...................~ .............. 8-15
HDLC ...................................•.......•................. 8-16
a.921 .....•............. '..............•.•.....•....•........•..... 8-17
X.25 ..........................•........•.................•......... 8-18
a.931 ..............•............................•................. 8-19
DASS2 .................................••.......•..•.............. 8-20
SS#7 Triggering ........................ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
#7 L2 (SS#7 Level 2) ................................................. 8-23
#7 L3L4 (SS#7 Level 3 and Level 4) ..................................... 8-25
CT TUP (S5#7 TUP) ................................................. 8-33
CT ISUP (SS#7 ISUP) ................................................ 8-35
TR71SUP .•.•..................... : ........................•....... 8-39
Variable ..••.••••.•...•..................•.•..............•....•...... 8-42
Leads .......•...........................•.•.•......•.......•...•..... 8-43
Port .......................................•.........•............... 8-43
Actions .•..•......•..................................................... 8-44
Arm .........•........................................................ 8-44
Stats ...•............•................................................. 8-44
Display .........•.•....•.............................................. 8-44
->Disk .•..............•................•............................. 8-45
Mesg .......•........................................................ 8-45
StopAc ............................................................... 8-45
IncCnt .•............................................................. 8-45
ResCnt ............................................................... 8-46
limer ..........•........•............................................ 8-46
SetVars .............................................................. 8-46
V Arith .•.......•.....•.••............................................ 8-46
TrigOut . • . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . 8-46.
Run lime Triggering Page ... '.' . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . • . . . • . . • • . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . . 8-47
Messages •••..•••.••.•..•.••..........•.•..•.....••........•....••.•.....•• 8-48
Programming Examples .•..•....•........•.••.........••....••••..•.•..•....•.... 8-49
Nine
Utilities
Introduction ...•.••...•.•••..•.•••..•....... ~ . . . . . . • . . . . • . . • . • . . • . • . • • . . . . . . . . . •
Menu Access ••••....•..••.....•••.....•..•... _...••......••••.•......••.....•...
F1 Remote 1/0 Port Setup •••...••..•.•......•....• '...•.••.•.•.•.•••....••••••.....
Serialized Remote Mode •.•....••....••.•••....•..•.•........•..•.•.....•......
TOC-S. 09/27/91
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-3
TA'BLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
CHAPTER
Remote I/O Menu . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s-4
Compatible Terminal Type ...................................................... s-s
Baud Rate' ...............•.....•........•........•.......................... s-s
Number of Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Number of Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Parity ...................................................................... ~
Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~
Remote Terminal Keyboard ..................................................... 9-7
Keyboard Hex Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
F2 Printer Setup ............................................................ ;... 9-9
Printer Type ................................................................ 9-1 0
Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 0
Print Commands and Keys (Table) ............................................. , . 9-11
F3 Set Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
F4 Traffic Load/Save ................................................. '.' ......... 9-13
Operation .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 3
File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . 9-14
Data Source ............. '.... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Percent~ge . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Data Size .•......... ,.,. '.' ................................................. 9-15
F5 6051745 Analysis Conversion . • .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
F6 Check Free Disk Space ........•.....•••....•..........•............... '.' . . . . . 9-20
F7 Kermit/Connect Mode Setup .....•....•......•.•......•.•......••.............. 9-21
Modes .................................................................... 9-21
Data Transfer ................." .............................................. 9-21
Connect Mode ..............................................' ................ 9-21
Default Setup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Baud Rate ................................................................. 9-22
Number of Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Number of Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Parity ..................................................................... 9-23
File Type .............................. " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Number of Retransmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Transmission Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Fa Backup/Restore Menu ...................................•.................... 9-26
Operation ...•..........................•............•...................... 9-27
Source ................................;................................... ~27,
F9 FMS File Conversion ...................•.•...•...•...•.............•......... So-29
Ten
File Management
introduction ........................................... '..•............... ~. . . . ..
File and Diredory Structure .•.•.•...... , •...........•................, • . . . . . . . . • . . . .
Files •.•.. , .......... , ..•.......•.... , ..•...................••..........•..
Hard Disk Directories .........•.. : . ,', .•..•. , , .••........••.••.. , .. ~ . • . . . . . • . . . .
F!oppy Disk Diredories ....•.•....•••...•...............•....••.••............
TOC-6. 09/27/91
10-1
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
CHAPTER
Hard Disk Directory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . . • • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . .. 10-3
File Extensions (Table) .....................• ".•.....•••.........•.•......•..... 1Q-4
C Applications ..................................................•..•...•..•.... 10-0
Menu Access ...................................................•.............. 10-0
Ust Selector ................................................................ 10-7
View Files .................................................................. 10-7
etr! D R&-Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
View Files ..........•.................................................... 10-9
F1 Chdir (Change Directory) .............................•..................... 10-8
F2 Copy (Copy Files) .........................•.........•.................... 10-10
F3 Delete (Delete File) .............•...•.••....•........................•.... 10-12
F4 Rename (Rename File) ...........•..•...••...•.......•........•.•......... 10-1~
F5 Format (Format Aoppy Disk) .......•..•..•..••............................. 10-14
F6 Dsk Copy (Disk Copy) ..................................................... 10-15
F7 TX File (Transmit File) .•...................•......•....................... 10-16
F8 RX File (Receive File) ..................................................... 10-19
F9 Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Eleven BERT (Bit Error Rate Testing) "
Introduction ••......••.............•..•.....•..••....••..•.•............•...... 11-1
Using the BERT Application ••.•......•••••....••.•..•......•...•..••..•...." ...... 11-3
Setup Menu .•••••...•.•...........•.....••....•..•...•.•.•..•.•.......•.... 11-5
Setup Parameter Descriptions .........................•.•...••..•........... 11-9
BERT Pattern Editor .....••................•.............•..••........•...... 11-13
BERT Run-time Pages ...•.......•.•......•.................•............... 11-15
Common Displays . . . • • . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-15
Function Keys .......................................••...•.............. 11-16
Errored Bits/Errored Block Statistics ............................•..•.......... 11-18
Errored Seconds Statistics .........•................... ~ .•.•...•........... 11-20
Synchronization Statistics ..................................•.•.... ". . . . . . . .. 11-22
Une Synchronization ............•..............................•............... 11-23
TOC-7. 09/27/91
TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPENDIX
Appendix A:
PAGE
Preliminary Troubleshooting
Tekelec Customer Support ........................................................ A-1
Board Configuration ................................................. ; ........... A-3
Appendix B:
Electrical Characteristics of the V.24 and V.3S Interfaces
V.24lnterface .................................................................. B-1
V.3S Interface .................................................................. 8-5
Appendix C:
Pinouts
Parallel Printer Connedor Pinout .................................................. C-1
Serial Printer Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. C-2
Remote Terminal Connector Pinout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. C-3
Aux1 and Aux 2 Connector Pinouts ...........•......' .................................... , C--4
Video Connector Pinout .................' .... ; ....... ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. C-5
Appendix 0:
SCSI Signal Interface
Appendix E: '. Chameleon 32 LED Overlays
Standard LED Overlay ......•..•.......•.......................................... E-1
ANSI Primary Rate Interface Overlay ................................................ E-3
CEPT Primary Rate Interface Overlay ......................................... ; ...... E-5
Basic Rate Interface Overlay ....................................................... E-7
X.21 Interface Overlay ............................................................ E-9
2B1 Q lJ-Interface Overlay ....................................................... E-11
Appendix F:
Decimal-Hexadecimal Conversion Chart
Appendix G:
ASCII-EBCDIC-HEX Table
Appendix H:
Electrical Characteristics of the V-Type Interfaces
Appendix I:
DSCS Interface Module
Introduction ............••.............................•........................
The Interface Module ......•.........••....•.....................................
Simulate • . . . . • . . . . . • • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . .
Specifications ..•.•.•.......•..•....................•...........................
iii
Appendix J:
,
•
"
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
••
1-1
1-1
1-2
1--2
1-3
G.703 Co-Directional Interface Module
Introduction ..................:........................ •. '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . J-1
TOC-S. 09/27/91
TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPENDIX
PAGE
nmi~~j!@i!fiiiw!J#Mt!iiJMMM!!M1!Wil!~ii¥it!i!imWN@!#MM!!i!J!!!fiif¥iti!!i!i!WWJM!N§!!i!i!iW!t¥i!iii!i!t!!!iti#Wiiiifi!!!M!!U!iitifi!i!tf!!Ji!UtUttt!NfN¥t!!tr@!!W!Niifffii@!iWil!lNf
The Interface Module ............................................................
Simulate .................-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications ..................................................................
Appendix K:
J-1
J-2
J-2
J-3
256k Data Capture Option
Introduction .................................................................... K-1
Umitations ..................................................................... K-2
Appendix L:
TTL Interface Module
Introduction ....................................................................
Interface Module ..........•........................................... . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TTL Interface Connectors .......................................................
DIP Switch Configuration .......................................................
Appendix M:
Remote Control Via Modem
Glossary
Index
•
TOC-9. 09/27/91
L-1
L-2
L-3
L-4
L--6
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE
CAPTION
PAGE
t::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::(::::::;:::::::::::::::::::'::;:::::::::::::::::::::;::::::::;::::iii:::::':::::::::::::)::::;:;::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::;:::::'::!/::::::!:::¥:::::::::iii::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::!:::::')::::iii::!:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::;::::::!::::::::::;::::::;:::::::::::::::::;::::::::::;::;::::::;::::::::::::::::::1
Chapter 1: Express Instructions
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.
1. 7.
1.8.
Chameleon 32 Rear View .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Chameleon 32 Front View (Closed) .......................................... 1-2
Chameleon 32 Front View (Open) ............................................ 1-3
Power Up Screen ........................................................ 1-4
Menu Setup Mode (Dual Port) .............................................. 1-5
Protocol Setup Menu ...................................................... 1-7
Applications Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Page Manipulation Keys .................................................. 1-11
Chapter 2: Hardware and Installation
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Chameleon 32 Front Panel (Detail) ........................................... 2-3
Chameleon Rear Panel (Detail) ............................................. 2-5
Chameleon 32 Mechanical Layout .......... '" .............................. 2-7
Self Test Menu ......................................................... 2-10
Coupler Test Menu ...................................................... 2-11
Coupler Test (Port A or Port B) ........................................... .. 2-11
Error Messages Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Bum In Test ........................................................... 2-13
Ram Test .............................................................. 2-14
'Chapter 3: Using the Chameleon 32
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
Monitoring Transmissions ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Simulating Host Transmission ............................................... 3-2
Menu Setup Mode (Host Port) .............................................. 3-4
Chameleon 32 Files Display ................................................ 3-5
Monitor Setup Menu ...................................................... 3-9
Cyclic Traffic Storage in the Acquisition Buffer ....... ',' ........................ 3-12
Applications Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Chameleon 32 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Sample Dual Port Configuration Menu ..................•.................... 3-26
Chameleon 32 Applications Selection Menu .............................•.. ',' . 3-29
Sample Screen Display ................................................... 3-32
The Chameleon 32 Keyboard ................•.......•.•................... 3-33
LOI-1
09127/91
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE
PAGE
CAPTION
3.13
3.14
Arrow Keys .........................•.................................. 3-36
Chameleon 32 Help Facility ............................................... 3-38
3.15
Chameleon 32 Softkeys ................................................. 3-39
Chapter 4: Hardware and Installation
4.1
Sample X.25 History Page ................................................ 4-10
4.2
Analysis Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.3
History Buffer Keys ....................................................... 4-12
4.4
Single Port Buffer Capacities .........•.................................... 4-15
4.5
Dual-Port Buffer Capacities ..........•.......... , ......................... 4-15
4.6
Event Overwritten Processes .........•................•................... 4-16
4.7
History Display Command Keys ....•.....' ....................... '........... 4-18
Chapter 5: Event:
5.1
Chameleon 32 VO Buffers with Sample Events ................................. 5-1
5.2
Event Page for Bit-Oriented Protocols .................... ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... 5-2
5.3
Event Page for Async ................ . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.4
Event Page for BSC ................•..................................... 5-4
Chapter 6: Statistics
No Listings
-
Chapter 7: Statistics
7.1
Available Statistics Pages .................................................. 7-1
7.2
Sample Statistics Page (X.25 Une Statistics) ................................... 7-3
7.3
Sample Statistics Report (X.25Une) .......................................... 7-7
7.4
The X.25 Performance Page ................................................ 7-8
Chapter 8: Triggering
8.1
Trigger Components .... ~ ..•........•.••..•......•.......•................ 8-1
8.2
Logical Operations of Triggering ......••...•........••.•..•......•........... 8-2
8.3
The Chameleon 32 Application Selection Menu (X.25 Monitoring) ...•............... 8-4
8.4
The Triggering Page .............•...•..............•.•................... 8-5
8.5
The Triggering Editor .............•.••.•....••...•.....•.•................. 8-6
LOI-2
09127191
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE
PAGE
CAPTION
8.6
Triggering Conditions Menu Structure ......................................... 8-11
8. 7
SS~7
8.8
SS#7 Level 3 and Level 4 Triggering Options ...•..................... , . . . . . . . . 8-26
8.9
Heading Code Mnemonic Selection for Telephone User Part (TUP) ................ 8-28
8.10
TUP Initial Address Message (lAM) Form ............................ '.' ....... 8-29
8.11
SS#7 CCITI TUP Level 3 and Level 4 Options ................................ 8-33
8.12
SS#7 CCITI ISUP Level 3 and Level 4 Option ................................ 8-35
8.13 .
The ISUP Mnemonic Table ................................................ 8-36
8'.14
SS#71TR7ISUP Level 3 and Level 4 Options ................................. 8-39
8.15
The 1TR7 ISUP Mnemonic Table ......................................... . . 8-40
8.16
DCE Interface Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
8.17
DTE Interface Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
8.18
Run-lime Triggering Page .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
8.19
Programming Example 1 - .Display Frames with Same Call Reference .............. 8-49
8.20
Programming Example 2 - Alert Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
8.21
CCITI TUP Sample Trigger ....................................... , ....... 8-52
8.22
A Basic TrigOut (Trigger External Device) Setup ............................... 8-53
8.23
R5-232 Pinouts for Triggering to External Device .............................. 8-54
8.24
TrigOut Pulse Pattern .................................................... 8-54
Level 2 Triggering Options ........................................... 8-23
Chapter 9: Utilities
9.1
Utilities Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2
Terminal Setup Menu ..................................................... 9-5
9.3
Chameleon 32 Keyboard Emulation .......... , ............................... 9-7
9.4
Keyboard Hex Values ..................................................... 9-8
9.5
Print Commands and Keys .............................................. . . 9-11
9.6
Set Date and lime Menu ................................................. 9-12
9.7
Traffic Operations Menu ................................................... 9-13
9.8
File Conversion Menu .................................................... 9-16
9.9
6451705 Data Conversion Menu ............................................ 9-17
9.10
Check Free Disk Menu ........•.......................................... 9-20
9.11
Kermit Connect Mode Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9.12
Backup Menu .......................................................... 9-26
LOI- 3
09127/91
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS·
FIGURE
PAGE
CAPTION
Chapter 10: File Management
10.1
Chameleon 32 Hard Disk Directory Structure ................................. 10-3
10.2
Chameleon File Name Extensions .......................................... 10-4
10.3
File Management Menu .................................................. 1Q-6
1004
File Transfer Utility (Transmit) Screen ........ , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-17
10.5
File Transfer Utility (Receive) .............................................. 0-20
<
Chapter 11: BERT
11 .1
Hardware Configurations ............................•.................... 11-2
11.2
Network Test Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-2
11.3
BERT SYNC Setup Menu ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11 ~
11.4
The BERT ASYNC Setup Menu ....................... , ....................
11.5
The BERT Setup Menu for ISDN PRI ........................................ 11-7
11.6
The BERT Setup Menu for ISDN 1B 10 and BRI ............................... 11-7
1107
The BERT Setup Parameters for Available Interfaces ........................... U-8
11.8
BERT Data Pattern Algorithms ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-1 0
11.9
Signal Path in Remote (Transmit) Mode ...................................... 11-9
11.10
Signal Path in Local (Transmit) Mode ............................ '" . . . . . . . . .. 11-9
11.11
Signal Path in (Local) Receive ............................................. 11-9
11 .12
BERT Pattern Editor ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
11 .13
The First BERT Run-Time Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-18
11.14
Second BERT Run-Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 ~20
11.15
The BERT Synchronization Statistics Page .................................. 11-22
11~
Appendix H: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays
E.l
The Standard LED Display Overlay ............................... ~ .......... E-2
E.2
The ANSI Primary Rate Interface LED Display .................................. E....3
E.3
CEPT Primary Rate Interface LED Display ..................................... E-5.
E.4
Basic Rate InterfaceLED ...........•....................................... E-7
E.5
X.21 Interface LED Overlay ................................................ E-9
E.S
The Chameleon 322810 U-Interface LED Display ......... ~ ................... E-11
LOI- 4
09127/91
CHAPTER ONE:
EXPRESS INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
This section gives you brief step-by-step instructions for
powering up the Chameleon 32, and configuring one or both
ports (where applicable) for monitoring or simulation.
It
assumes that this is the first time the Chameleon 32 has been
used. If your screens differ from those described in this
section, it indicates that your Chameleon 32 has been
previously configured.
If you want more information on any of the topics covered in
this section, refer to Chapter Three: Using the Chameleon 32.
If you are using a Dual Port Chameleon 32, perform the steps
in this section, and then refer to the section in Chapter Three
entitled Dual Port on the Chameleon 32 for additional
information on configuring and using a Dual Port machine.
If you want to configure the Chameleon 32 to use the C
Development System, refer to the Chameleon 32 C Manual,
Volume IV.
Power Up
To power up the Chameleon 32, do the following:
1.
Place the Chameleon 32 on a secure surface with the
Tekelec logo facing you, and easy access to the ports in
the rear.
To angle the front of the Chameleon upward for easy
viewing, rotate the two feet on the bottom front of the unit
forward until they lock into place.
Be sure that the feet are securely locked into place
before you rest the Chameleon on the feet.
TEKELEC
2.
Verify that the Chameleon 32 is set to the correct AC
voltage setting for your country. This has been preset at
the factory, but should be checked before th"e
Chameleon 32 is powered on. The AC Voltage Selection
is on the rear of the Chameleon 32, as indicated in
Figure 1.1 on the following page.
3.
Remove the power cord from the storage compartment
in the back of your Chameleon 32.
1-1
8/17'89
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Express Instructions
4.
Plug the power cord into the power inlet of the
Chameleon 32, as shown in Figure 1.1.
5.
Plug the other end of the power cord into a grounded
outlet.
.
0000000
AC VOLTAGE
SELECTION
'i:Do
:
Do:
~WR
I
I
D
FUSE
HOLDER
One of the following will be displayed:
•
OFF
If OFF t the timer is not set.
When the
Chameleon 32 is powered on, the DEFAULT
file will be loaded, but not executed.
•
(time)
If a value is displayed in the form MM:SS, it
indicates that the timer is set. The displayed
time indicates when the DEFAULT file will be
executed after the Chameleon 32 system
software is booted.
For example, if the timer value is set to 00:30,
the DEFAULT file will be loaded and executed
30 seconds after the system software is
booted.
The valid range of the Autoboot timer is 00:05
to 59:59.
When you press FlO Set T.O, the Fl key becomes a toggle to
turn the Autoboot timer ON or OFF. If you turn the timer ON,
you are prompted for a timer value. To change the value, use
the Delete key to erase the current time, enter the new time,
and then press Return.
If the Autoboot timer is set, the following message is displayed
when the system software is booted:
In xx min xx seconds the default configuration will start
When the timer expires, the DEFAULT ·file is automatically
loaded and executed. Press any key to abort the timer and
stop the execution of DEFAULT.
.
The following page outlines the steps necessary to create an
Autobooting DEFAULT configuration file.
TEKELEC
3-15
7:589
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Creating an Autobooting DEFAULT File
To create a configuration file which automatically executes on
power up, perform the following steps:
1.
On the first Configuration Menu, enter the desired
configuration parameters.
2.
Press F10 Set T.O from either the Configuration Menu or
the Applications Selection Menu.
3.
If the Timer is OFF, press F1 ON.
4.
Press Delete to erase the current value.
5.
Enter any value and press Return. The valid timer range
is 5 seconds to 59 minutes, 59 seconds using the format
MM:SS. You must enter two digits for both the .minutes
and the seconds.
For example, to set the Autoboot timer to 1 minute. 30
seconds, enter:
01 :30 < Return >
6.
Press F9 Save.
7.
Press F1 Default to save the configuration and· timer
value as the DEFAULT file.
The Autoboot timer value must be saved as part of the
DEFAULT configuration file. .
8.
To test the Autobooting feature, reset the Chameleon.
When the system software is booted, the following
message is displayed in the center of the Main
Configuration menu:
In xx min xx seconds the default configuration will start
When the timer expires, the
automatically loaded and executed.
DEFAULT file
is
To abort the timer and stop the execution of DEFAULT,
press any key.
TEKELEC
3·16
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Applications Selection Menu
When you complete the first configuration menu, press Go. This
displays the Applications Selection Menu, as shown in Figure 3.7.
The applications available will depend on which protocol(s) and
mode of operation (Monitoring or Simulation) you selected in the
previous menu.
The Applications Selection Menu allows you -to select one or more
applications, and the ports you want to run the applications on. It
only displays the applications that are currently available for the
selected protocol(s). Figure 3.8 lists the Monitoring and Simulation
applications that are available for each protocol.
User C applications (simulation or analysis) may also appear in this
menu. See the next page for more information.
Note
Acquisition Mode
MonitOring
. Ports
ANALYSIS
A B
TRIGGER
X25STAT
A
EVENT
BASIC
MonitOring
Ports
-+ OIRTOSK
Simulation
Simulation
Ports
-+ FR_HOLC
SM_HOLC
T_SITREX
See page 3-20
Ports
SITREX
See page 3-21
See page 3-23
See page 3-21
See page 3-23
See page 3-22
Figure 3.7: Chameleon 32 Applications Selection Menu (Simulation Mode)
TEKELEC
3-17
05/01191
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
In Simulate mode, you can run Monitoring and Simulation at the
same timeon a single port. Figure 3.7, on the previous page, shows
an Applications Selection menu configured for X.25 Simulation.
The general features of the Applications Selection Menu are
described below.
Arrow Cursor
The red arrow cursor indicates the active window. You can select
and load applications in the active window. The white arrow cursor
indicates the inactive page. Press Shift, or ShiftJ.. to change the
active window.
.
Up/Down Arrow
If more applications exist than can be displayed in a window, a small
red arrow appears in the left border of the window. This indicates
which arrow key to press to display additional applications in that
window. For example, if an up arrow appears, press the up arrow
key to display additional applications.
Monitoring Window
The upper window displays the MonitOring applications that are
available for the selected protocol and configuration. Refer to the
next page for a list of applications by protocol.
Simulation Window
The lower window (in Simulation mode) . displays the Simulators
available for the selected protocol. Simulators are displayed in the
format Language.J)rotocoL F.or example, SM_HDLe is SIMP/L
HOLC. Refer to the Chameleon 32 Simulation Manual for a
description of the Simulators.
C Applications
C applications compiled on the Chameleon 32 can be started from
the Applications Selection .menu, if the executable C file conforms
to the following:
•
The file has the extension .exe.
•
The file is copied to one of the directories below (xxxx is a
protocol sub-directory of analysis or simu~:
a:\tekelec\analysis\xxxx
a:tekelec\Simu l\XXxx
The directory determines when the application will be displayed in
the Applications Selection menu. For example, if the application
resides in a:ltekeleclanalysislappl, it is displayed in the Monitoring
Only applications copied to
window for aU protocols.
a:lteke/eclanalysislappl can be started on Ports A+B on Dual Port
machines. C applications in all other directories must be stored on
If the application resides in
each port independently.
a:\tekeleclanalysis\x25, it is displayed in the Monitoring window
only when X.25 is the selected protocol. If the application resides .
in a:tekelec\Simul, the application appears in the Simulation window
for all protocols.
Note:
TEKELEC
Direct-to-Disk and Direct-trom-Oisk are available for all protocols.
Triggering is available for all protocols except Async, which
provides interface lead triggering only. If Triggering is listed in the
3-18
05101191
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
table below, it indicates that there are protocol-specific triggering
capabilities for that protocol. Several packages listed below are
optional.
APPLICATIONS AVAILABLE
PROTOCOL
MONITORING
CPACKAGE
BASIC SIMULATOR
Async
Analysis, Dual Line
Chameleon Async
Basic Rate
Interface
BASIC Runtime display
BRI Library
esc
Analysis, Statistics, Dual Chameleon BSC
Line
esc & Analysis Library
DASS2
Analysis, Dual Line,
Triggering
BOP & Analysis Library
DDCMP
Analysis, Dual Line
BOP & Analysis Library
DMI
Analysis, Dual Line
DPNSS
Analysis, Dual Line
ISDN
Analysis, Dual Line,
FRAMEM LAPD, SIMP/l LAPD & Analysis Library
(0.921/0.931 )
Statistics, Triggering
LAPD, Multi-Unk LAPD
Primary Rate
Interface
PRIMARY Runtime
display, Error Statistics
PRI Library
PSH
Analysis, Dual Line
BOP & Analysis Library
OLLC
Analysis, Dual Line
BOP & Analysis Library
SNAlSDLC
Analysis, Statistics, Dual FRAMEM SDLC, SIMP/L SDLC & Analysis Library
Line, Triggering
SDLC
SS7
Analysis, Dual Line,
Statistics, Triggering
V.120
Analysis, Dual Line
X.2S/HDLC
Analysis, Statistics, Dual FRAMEM HOLe, SIMP/L HDLC & Analysis Library
Line, Triggering
HDLC, SITREX,
T. SITREX
X.7S
Analysis, Dual Line
BOP & Analysis Library
2B10
Analysis, Statistics, 2B 1(
Runtime ..
U-Interface Library
FRAMEMDMI
Async & Analysis Library
BOP & Analysis Library
BOP & Analysis Library
,
SS#7 Simulator
V.120 SIMP/L
BOP & Analysis Library
Figure 3.8: Chameleon 32 Applications
TEKELEC
3-19
09/27/91
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Applications Selection Menu
Function Keys
The function key options for the Applications Selection Menu are
described in this section.
F1 Load/Stop A
This option enables you to load an application that you want to run
on Port A. To load an application, do the following:
1;
Move the red cursor arrow next to the application name.
2.
Press F1 Load A to load the application.
3.
A blinking A appears in the Ports column as the application
loads. When the letter stops blinking, the application is
loaded.' (Note that the F1 key reads Stop A when an
application is loaded. See step 7 for more information about
Stop A.)
4.
Load additional applications by repeating steps 1-3.
5.
When you have loaded all the applications, press Go.
B.
This starts the applications, as indicated by the appearance of
page banners at the bottom of the screen.
Note:
7.
Direct-To-Oisk does not have a page or banner.
When an application is loaded, the F1 key becomes the Stop
A key. This key has two functions:
•
If an application is loaded (but not running), and you
press F1 Stop A, that application will not run when you
press Go. When you press F1 Stop A, the letter A
disappears from the Ports column, as though the
application were never loaded.
•
If an application is running, and you press F1 Stop A, it
stops the application. To restart the application, you
must first load it, and then press Go. F1 Stop A stops an
individual application. Refer to F10 Exit and FB Reset
for additional options.
If you have a Dual Port machine, you may aJso have function keys
for loading applications on Port B and Ports AB (Ports A and B
shown on a single page display). Refer to page 3-28 for a
description of those keys.,
TEKELEC
3-20
09/27/91
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F6 Reset
This option affects all applications that are currently running. If
you are using a Dual Port machine, it affects both ports. If you
press F6 Reset it restarts the applications that are running, by
doing the following:
•
•
•
•
In Analysis, it clears the History buffer and clears the
History and Real Time page displays.
In Statistics, it resets all Statistics page values to zero.
In Triggering, it resets all triggers.
In Direct-From-Disk it replays the data in the direct-todisk area of the hard disk fr.om the beginning.
F7 Menu
When you press F7 Menu, you return to the first configuration
menu shown on page 3-5. This enables you to view your
current setup, but does not allow you to change the setup of a
port that has applications running.
If a setup cannot be changed, the port will display the
message busy next to the Mode of Operation.
For example, on a Dual Port machine, if you have applications
running on Port A, but Port B is off, you cannot change the
Port A parameters. but" you can set up Port B and start
applications.
To change parameters on a port with
applications running, you must stop all applications before
changing the configuration (see F10 Exit on the page 3-24).
TEKELEC
3-21
13090
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Fa Save
This option saves the current configuration to a file. When you
press F8 Save it saves the loaded applications and the
parameter values on the first configuration page.
When you press F8 Save, you are prompted for the name of
the configuration file. You have the following options:
F1 DEFAULT
If you press F1 DEFAULT, the file is
automatically named DEFAULT, and you are
returned to the Applications Selection menu.
You can have one configuration file named
DEFAULT at a time.
The DEFAULT configuration file can be
accessed as follows:
Note
•
It can be automatically executed on power
up using the Set T.O. (Timeout) option
described on the next page.
•
It can be loaded using the Files or
Autexec Setup Mode (see page 3-6 for
more information).
F2· F8
Names of previously loaded/saved
configuration files are displayed in the function
key strip so that you can quickly replace an
existing file.
Enter a name
If you want to assign a new filename, you can
type up to eight alphanumeric characters.
After you enter the file name, press Return.
There is also a Save option in the first configuration menu
Menu. Refer to page 3-15 for a description of this function.
The Save key appears as F9 on the Configuration menu and
as F8 on the Applications Selection menu. The difference
between these two Save keys, is as follows:
TEKELEC
•
F9 Save saves only the values displayed on the current
screen.
•
F8 Save saves the selected applications and the
parameters on the first configuration page.
3-22
11/1/89
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F9 Set T.O
The Set Time Out function is the same as the F10 Set T.O
function described on page 3-16. It determines whether the
DEFAULT configuration file is automatically executed when the
machine is powered on.
F10 Exit
This option stops all applications that are currently running. To
stop an individual application, use F1 Stop A. For Dual Port
machines, you can also use F2 Stop B, or F3 Stop AB
function keys to stop an application on the selected port( s).
To restart an application once it is stopped, first load the
application, and then press Go.
You can also use F6 Reset to restart all applications without
first stopping them.
TEKELEC
3-23
7'5'89
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Acquisition
Acquisition from the line ( in cyclic Capture Mode), or from
disk, starts when the Applications Selection Menu is displayed.
This is indicated by the message:
Running
To stop acquisition, press Run/Stop. This is indicated by the
message:
Acquisition Stopped
Acquisition from the line (using one buffer Capture Mode)
displays the message sequence:
Buffer Full
Acquisition Stopped
Acquisition is automatically stopped so that you can load
applications before capturing data. To start acquisition, press
Run/Stop.
Stopping
Applications
To stop a single application, perform the following steps:
1.
Select the Configuration banner.
2.
Move the red arrow cursor to the desired application.
3.
Press the function key that stops the application on the
desired port. For example, on a Single Port machine,
press F1 Stop A to stop the selected application.
4.
Stop additional applications, if desired.
5.
The banners of the stopped applications disappear from
the screen.
To stop all applications, perform the following steps:
1.
Select the Configuration banner.
2.
Press F10 Exit. This stops all applications. You can
then change configuration parameters for the port, or
select other applications.
Time Stamping
The Chameleon real-time clock provides time stamping of data
events for Monitoring applications. The time stamp clock's
resolution is ± 20 microseconds and represents the time at the
end of the event.
TEKELEC
3-24
7/5/89
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Dual Port on the Chameleon 32
The Chameleon 32 Dual Port system allows you to use two
ports to run multiple Monitoring and/or Simulation applications
simultaneously.
Each physical port provides independent
Monitoring or Simulation, with a line rate of up to 64Kbps. In
addition, on Dual Port machines you have the option of
selecting Fast Monitoring mode which enables you to monitor
traffic up to 256k bps on one port.
The Dual Port system gives you access to a variety of testing
applications. Each port can perform independently, providing
multiple interface configurations, using a combination of any
two interface options that are currently available for the
Chameleon. For example, Port A could be fitted with a V.35
interface and Port B with a Basic Rate Interface.
With the Chameleon 32's unique page format, you can view
the activity 9f both ports on separate display pages and
interrelate events.
If both ports are running the same
application, you can display the results of both ports on the
same page. The LED display can be switched between the
ports for physical interface monitoring.
Configuring and using a Dual Port machine is similar to using a
Single Port machine. However, the Dual Port system does
provide multiple interface configurations, making it somewhat
more complex than the Single Port machine. The additional
information you need to know is contained in this section.
Configuration Menu
The Dual Port Configuration Menu (Figure 3.9) has additional
parameters and display features which enable you to:
•
•
•
Configure the second port (Port B)
Select 256k data capture mode (Fast Monitoring)
Control the front panel LED display
Port B Configuration
The Chameleon 32 recognizes the number of ports available
on your system. On Dual Port machines, this causes the
Configuration Menu to display parameters that enable you to
configure Port B. With a Dual Port machine, you can configure
the Chameleon 32 ports for the following applications:
•
•
•
TEKELEC
Simultaneous monitoring on both ports
Simultaneous simulation on both ports .
Monitoring on one port, simulation on the other port
3-25
11/1/89
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
-G~--------------------Tekelec CHAMELEON 32 . Version x.x. Copyright (c) 1988
I
Press F6 to change the PROTOCOL setup
Setup Mode
Port A
Mode of Operation
Physical Interface
Protocol
'"-----'
Port B Parameter ---+--~
Port B
Press F6 to change
Mode of Operation
Physical Interface
Protocol
Press F6 to change
PORT A + B Data Source
Port Monitoring
Indication
C Development System
Appears only If C
Package Is Installed
Figure 3.9: Sample Dual Port Configuration Menu
Selected Front
'4-tr--- Panel LED Display
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
On a Dual Port machine, when a port is configured for
Simulation, you can simultaneously run Monitoring applications
on the same port to analyze the data being transmitted
between the Chameleon 32 and the device under test.
256k Data Capture Mode (Fast Monitoring)
When Monitoring is th~ selected Mode of Operation, the
Chameleon can monitor up to 64k bps with dense traffic (one
flag between frames). On Dual Port machines, you have the
option of selecting F4 Fast Mo (Fast Monitoring) as the Mode
of Operation for Port A. When selected, traffic up to 256k bps
can be acquired for Monitoring applications.
When you select Fast Monitoring, you cannot use Port 8;
therefore, the message Busy appears next to the Port 8
parameters.
Refer to Appendix K for additional information about using the
256k data capture option.
LED Display
Although there are two physical ports, the Chameleon 32s LED
panel can display the state of only one port at a time. The
LED display message at the top, right-hand corner of the
Configuration Menu indicates which port's leads are currently
For example, if the
being displayed on the LED panel.
message is LEOS: PORTS A, the front LED panel is displaying
the state of the leads on Port A.
To change the LED display, press the letter A or B to display
the leads of the desired port. For example, to display the
leads for Port 8, press the letter B. The LED display message
on the Configuration page changes to: LEOS: PORT B, and the
LED front panel displays the Port 8 leads.
Dual Port Protocol Selection
When both ports are configured for use, a configuration page
is available for each port. This enables you to select the
Monitoring protocol or Simulator for each port independently.
For example, if both ports are configured for Monitoring, when
you press F6 Setup, two protocol pages are displayed so that
you can select a protocol for each port.
TEKELEC
3-27
11/1/89
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Applications
Selection Menu
The Applications Selection menu provides the same functions
as the Single Port machine, except that you have the following
options for loading applications:
F1 Load A
Loads the selected application for Port A.
When the application is started, information for
Port A is shown in its own page.
F2 Load B
If Port B is configured for Monitoring or
Simulation, F2 loads applications for that port.
It functions the same as the F1 Load A key
described on page 3-20. Once an application
is loaded F2 changes to Stop B so that you
can stop the application.
F3 Load AB
F3 Load AB loads an application for both
ports, using a single page to display the
information for both Ports. The Load AB
option is available only for non-protocolspecific Monitoring. applications.
See
, additional limitations below.
To run the same application on both ports with
a separate page display for each port, load
the application for each port separately, using
F1 Load A and F2 Load B.
Once an
application is loaded F3 changes to Stop AS
so that you can stop the application.
When you move the arrow cursor from application to
application, the F1 Load A, F2 Load B, and F3 Load AB
functions keys are enabled only for the applications available
for that protocol.
For example, if Port A is configured for X.2S Monitoring and
Port· B is configured for BSC Monitoring, when the arrow
cursor is positioned on an X.2S application (such as X.2S
Statistics), only F1 Load A is enabled. In other words, you do
not have the option of loading an X.2S application for a port
configured for BSC Monitoring.
Limitations
Only two copies of an application can be running
simultaneously. For example, you can run Analysis on Ports A
and B independently, but not on Ports A, B, and AB.
Only. one copy of Triggering and Direct-to-Disk can be run at a
time.
TEKELEC
3-28
11/1/89
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's GUide
When you have loaded your applications, press Go to start
them.
This starts the applications, as indicated by the
appearance at page banners at the bottom of the page.
Figure 3.10 shows· an example display with both ports
configured tor ISDN monitoring. The page banners indicate
the ports for which an application is running, using the letters A,
B or AS in the banner name.
In the example below, the following applications are running:
•
•
•
Dual Line on Port B
0.921 Statistics on Port A and Port B on separate pages
Analysis (Real Time and History) on Port A and B,
together on a single page
Note that the LEOs for Port A are currently displayed in the
LED panel, as indicated by the message in the upper right
corner of the page.
I
J------------------~r·COnflguratton •
I LEOS: PORT A I
Applications Selection Menu
1'
ISelect Application and Port
I
Acquisition Mode
Applications
DIRTDSK
TRIGGER
--. Q921STAT
Running
Ports
Applications
I
Ports
ANALYSIS
A
DUALlINE
B
-0
-0
A+8
B
I . . DuafUne a
I
10000UneStat BI
ICHistoryAB >1
1'0921 LtneStatA:
-0
-0
-0
,•. Re~I.11rne.AB)1
Figure 3.10: Chameleon 32 Applications Selection Menu
TEKELEC
3·29
9590
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Time Stamping
Using the Chameleon
J
With a Dual Port Chameleon 32, the port's time stamp clocks
will only be synchronized if Monitoring is initiated on both ports
at the same time.
If Monitoring is started on one port after
the other port has been started, the Analysis time stamp may
differ by up to 10 milliseconds.
To synchronize the time stamps of both ports, press the
Run/Stop key. This will allow comparative measurements
between the ports to within the time stamp clock's minimum
resolution (plus or minus 20 micro-seconds).
Acquisition starts 1.5 seconds after you press Run.
TEKELEC
3-30
9'5,90
USing the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's GUide
Chameleon 32
Pages
Each Chameleon 32 application has unique pages, or
windows, that display information and menus. When you run
more than one application simultaneously, you have access to
the pages of each of the running applications.
The paging concept is analogous to having a stack of papers
on your desk. The stack of papers may contain memos,
reports, and messages, but you can have access to all the
information in the stack by moving the item you want to the top
of the stack. By shuffling papers, you can easily put them in a
different order, or scan for information.
Each of the following Chameleon 32 tasks has a dedicated
page:
•
Monitoring applications
~
~
~
~
~
•
•
•
•
History
Real Time
Dual Line
Triggering
Statistics
Simulation applications
Utilities Menu
File Management Menu
Configuration Menus
Each page is composed of a standard screen, keyboard, and
set of softkeys.
Multiple Pages
Each application that is running has its own page. The top line
of each page displays that page's name. You can position
individual pages on the Chameleon 32 screen so that you can
see several pages at once. The pages are displayed in
various colors to help you differentiate them on the screen.
There is no limit to the number of overlapping pages that you
can display simultaneously.
Figure 3.11 on the following page illustrates how the
Chameleon 32 screen appears with four pages displayed. The
name of the page is displayed in the upper right corner
(banner) of the page.
TEKELEC
3·31
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Using the Chameleon
.---i-+----------------------+.. .
03 RR
01
01 RR
01
ReaJTimeA
00
00
1
03 RR
00
01
01 I 0000
5
X25: Data 00 00
LCN = 20 LCGN =0
FB07
___ ()________________________~~__X_.2_5__
L_jn_e_A__~
X.Z5 LINE STATISTICS
START TIME: 00:00:00:000000 AM
LAST TIME: 00:00:00:000 000 AM
LCN:
STATE;
CALL CALL CONFIRM DATA TRANSFER
CLEAR
CLEAR CONFIRM
-8----------------------+
-8-
History A
~=====9
Utilities
Figure 3.11: Sample Screen Display
The Active Page
Although you can view multiple pages simultaneously, you can
access the menu and function keys of only one page at a
time. The active page is displayed with a highlighted banner,
and its available function keys at the bottom of the screen. In
Figure 3.11, the Real Time page is active.
To select a page, press the Select key. Each time you press
the key, the page banner for the next page in the sequence is
highlighted, indicating that the page has become active. When
a page is active, you can use the function keys displayed at
the bottom of the screen ..
Refer to page 3-37 for a complete description of the
Chameleon 32 page manipulation keys.
TEKELEC
3·32
9/5;90
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Chameleon 32
Keyboard
The Chameleon 32 comes with a custom designed keyboard, which
includes dedicated key functions and programmable or soft
function keys (Figure 3.12).
Note
To remove the keyboard from the Chameleon, disconnect the
The cable
keyboard cable at the Chameleon front panel.
connection on the keyboard itself is considered factory installed,
and should not be disconnected.
Figure 3.12: The Chameleon 32 Keyboard
Dedicated Kev Functions
The Chameleon 32 keyboard provides dedicated keys. These keys
function the same regardless of the application you are running.
There are five dedicated keys on the left side of the keyboard. Each
of these keys is labeled with two functions. The lower function is
executed when you press the key by itself. The upper function is
executed when you hold down Shift and press the dedicated key.
These keys are described on the following page.
TEKELEC
3-33
09/27/91
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Using the Chameleon
Left-Hand
Keys
Run/Stop
Starts/stops acquisition of traffic in Monitoring
Mode. (The Shift key has no effect.) When you
stop acquisition, the Chameleon 32 beeps, and
the message Acquisition Stopped is displayed on
the Application Selection menu.
Shift Print Page Prints the currently active page.
Print Scrn
Prints the current screen if there is a page banner
on-screen. If there is no page banner on-screen,
there will be no printout.
Shift Utilities
Flies
Invokes the Utilities page.
Invokes the File Management page.
Shift Hide Page Causes the active page to be hidden from view.
The application is still running, but you cannot see
its page.
\,
.
,
,
Show Page
Causes a' hidden page to be shown on top of the
active page. Ifthe active page is only one line, you
need to enlarge the page size before the Show
Page function will work.
Shift Replace
Replaces the active page with a hidden one. (See'
Shift Hide Page above.) You can toggle between
all currently displayed pages.
Select
Selects which page on the screen is the active
page.
'f
~
TEKELEC
09/27191
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Right-Hand
Keys
There are ten 'dedicated keys on the right side of the
keyboard.
Cancel
Clears error messages, and is used by certain
applications to .cancel user input.
Go
Accepts user input.
Mover
Slides the active page up over the other
displayed pages.
Shift Move r fills the entire screen with the
active page.
Pressing Shift Move r again
restores the pages you were displaying.
Slides the active page down over the other
displayed pages.
Movel
Scroll
r
Scrolls the text within the active page up.
Shift Scroll r scrolls the text within the active
page up the same number of lines as the
current page size.
Scroll l
Scrolls the text within the active page down.
Shift Scroll l scrolls the text within the active
page down the same number of lines as· the
current page size.
TEKELEC
3·35
7.589
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
There are four arrow keys located on the
right side of the Chameleon 32
keyboard.
Arrow Keys
DIDO
DODD
DODD
DOl
I
DOl
I
lOt
00
I
I
II
10
.. ~.
[!]@
HJI
CHAMELEON :12
Figure 3.13: Arrows Keys
The arrows keys are application specific.
example, when at the Protocol Setup Menu:
Ase~1
For
•
Pressing the ~ key moves the red cursor
arrow directly to the top option field.
•
Pressing the -+ key. moves the red cursor
arrow to the currently displayed bottom
option field.
•
Pressing the ~ key moves the red arrow
cursor to the next available option field.
•
Pressing the i key, moves the red arrow
cursor to the previously available option field.
Keys
On the front edge of each letter key is a blue
function. This label is the mnemonic of the
ASCII Control function accessed by that key.
The ASCII functions are used only when the
Chameleon 32. is being used for terminal
emulation. The functions are accessed by
pressing etrl plus the desired key.
For more information about using the
Chameleon 32 for terminal emulation, refer to
Chapter 9: Utilities.
TEKELEC
3·36
7589
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Page Manipulation
Although you can display multiple pages simultaneously, you
can access the menu and function keys of only one page at a
time. The following dedicated keys enable you to manipulate
the pages for the currently running applications.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Select
Replace
Movej
Move~
Hide·Page
Show Page
Select enables you to 'select the active page. Each time you
press Select, the next page banner is highlighted. When a
page is active, you can then use the associated function keys,
which are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Shift Hide Page hides the active page without stopping the
application. The banner disappears from the screen, but the
application continues to run.
Show Page displays hidden pages. If more than one page is
hidden, you must press Show Page once for each hidden
page. If the active page is only one line, you need to enlarge
the page size before the Show Page functio~ will work.
Shift Replace replaces the active page with a hidden one.
When you press Shift Replace, the active page is hidden, and
the next hidden page is displayed and becomes the active
page.
'
When you are running multiple applications, it is usually more
convenient to view one complete page at a time without other
pages or banners on the screen. One way to do this is to use
Shift Hide Page to hide all pages but one. You can then
toggle through each hidden page, displaying one at a time.
using Shift Replace.
When you have several pages/banners displayed. you can
change the size of the active page using the Move keys.
Move j displays more of the active page each time you press
the key. Move ~ displays less of the active page each time
you press the key. Each time you press one of these keys,
the active page moves up or down one line.
Shift Move j displays the active page in a special full-screen
mode (BLOW MODE). 'When in BLOW MODE, the letter B is
displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the page banner.
You cannot access any other pages while a page is displayed
in BLOW MODE. Pressing Shift Move j again returns the
screen to its former condition, disabling BLOW MODE.
TEKELEC
3·37
7'589
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Using the Chameleon
On-Line Help
To receive On-Line Help for any menu, press the Help key.
The screen below shows Help information for File
Management.
Pressing the space bar returns you to the current application.
Commands: Exit = Space Bar, Next Page = Up Arrow, Previous Page = Down Arrow
, . . . - - - - - - - - - - - - HELP - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
FilE MANAGEMENT
The File Management page enables you to copy, rename, and delete files from the
floppy and hard disk drives. The hard disk is A: and the floppy disk is B:. You
can also use the File Management page to format a floppy diskette for storing data
and to convert Chameleon II floppy disk files into Chameleon 32 format. Select a
file by using the arrow keys to move the cursor to the appropriate name. and then
press the SPACE BAR to highlight it. .
. You can select more than one file at a time.
selected your file(s) are:
F 1 - Change Directory .
F2 - Copy
F3
F4
F5
F6
-
Delete
Rename
Format
Disk Copy
F7 - Transmit File
F8 - Receive File
F9 - ·Connect
The available options once you've
Change the current (default) directory.
Copy one or more selected files from the current
directory to a· specified target location.
Delete one or more files or sub-directories.
Renames the selected files.
Formats floppy diskette.
Copies the entire contents of a floppy disk to
another floppy disk
Transmits files to a host computer.
Receives files from a host computer.
Establish a communications connection between
the Chameleon 32 and a host computer for file
transfer or host terminal emulation.
Figure 3.14: Chameleon 32 Help Facility
TEKELEC
3-38
7·589
Using the Chameleon
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Soft Function
Keys
Each application has a specific set of softkeys corresponding
to the ten function keys along the top of the keyboard. The
light in the upper right-hand corner of each function key
indicates which keys are enabled for the active page.
The keys' functions are displayed in a strip along the bottom
of the screen. This strip changes as the active page changes.
(See Figure 3.15 below.)
The function keys are fully programmable in Chameleon
BASIC and C. The Chameleon 32 Simulation Manual, Volume
11/ contains a complete description of Chameleon BASIC and
of programming of the function keys. Information about the C
Development System can be found in the Chameleon 32 C
Manual, Volume IV.
Port A
1619
01
X25:
Runl
Stop
I
,
"'
F1
0
1
I I
0
flO
F3
@ #
ESC
1
2
S
3
0
F4
1
Fil. .
02
01
35
5
4
6
FA4B
LCN =02
.....
"'
F6tF7
&
*
7
8
Q
W
E
R
T
y
U
DCl
HI
ENQ
DO
OC4
EM
N,AIC
LeGN = 0
.....
0
Fsol
%
Utiliti..
TAB
05
"'
"'
Print Pag_
Print Sun
Data
04
1
O
FS
I I
O
Fg
....
+
9
HT
0
\
:I
0
P
SI
OLE
{
[
}
DELETE
Hide Page
Show Page
CTRL
Replace
Select
A
5
D
F
G
H
SOH
OC3
EaT
"CIC
BEL
BS
SHIFT
CAPS
LF
Z
X
C
V
B
N
M
SUB
CAN
ETX
SYN
STX
SO
CR
0
K
L
VT
FF
<
RETURN
>
?
Mo"e
Scroll
Move
.
•
••
Scroll
+ +
.- +
-
/
HELP
Figure 3.15: The Chameleon 32 Softkeys
3-39
Go
SHIFT
LOCK
TEKELEC
°l~_
F10 ,
CHAPTER FOUR:
ANALYSIS
Starting Analysis
To start the Analysis application, select ANALYSIS from the
Applications Selection menu. The only exception to this is
SS#7 Analysis. To start SS#7 Analysis, select SS7ANAL from
the Applications Selection menu.
Analysis Applications
The Analysis application has two page displays: Real Time
and History. The display format is the same for both pages;
however, the pages are used for different purposes.
The Real Time page displays traffic from both sides of the line
as it is acquired. There is a continuous display of traffic on
the screen as the data is acquired.
The History page displays traffic that has been acquired and
put in a history buffer. You can move back and forth through
the data in the buffer to display specific parts of it,
independent of line activity.
This chapter describes the general features of the two
Analysis pages. To interpret protocol-specific information,
refer to the appropriate protocol in the Chameleon Protocol
Interpretation Manual, Volume II.
Saving Data
There are three methods for saving Analysis data to disk:
" TEKELEC
•
You can save data as it is acquired using the" Direct-toDisk application, described in Chapter 6. This type of file
can be replayed and analyzed by the Monitoring
applications.
•
You can save the contents of the acquisition buffer using
the Traffic Load/Save option in the Utilities menu. This
type of file can be replayed and analyzed by the
Monitoring applications. Refer to page 9-13 for more
information.
•
You can output a specified range of events to a- printer or
an ASCII file using the History Print- feature (Ctrl P),
described on page 4-11. This type of file cannot be
replayed and analyzed by the Monitoring applications.
4-1
10122190
Analysis
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
However, this option saves the data in a format that can
be accessed using the Chameleon 32 C Development
System (optional package) or using a PC.
General Features of the Analysis Page
Figure 4.1 shows a sample Analysis (Real Time or History)
page with sample X.25 traffic. The general f~atures of the
Analysis pages are described on the following pages.
01
01 UA
03 I
00 00
9
X25: Call
Called oTE address
Calling oTE address
Facilities
SABM
lCN-02 lCGN-O
5432104
None
None
01 I
00 01
5
X25: Call Connected· lCN=02 lCGN=O
Called oTE address
None
Calling oTE address
None
None
Facilities
03 I
01 01
35
X25: Data 00 00
lCN-02 lCGN=O
CRlF30123456789;;(-)71ABCoEFGHIJKl
03 I
01 01
35
X25: Data 00 01
lCN-02 lCGN-O
CRLF30123456789;;(a)?tABCoEFGHIJKl
FIgure 4.1: Sample X.25 History Page
DeE/orE Display
Frames transmitted by the DCE are displayed on the left half
of the screen. Frames transmitted by the DTE are displayed
on the right half of the screen.
Notes
In the Real Time page, only the last 22 lines of each event are
displayed.
When simulating an ISDN line and monitoring the simulation
traffic, the Chameleon always displays data on the DTE (right)
side of the Real Time and History pages.
.TEKELEC
4-2
10/22190
Analysis
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Colors
Colors distinguish the protocol elements of the display. The colors
are protocol-specific and are described in the Chameleon Protocol
Interpretation Manual, Volume II. For example, in the X.2S page
shown in Figure 4.1, the following colors would be used:
Green =- HOLC
.Yellow =- X.2S
White =- User Data
Red =- Errors
Interface Lead Transitions
An interface lead transition is displayed as the lead name along with
an up arrow (i) [MARK at the physical level] or a down arrow (J..)
[SPACE at the physical level] to indicate the direction of the
transition.
Low-to-high transitions elicit a J..; high-to-low
transitions elicit an i. All transitions for a given event are show.n on
one line. The leads are:
DeE
DTE
CTS
OSR
OCO
SOCO
RI
RTS
OTR
There may be more than one transition.
transitions are displayed on the page.
Note:
Lead change indicators in Analysis and Triggerirtg differ in
meaning. In Analysis, the arrows indicate physical level, as
described above. In Triggering, 1 and J. indicate logical levels, and
are the opposite of the Analysis indicators for the same event.
However, when using an ISDN interface:
.
(1) lead changes are NOT displayed; and,
(2)
.Tekelec
F3 controls whether lead
abort frames are not detected, but are concatenated with the
following frame .
09/27/91
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Analysis
Baud Rate Changes
Baud rate· changes are shown as New Baud Rate
Analysis, baud rate is calculated at two times:
9600. In
•
When the Analysis application is started
•
After Run/Stop is pressed. If the line is idle when Analysis is
started, you must press Run/Stop when acquisition begins.
Otherwise, the baud rate will be zero. When the baud rate is
zero, line utilization is not calculated in the Statistics
application.
.
Incomplete Event Display
The Incomplete event Length x message indicates that the
received frame ended unexpectedly.
x indicates the length of the portion of the frame received. For
example, if an X.2S l-frame of only two bytes is received, the
message Incomplete event Length 2 appears.' .
An Incomplete event Length 0 indicates that only a portion of one
byte was received before the frame was aborted.
The Incomplete event Length message can be enabled/disabled
using Cfrl E, as described on page 4-6. When this message is
disabled, Unknown is displayed when an incomplete event is
detected.
Time Stamping
The Chameleon includes a real-time .clock that provides time
stamping in Analysis. The time stamp clock's resolution is 20
microseconds and represents the time at the end of the event. The
display of the time stamp is controll~d by the F2 key, as described
on page 4-5.
Tekelec
09/27/91
Analysis
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
History Trigger Feature
The Triggering application· enables you to filter captured data
according to user-defined criteria. One of the triggering
options is DISPLAY which causes the History display to
differentiate between data which meets the criteria and data
which does not.
Beginning with system software 4.2, you have two DISPLAY
modes to choose from:
•
In normal mode, data which meets the triggering criteria is
shown in low intensity color. All other data is shown in high
intensity color.
•
In trigger mode, only data which meets the triggering
criteria is displayed in the History page. All other data is
suppressed from the display.
The triggering DISPLAY mode is controlled from the History
page using two commands:
•
:normal
Selects normal triggering display mode. This is
the default mode.
.•
:trigger
Selects trigger mode.
Note that when using these command, you must include the
colon (:) as part of the command to invoke the command line.
Refer to Chapter 8 for a complete description of the Triggering
application.
TEKELEC
4-5
10/22190
Analysis
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Function Keys
The traffic is displayed in an interpreted format so that you can .
quickly distinguish the protocol-specific components.
The
function keys control how the traffic is interpreted and
displayed. For example, you can suppress the display of user
data, display frame level only, or show a/l traffic in an
uninterpreted (raw) format.
Function keys have multiple values which affect the display
format of interpreted data. Each time you press a function
key, you select the next value in the cycle. If you press Shift
function key, the previous value is selected. The current
selection is shown in the softkey strip on the screen.
Several of the function keys are available for all protocols.
These are described in this chapter. Other function keys are
used only with specific protocols. These are mentioned in this.
chapter. but are described fully in the Chameleon Protocol
Interpretation Manual, Volume II.
F1
F1 determines the format of the user data display, which is the
data which does not belong to a protocol specific format.
When you press F1, the user data (displayed in white)
changes to the code indicated in the softkey strip at the
bottom of the screen. In the History page, a/l displayed user
data is changed to the indicated code.
In the Real Time page, only the user data acquired after F1 is
pressed, is displayed in the new code. F10 controls whether
or not user data is displayed at all. The options are:
TEKELEC
ASCII
Each byte is displayed as an ASCII character. For
example, 41 hex is displayed as the ASCII
character A. Characters in the range 0 - 1F hex
are shown as single character mnemonics.
Characters above 80 hex are shown as ' . ' .
EBCDIC
Each byte is displayed as an EBCDIC character.
For example, F1 hex is displayed as the EBCDIC
character 1. Special characters are handled the
same way as ASCII.
HEX
Each byte is displayed as a pair of hex digits.
HEXS
Each byte is displayed' as a pair of hexadecimal
digits, with a space between each pair.
4-6
10/22190
Analysis
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F2
F2 determines the acquisition information display format, which
is displayed on the first line of interpretation on the opposite
side of the screen. Not all options are available for all
protocols, as noted below.
Number
Event number in decimal
Flags
Number of flags preceding the frame in decimal
(BOP only)
Time
Event timestamp as hh:mm:ss ddd ddd
Time shows the time at the end of the event in
hours, minutes, seconds and microseconds. ddd
ddd is equivalent to .dddddd in decimal.
For
.999999 seconds.
example: 999 999
=
dTime
(delta time) Elapsed time between the previous
event and the current event.
When monitoring two ports on a Dual Port
machine, the delta time refers to the time between
events regardless of which port the event occurred
on. That is, the delta time may be calculated as
the time between the previous event on Port A
and the current event on Port B.
If the Real Time clocks on Port A and Port Bare
not synchronized, negative delta time might be
reported. If this occurs, resynchronize the clocks
by pressing Run/Stop to stop and then restart
acquisition on both ports.
CRC
None
TEKELEC
CRC value in hex, OK if good CRC or BAD if bad
CRG (Not available in Async)
No acquisition information is displayed
4-7
10/22190
Analysis
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F3
F3 determines what types of events will be displayed. This
function is not available in Async or sse. The options are:
Information frames only
F4 - F9
FlO
IU
Information and Unnumbered frames only
IUS
Information, Unnumbered, and Supervisory frames
IUSL
All frames, plus lead transitions. However, when
using an ISDN interface, lead transitions are NOT
displayed.
Furthermore, abort frames are not
detected, but are concatenated with following
frames.
These keys are protocol specific. Refer to the Chameleon
Protocol Interpretation Manual Volume /I, for more information.
FlO determines if user data is displayed. It also displays the
. traffic in an uninterpreted mode (raw). The options are:
User +
UserRaw
.
TEKELEC
User data is displayed
User data is not displayed
All data is shown as user data, uninterpreted in the
code selected with Fl
4-8
10/22190
Analysis
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Function Key
Setup Files
You can create files which store function key setups for History and
Real Time pages. A function key file can be executed automatically
when a monitoring application is started, or can be invoked
on-ctemand at run-time. Function key files for History and Real
Time are independent of each other.
To create a function key setup file, do the following:
1.
Start the monitoring application and select .either the History
or Real Time page.
2.
Select the desired function key settings for that page.
3.
Use the :save command to save the setup to a file. Use the
following syntax:
:save 'filename"
where filename is enclosed in quotation marks ("") and
is one of the following:
hist Saves a setup which executes when the
application is started and automatically sets the
History function keys
rt
Saves a setup which executes when the
application is started and automatically sets the
Real Time function keys
Other filenames must be 1 - 8 alphanumeric characters.
4.
Tekelec
To load a function key file at run-time, use the :Ioad
command. The syntax for :Ioad is:
:/oad "filename"
09/27191
Analysis
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Control Keys
The keys and key combinations shown in Figure 4.2 perform a
number of useful functions for the Analysis pages. These functions
are described in more detail following the table.
KEY
A or a
FUNCTION
For Dual Port machines, displays the Port A function key strip in History
8 or b
For Dual Port machines, displays the Port S function key strip in History
Ctrl 8
Switches on/off a line which separates events in the display
Ctrl C
For Dual Port machines, toggles between the Port A and Port S function
key strips for the active page. (Also see Shift A and Shift S below.)
Ctrl E
Switches the display of the message Incomplete event on/off.
When off, incomplete events are indicated by the message Unknown
Ctrl N
Protocol-specific to ISDN Monitoring. Toggles the display between
the extended address in hex and LTI or TGI byte interpretation.
Ctrl P
Available for the History page only. Invokes the History print feature.
Ctrl Z
Protocol specific to 557. Invokes the User Parts Editor.
Figure 4.2: Analysis Control
K~ys
A or a
Pressing A (or a) is similar to Ctr! C described above. It displays
the Port A function key strip when a monitoring AS page is active.
S or b
Pressing S (or b) is similar to Ctr! C described above. It displays
the Port 8 function key strip when a monitoring AS page is active.
CirlS
When you press Ctr! 8, a white line appears between each event.
To suppress the white line. press Ctr! 8 again. This enables you
to quickly differentiate each event on the screen.
Tekelec
4-10
09/27/91
. Chameleon 32 User's .Guide
Analysis
Ctrl C
On Dual Port machines, you 'can run some Monitoring applications
on both ports simultaneously, using a single page to display the
traffic from both ports. This is indicated in the page banner by AB.
You can control the Analysis display for each port independently,
using the function keys. For example, the Port A data can be
displayed in hex, while the port 8 data is displayed in ASCII. Ctrl
C toggles between the Port A and Port 8 function key strip, so that
you can access the function keys for each port. See also A and 8
below.
Ctrl E
Usually, when an incomplete event is encountered, the message
Incomplete event is displayed. Ctrl E enables you to suppress the
display of this message. To resume the display of the message,
press Ctrl E again.
CtrlN
When monitoring ISDN data with extended addressing, the display
will show the extended address in hex. Using Ctrl N you have the
following options:
•
If you selected Northern Telecom as your ISDN protocol, Ctrl
N displays. the LTID interpretation in place of the Extended
Address. The LTID byte is interpreted and displayed in both
hex and decimal in the following format:
LTID:Hex = xx
•
Decimal=xxx
For all other ISDN protocols, Ctrl N displays the TGI (Terminal
Group Identifier) interpretation in place of the Extended
Address. The TGI byte is interpreted and displayed in both
hex and decimal in the following format:
TGI:Hex = xx
Decimal=xxx
CtrlP
In the History page only, Ctrl P invokes a print feature which
enables you to output a range of events to a printer or ASCII file.
If you have a printer connected to the Chameleon, and the
Chameleon is correctly configured, you can print selected events
from the history buffer. Alternately, you can output the events to a.
print file.
Takelec
4-11
09/27191
Analysis.
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Note
If you use Ctrl Pto save data to a file, the data in the file cannot be
replayed and analyzed by the Analysis application. In order to save
data to a file and analyze it from disk, you must use the
Direct-to-Oisk application described in Chapter 6.
You can use the ASCII file generated by Ctrl P for the following
purposes:
•
To access the file using the Chameleon C Development
System vi Editor (optional package)
•
To access the file on a PC after using the Chameleon Kermit
facility to transfer the file (see Chapter 10) or after copying the
ASCII file to an MS-DOS 2.x or 3.x formatted floppy disk
There are two methods to use the History Print feature.
METHOD 1 -- ENTER A SPECIFIED RANGE OF EVENTS:
1.
Select the History page.
'.'
2.
Press Ctrl Pto invoke the History Print feature. The following
prompts appear:
Print filertameri!ii!i!ftfi!!!ii~fiW!Wi;J
................................................. (blank
=printer)
from event
to event
Press GO to print, CANCEL to exit.
Figure 4.3: Prlnt-Range-of-Events Prompt Screen
3.
You may download events to either a printer or an ASCII file.
To download events to a printer:
Press Re.turn when prompted for a .file name.
To download events to an ASCII file:
Enter a file name and press Return. The file will be
saved to the hard disk in the following direCtory:
A:\TEKELEC\DATA\HIST unless a different path is
specified.
Teke/ec
4-12
09/27/91
Analysis
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
4.
To save the file to a floppy disk, you must use the path
(including the back slash [\ ] ) as follows:
b:lfilename
Specify a range of event numbers to print by entering the
number of the first event and pressing Return.
5.
Enter the number of the last event you want to print and press
Return.
6.
Press Go to start the printer/file output. A message is
displayed that indicates which events are being sent to the
printer or file.
7.
To abort this function at any time, press Cancel.
METHOD 2 - HIGHLIGHT A RANGE OF EVENTS:
1.
Select the History page.
2.
Use Scrolli or Scroll J, key to position the first event you want
to output at the top of. the page. Press the left bracket key ([ ).
This marks (highlights) the first event.
Use the Scroll i or Scroll J, key to display the last event you
want to output as the rast event on the screen. Press the right
bracket key ( ]). This marks (highlights) the last event to be
output.
3.
Press Ctrl P to invoke the History Print menu (see previous
page).
4.
You may download events to either a printer or an ASCII file.
To download events to a printer:
Press Return when prompted for a file name.
To download events to an ASCII file:
Enter a file name and press Return. The file will be
saved to the hard disk in the following directory:
A:\TEKELEC\OATA\HIST unless a different path is
specified. The selected event numbers appear in the
menu.
.
Tekelec
5.
Change event numbers by deleting the displayed number and
entering the new number.
6.
Press Go to start the printer/file output. A message is
displayed that indicates which events are being sent to the
printer or file.
7.
To abort this function at any time, press Cancel.
4-13
09/27/91
Analysis
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
CtrlZ
Ctrl Zhas a special function for Signaling System #7 Analysis only.
It invokes an editor that enables you to configure the Heading Code
Mnemonic and the Routing Label Structure for User Parts. Refer
to the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual, Volume 1/, for
more information.
Tekelec
4-14
09127191
Analysis
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Acquisition Buffer
The size of the acquisition buffers depends on whether you have a
Single Port or Dual Port Chameleon. Figures 4.4 and 4.5 list the
capacities for these buffers.
DTE
196-Kbyte
DCE
Other
196-Kbyte
48-Kbyte
lead changes,
aborts, CRC,
timestamp
Figure 4.4: Single Port Buffer Capacities.
DTE
DCE
Other
196-Kbyte
48-Kbyte
Port A
196-Kbyte
lead changes,
aborts, CRC,
timestamp
Port 8
196-Kbyte
196-Kbyte
48-Kbyte
lead changes,
aborts, CRC,
time stamp
Figure 4.5: Dual-Port Buffer Capacities.
Tekelec
4-15
09/27/91
Analysis
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Event Overwritten
Message
In the History or Real Time pages there are two conditions which
elicit the message:
Event Overwritten
These two conditions are: (1) when the Event buffer wraps around
and overwrites the Event pointer to the data currently being read;
or, (2) when the DC E or DTE data buffer wraps and overwrites the
data currently being. read. When the History or Real Time
application attempts to access either events or data which have
been overwritten, Event Overwritten is displayed on the appropriate
side (DCElDTE) of the page. Figure 4.6 illustrates these Event
Overwritten processes.
Event
Buffer (FIFO)
DTElDCE
Buffer
New Event in ---.~ 1--~_-1+ -
Old Event out +4--- ...._...I.tio..---'
DTElDCE
Buffer
New Data in
Old Data out 4
~
-\
.....
..,'
/
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Old Event pointer lost;
buffer continues to read 'old'
Event Data;
Event Overwritten is displayed.
1-----1
As Events enter the Event Buffer, their Time
Stamps are matched with those of data in the Data
Buffers. When these Time Stamps do not match,
Event Overwritten is displayed.
...
- ---- ------------------------Old data lost;
buffer continues to read 'old'
Data Event pointer;
Event Overwritten is displayed .
Event
Buffer (FIFO)
1
2
3
4
5
S
7
As Data enters the Data Buffers, thEiirTime Stamps
are matched with those of the Event pointers in the
Event Buffer. When these lime Stamps do not
match, Event Overwritten is displayed.
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 4.6: Event Overwritten processes.
Tekelec
4-16
09/27/91
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Analysis
History Pag'e Features
Unlike the Real Time page, the History page displays traffic from a
buffer and not from the line. This enables you to scroll back and
forth through the traffic stored in the buffer so that you can analyze
it independently of line activity.
History Lock
The Chameleon stores traffic in a FIFO (first-in, first-out) buffer.
When the buffer is full, the oldest (first-in) data in the buffer is
overwritten by newly-acquired data. This ensures that the buffer
always contains the most recent traffic. However, this also means
that traffic currently being displayed on the History page will be
overwritten in the buffer if the Chameleon is capturing traffic in that
buffer. To indicate that the History page is displaying overwritten
traffic, the word Locked appears in the softkey strip at the bottom
of the screen. When the History page is locked, the displayed data
can be scrolled up and down to the limit of the stored data (several
pages), but it is not possible to change the interpretation of the data
as the original traffic is no longer in the buffer.
To clear the locked condition and display the current acquisition
buffer contents, press Cancel.
To ensure that the data in the buffer will not get overwritten by new
data, press Run/Stop.
History Freeze Mode
When Freeze Mode is enabled, the most recent 32 K of data from
the acquisition buffer is copied into a History Freeze buffer. This
buffer is displayed on the History Page until Freeze Mode is
terminated.
To enable the Freeze Mode, press f. Acquisition continues while
you are in Freeze Mode. All new data is written into the Acquisition
buffer but will not be displayed on the History page until you
unfreeze the buffer.
To disable the Freeze Mode, press
u.
History Display Commands
Note
When you first display the History page it may be blank. To display
traffic frqm the History buffer, use one of the keys or commands
listed in Figure 4.7 on the following page. These keys determine
which events in the buffer appear in the History page.
If the selected event is not valid (it is overwritten in the buffer, for
example) the next valid event following the selected event is
Tekelec
4-17
09/27/91
Analysis
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
displayed. For example, if you press the left arrow key, the oldest
valid events in the History buffer are displayed.
KEY
FUNCTION
~
Displays the oldest events in the buffer.
+-
Displays the most recent events in the buffer.
i
Scrolls the data upward continuously. Each time you press the UP
arrow, the scrolling speed increases. If data is scrolling downward,
it decreases the speed of the downward scroll.
!
Scrolls the data downward continuously. Each time you press the
DOWN arrow, the scrolling speed increases. If data is scrolling upward, it decreases the speed of the upward scroll.
Space bar
Stops scrolling.
F or f (Freeze
Selects most recent 32 K of data for display. on the History page.
Refer to 4-12 for details
U or u
(Un-freeze)
Scroll
i
Shift Scroll
Scroll
Scrolls data up one line each time you press the key.
i
!
Shift Scroll
Terminates Freeze Mode. Refer to page 4-12 for details
Displays the next page of data.
Scrolls data down one line each time you press the key.
!
Displays the previous page of data.
0-9
Move you to a certain point in the buffer. Each number represents a
percentage of the buffer, from 0% (0) to 90% (9). For example, if you
press 5, the middle (50%) of the buffer is displayed.
:jump a
Jumps to event number a. For example, ~ump 150 displays event
150 as the first event on the page. :jump 9999 displays the end of
the buffer (most recent events).
Figure 4.7: History Display Command Keys
Tekelec
4-18
09/27/91
Analysis
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
KEY
FUNCTION
oE-
The left arrow displays the oldest events in the buffer.
-+
The right arrow displays the most recent events in the buffer.
i
The up arrow scrolls the data upward continuously. Each
time you press up arrow, the scrolling speed increases. If
data is scrolling downward, it decreases the speed of the
downward scroll.
~
The down arrow scrolls the data downward continuously.
Each time you press down arrow, the scrolling speed
increases. If data is scrolling upward, it decreases the
speed of the upward scroll.
Space bar
Stops scrolling.
For f
Freeze Mode - Selects most recent 32 K of data for display
on the History page. Refer to 4-12 for details
U oru
Un-freeze - terminates. Freeze Mode, refer to 4-12 for details
Scroll i
The Scroll t key moves data up one line each time you
press the key.
Shift Scroll i
Shift Scroll
Scroll
~
t
displays the next page of data.
The Scroll ~ key moves data down one line each time you
press the key.
Shift Scroll ~
Shift Scroll
0-9
The number keys move you to a certain point in the buffer.
Each number represents a percentage of the buffer, from
0% (0) to 90% (9). For example, if you press 5, the middle
(50%) of the buffer is displayed.
:jump a
Jumps to event number a. For example, :jump 150 displays
event 150 as the first event on the page.
:jump 99999 displays the end of the buffer (most recent
events).
~
displays the previous page of data.
Figure 4.5: History Display Keys
TEKELEC
4-19
10/22190
CHAPTER FIVE:
DUAL LINE
Introduction
The Dual Line application displays data in a 2-line format (DCE
over DTE) which represents the actual sequence of data as it
was acquired by the Chameleon. This type of display enables
you to determine the overlap of data being received
simultaneously from both sides of the line.
The Dual Line application is available for all Monitoring
protocols. To start the application, select DUALLINE from the
Monitoring window of the Applications Selection menu.
Note
DUALLINE cannot be run on both ports A and S in one page
display. That is, you cannot run the application on A + S, using
F3 Load AB.
You can, however, start. the application
independently on both ports, using F1 Load A and then F2
Load B.
Dual Line vs. Analysis
In Analysis (History and Real Time), an event is displayed
once the entire event has been acquired. This is necessary
so that the Chameleon can interpret the data according to the
protocol. However, it then becomes impossible to represent
the timing relationships for data which was received
simultaneously from both sides.
For example, Figure 5.1 shows sample data received by the
Chameleon. In this data, DTE frame 1 is the second frame
which is received by the Chameleon. However, the entire
frame is not received until DCE frames 1, 2, and 3 are
received in their entirety.
DeE
DTE
FRAME 1
II
FRAME 2
II
FRAME 3
II
. FRAME 1
FRAME 4
II
FRAME 2
Figure 5.1: Sample Data Acquisition
TEKELEC
5-1
8/02/90
Dual Line
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
The Real Time. History page displays DeE events on the left
and DTEevents on the right side of the screen. This results in
the data being displayed as shown in· Figure 5.2, which
suggests that DCE frames 1, 2, and 3 were received before
any data was received from the DTE.
DCE
DTE
DCE FRAME 1
DCE FRAME 2
DCE FRAME 3
DTE FRAME 1
I DCE FRAME 4 I
DTE FRAME 2
Figure 5.2: Sample Data Sequence in History Page
In the Dual line display, the sequence of events in shown in a
format which retains the actual acquisition sequence of the
data, as shown in Figure 5.3. In the Dual line display, data is
not interpreted, but is shown in a user-specified format (ASCII,
EBCDIC, or hex). More information about the Dual Line
display is provided on the following page.
DCE
DTE
ABCDEFGHIJ
ABCDEFGHIJ
ABCDEFGHIJ
1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXVZ
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
12345678
Figure 5.3: Sample Data Sequence in Dual Line Page
TEKELEC
8/02190
Dual Line
Chameleon 32 User's Guic;le
Dual Line Modes
There are two Dual Line modes:
•
run mode causes the page to be updated as data is
acquired from the line or from disk. It is much like a Real
Time page in that you can view data as it is acquired, but
you cannot scroll back and forth through the data.
•
freeze mode freezes the Dual Line page so that it is no
longer updated as data is acquired. In Freeze mode
there are additional function keys which enable you to
scroll through the data. There are also additional fields
of information at the top of the display.
The F10 key toggles between Run mode and· Freeze mode.
Run Mode
Figure 5.4 shows the Dual Line display in run mode.
DCE speed=56000
DTE speed"56000
HIJKL"X
1 J
F
30123456189:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL" H $
1 30123456789::<=
• N 30123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL$
•
30123456189::<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL~h
>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLbl
30123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLY
EFGHIJKL4d B
BCDEFGHIJKL"x
30123456789::(=)?@ABCDE
$
30123456789:;<=>?@A
30123456789::<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL]C
F $ 30123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLq+
d B 301
23456789::<=)?@ABCDEFGHIJKL h
d 30123456789::<=>?@ABCDEFGHI
h F 30123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL
{
30123456789
JKLPI
: :<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL d
Figure 5.4: Dual Une Display (Run Mode)
TEKELEC
5-3
8102/90
Dual Line
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Display
The features of the Run mode display are as follows:
•
The DeE and DTE baud rates are displayed at the top of
the screen. This is the speed indicated by the last
acquired baud rate event. If no baud rate events are
detected, the message assumed is displayed.
The :set baud command enables you to inform the
Chameleon of the speed when no baud rate events are
detected. See below for more information.
•
DCE data is displayed in brown above the DTE data
•
DTE data is displayed· in underlined cyan below the DeE
data
•
Each line displays up to 64 characters
•
Interface lead states are displayed when F3 State is
selected.
•
Data is displayed in the format set selected with F1.
•
. Baud Rate
. Blank spaces between frames indicate idle time. You
can compress the number of idle' data bytes displayed
between frames using F2 .
,The Dual Line application determines the baud rate of the data
upon detection of a baud rate change. It a baud rate change
is not detected, the Chameleon assumes the default data rate
of 56000 bits per second. The current baud rate is displayed
in the DeE speed and DTE speed fields at the top of the run
time page. The Chameleon must know the correct baud rate
in order to determine the time and byte offset when marking
an event. See page 5-9 for a description of marking events.
To change the baud rate use the :set baud command by
selecting the DUALLINE page and entering:
:set baud n
where n is in the range 0 - 64000 and specifies the data rate
in bits per second. The default value is 56000 bits per
second.
If a baud rate change is detected, the baud rate is changed
accordingly.
TEKELEC
5-4
8102190
Dual Line
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Function Keys
The Run mode function keys are described below.
F1
F1 determines in what format the data is displayed.
options are:
The
ASCII
All data is displayed in ASCII.
EBCDIC
All data is displayed in EBCDIC.
HEX
All data is displayed in hex pairs.
HEXS
All data is displayed in hex pairs, with pairs
alternating in high and low intensity color so that
each pair can be more easily identified.
Specifically, the hex pairs on each DCE
alternate between high intensity brown and
intensity brown. The hex pairs on each DTE
alternate between high intensity cyan and
intensity cyan.
line
low
line
low
Note
The Frame Check Sequence (FCS) is treated as data and is
shown in the code selected with F1.
F2
F2 determines how idle data bytes are displayed. Idle data is
shown as blank spaces between frames. F2 enables you to
compress the display of idle data bytes so that more data
events can be displayed in a single screen. The options are:
TEKELEC
1
Only one byte of idle data (blank space) is shown
between each frame, regardless of the number of
idle data bytes which occurred.
10
Up to 10 bytes of idle data (blank spaces) are
displayed between each frame. If more than 10
occur, only the first five bytes and the last five bytes
of idle data are represented in the display.
100
Up to 100 bytes of idle data are displayed between
each frame. If more than 100 bytes occur, only the
first 50 bytes and the last 50 bytes of idle data are
represented.
1000
Up to 1000 bytes of idle data are displayed
between each frame.
If more than 1000 bytes
occur, only the first 500 bytes and the last 500
bytes of idle data are represented.
5-5
8/02190
,Dual Line
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F3 determines what data is displayed. The options are:
F3
data
The DCE DTE acquired data is displayed in the
format selected with the F1 key. Interface lead
states are not displayed.
state
Interface lead states and data are displayed. When
selected, one line of DCE data is displayed with the
five DeE interface leads shown below the data.
Below the DCE leads is one line of DTE data with
the two DTE interface leads. Changes in voltage
are shown as raised or lowered portions of the line.
This is shown in the DTE leads in Figure 5.5.
DeE Data
and Leads
DTE Data
and Leads
DeE speed .. S6000
OTE speed a S6000
HIJKL"X
EFGHIJKL4d B
30123456789:;<=)?@ABCOEFGHIJKL"
F
30123456789::<")?@ABCOEFGHIJKL]{
Figure 5.5: Dual Line Display (F3
FlO
TEKELEC
H S
RI
SQ
DCO
OSR
CTS
, OTR
RTS
=State)
FlO toggles between Run mode and Freeze mode.
run
Dual Line is currently in Run mode. The F-key label
displays 'freeze'.
freeze
Dual Line is currently in 'freeze' mode. The F-key
label displays 'run'. See the description of the
'freeze' mode on the following page.
5-6
8102190
Dual Line
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Freeze Mode
When you select FlO freeze, the Dual Line page stops being
updated so that you' can scroll through the data and examine it
more closely. A sample 'freeze' mode display is shown in
Figure 5.6.
a.
Binary value of
b.
d.
Event time stamp
selected byte
DCE speed"9599
DTE speed"9599
binary" 01000010 nex=42 ascii='B'
binary" 00111110 nex a 3E ascii='>'
times 03:48:40 528 900
HIJKL"X
1 J
F
30123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL" H S
30123456789::<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL%h
1 30123456789::<=
• N 30123456789:;<=>?§ABCOEFGHIJKLS
•
>?@ABCOEFGHIJKLbl
30123456789:;<->?@ABCDEFGHIJKLY
30123456789~:<·>?@ABCOE
EFGHIJKL4d B
BCDEFGHIJKt"x
S
30123456789:;<=>?@A
30t23456789::<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL]{
F S 30123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLq+
d B 301
23456789::<·>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL h
d 30123456789::<=>?@ABCDEFGHI
h F 30123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL
{
JKLPI
30123456789
::<=)?@ABCDEFGHIJKL d
Figure 5.6: Dual Line Display (Freeze Mode)
Display
TEKELEC
The 'freeze' mode display is the same as the run mode
display, with the addition of these fields:
a.
Binary value of the DCE and DTE byte at the location of
the cursor
b.
Hex value of the DCE and DTE byte at the location of the
cursor
c.
ASCII or EBCDIC value of selected byte (depending on
current F1 selection)
5-7
8/02/90
Dual Line
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
d.
Time stamp indicating the time that the end of the event
was acquired. The time stamp is in the format:
hh:mm:ss ddd ddd
ddd ddd is the number of microseconds in decimal. For
example, 999 999 is .999999 seconds.
Cursor Keys
In freeze mode, a cursor appears in the data.
the following keys to move through the data:
You can use
DESCRIPTION
KEY
Moves the cursor one byte to the right.
-+
~
-
Moves the cursor one line down.
Moves the cursor one byte to the left.
t
Moves the cursor one byte to the right.
F7 prev
Scrolls the data downward one page to the previous page.
Fa next
Scrolls the data upward to the next page.
Figure 5.7: Freeze Mode Cursor Keys
Function Keys
The freeze mode function keys are the same as Run mode,
with the addition of these function keys:
F7 prey
F7 displays the previous page of data.
Fa next
FB displays the next page of data.
F9 mark
F9 marks the byte at the cursor as the base line byte. When a
byte is marked, the following changes occur to the Dual Line
page (Figure 5.8):
TEKELEC
•
The marked byte is shown in red
•
The following fields appear below the time stamp field:
dtime
Displays the elapsed time between the
marked byte and the currently selected byte
bytes
Displays the offset of the currently selected
byte to the marked byte
5-8
8102/90
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Note
Dual Line
The Chameleon must know the correct baud rate in order to
determine the dtime and bytes values when marking an
event. See page 5-5 for a description of how to set the baud
rate.
Delta time between marked byte and
byte at current cursor position.
Offset between marked byte and byte at
current cursor position.
DCE speed=9599
OTE speed=9599
HIJKL"X
1 J
time= 03:48:40 528 900
dtime= 00:00:00 598 400
718
F
30123456789:;(=>?@ABCOEFGHIJKL· H $
1 30123456789::<=
301Z3456789:;(=>?@ABCOEFGHIJKL$
,
30123456789::(=>?@ABCOEFGHIJKL~h
'N
>?@ABCOEFGHIJKLbl
30123456789:;(=>?IABCOEFGHIJKLY
30t23456789~:(=>?@ABCOE
EFGHIJKL4d B
BCOEFGHIJKL"x
$
30123456789:;(=>?@A
30123456789::(=>?IABCOEFGHIJKL]{
F S 30123456789:;(=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLq+
d B 301
23456789::(=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL h
d 30123456789::(=>?@ABCOEFGHI
h F 301Z3456789:;(=>?@ABCOEFGHIJKL
{
JKLPI
30123456789
::(=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL
~
Figure 5.8; Dual Line Display (Marked Byte)
Marking Bytes
To mark a byte, do the following:
1.
Move the cursor to the desired byte.
2.
Press F9 Mark. This marks the byte in red. The time ,
dtime and bytes fields apear in the upper right corner of
the screen; dtime and bytes fields are set to zero for
every byte mark performed.
When a byte is marked, the bytes field shows the actual
number of idle data bytes between frames, regardless of
the F2 selection. For example, if you select F2 = 10, a
maximum of 10 idle data bytes are shown in the display.
(Each byte of idle data is shown as a blank space
between frames.) However, when a byte is marked, as
you move the cursor through the idle- data (blank spaces)
between frames, you will notice that the bytes field
represents the actual number of bytes of idle data that
TEKELEC
5-9
8102/90
Dual Line
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
occurred, and not the number of idle data bytes
displayed.
3.
Note
Clearing Marks
Move the cursor to a new location. As you move the
cursor, the dtime and bytes fields show the elapsed
time and offset relative to the marked byte.
If you press F1 to change the code (hex. ASCII, etc.) in
which data is displayed, the marked event is cancelled
and the dtime and bytes fields no longer appear. To remark the event, use F9 Mark to mark a new byte.
To clear a marked byte:
Press F9 Mark to mark a new byte; or,
Press the F2 key.
TEKELEC
5-10
8102/90
CHAPTER SIX:
DIRECT'!'TO-DISK
Introduction
The Direct-to-Disk application stores traffic acquired from the
line to the hard disk. Once stored to disk, traffic can be
played back and analyzed off-line. A maximum of 30 Mbytes
of data can be stored to disk.
You can also run the other Monitoring applications while you
are running Direct-to-Disk. This enables you to look at the
traffic and save it at the same time.
For example, you could take the Chameleon 32 to several
remote locations in your network and save traffic from each
location to disk. The traffic from all locations could then be
analyzed at a central location to provide network managers
with a comprehensive view of the network in operation.
This chapter describes the four activities related to the Directto-Disk application. These are:
• .
•
•
•
TEKELEC
Recording traffic with Direct-to-Disk
Replaying Direct-to-Disk traffic
Saving Direct-to-Disk traffic to a file
Loading a Direct-to-Disk file
6-1
9/20/90
Direct-To-Disk
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
General Notes
Direct-to-Disk is one of the Monitoring applications that can be
loaded and run using the Applications Selection page. If you
do not know how to run a Monitoring application, refer to
Chapter 3, Using the Chameleon 32.
Unlike other Monitoring applications, Direct-to-Disk does not
display a page when it is running. When running it saves the
traffic being acquired to an area of the hard disk dedicated to
Direct-to-Disk traffic. This is referred to as the Direct-to-Disk
area of the hard disk or Direct-to-Disk buffer.
You record traffic to the the hard disk as long as the
Chameleon 32 is running the Direct-to-Disk application and
acquisition is occurring. The Direct-to-Disk area is cyclical, so
that when the buffer is filled, the oldest traffic is overwritten by
the most recent traffic. In other words, you can run Direct-toDisk forever, but only the most recent 30 Mbytes of traffic will
be saved on the hard disk.
Since the Direct-to-Disk application saves the traffic to the
hard disk, traffic remains on the hard disk if you reset or power
off the machine. However, Direct-to-Disk data is erased if one
of the following occurs:
•
If more than 30 Mbytes of traffic is recorded while Directto-Disk is running, the oldest data is overwritten by the
most recent data
'
•
If the Direct-to-Disk application is restarted, it records
traffic at the beginning of the Direct-to-Disk area, erasing
data that may already be there
•
If you load a traffic file from disk (previously saved Directto-Disk data) it is written to the Direct-to-Disk area of the
hard disk
A dedicated area of the hard disk is used to maximize the
performance of the Chameleon 32 when monitoring high
speed lines. It enables the traffic to be saved as a contiguous
block of data, which minimizes the time needed to access the
disk when replaying traffic for analysis.
You can use Triggering to define conditions which reduce the
amount of traffic written to disk. For example. you could
specify that only Information Frames are recorded. Refer to
Chapter 8: Triggering, for more information.
TEKELEC
6-2
9/20/90
Direct-To-Disk
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Recording Traffic with Direct-to-Disk
To run the Direct-to-Disk application, perform these steps:
1.
Configure the desired port for Monitoring from the line or
for Simulation.
2.
Press Go to display the Application Selection page.
3.
Move the red arrow cursor to the DIRTDSK application
and press the function key that loads the application for
the appropriate port.
4.
If desired, load additional applications by moving the red
arrow cursor to the application name and pressing the
function key that loads the application for the appropriate
port.
5.
Press Go.
This starts the tasks that are loaded,
. including Direct-to-Disk. There is no page for the Directto-Disk application, so a page banner will not be
displayed for it. The HARD DISK ACTIVE light indicates
when traffic is being written to the hard disk.
.
6.
If you selected the Triggering application, you can write a
trigger that reduces the amount of traffic saved on the
hard disk, by specifying one or more conditions that the
data must meet before it is processed by the Direct-toDisk application. Refer to Chapter 8 for information
about creating Triggering files.
7.
To complete the Direct-to-Disk task, stop the Direct-toDisk application or press F10 Exit in the Application
Selection page to stop al/ applications (do not re-boot).
To stop only Direct-to-Disk, do the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
For high speed SS#7 traffic, press Run/Stop to stop
acquisition.
Make the Configuration page active.
Move the red arrow cursor to DIATDSK.
Press the function key that stops the application for
the desired port (for example, F1 Stop A).
The Direct-to-Disk application stops immediately.
If you restart the Direct-to-Disk application, it will
overwrite the data in the Direct-to-Disk area of the
hard disk, beginning with the oldest data.
The next section describes how to replay Direct-to-Disk
data without saving it to a file.
TEKELEC
6-3
7/5/89
Direct-To-Disk
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Replaying Direct-ta-Disk Traffic
Replaying and analyzing Direct-to-Disk data is referred to as
monitoring Direct-from-Disk.
When monitoring Direct-from-Disk data, the traffic is analyzed
as it you were monitoring from the line, because the data was
initially recorded at line speed. For example, the baud rate is
shown at the correct line speed, although the traffic is
replayed at disk speed.
When replaying traffic, the traffic in the Direct-to-Disk area of
the hard disk is not erased or modified by the Direct-trom-Disk
application. Therefore, you can replay the same traffic as
many times as you like.
If you restart Direct-to-Disk, the current data in the Direct-toDisk area of the hard disk will be erased.
Note
To analyze data Direct-tram-Disk, perform these steps:
1
1.
Configure the Chameleon 32 for Monitoring selecting the
protocol and port for the recorded data.
2.
Move the· red arrow· cursor to the Monitoring Data Source
parameter.
3.
Press F2 Disk to select monitoring from disk.
4.
Move the red arrow cursor to Capture Mode.
This
parameter is valid for replaying Direct-from-Disk data.
Select the desired Capture Mode: Cycle or 1 Buffer.
5.
Press Go to display the Applications Selection page.
6.
Load the Monitoring applications that you want to use to
analyze the tratfic on disk: To load a Monitoring
application, move the red arrow cursor to the application
and press the function key that loads the application for
the appropriate port.
,I".
The Direct-to-Disk (DIRTDSK) application is not available
while you are running Direct-trom-Disk, since it would
cause the Chameleon 32 to record traffic over the traffic
you are trying to analyze.
Note
TEKELEC
7.
Press Go to start the monitoring applications.
8.
You can now use the application pages as though you
were monitoring from the line. The Run/Stop key starts
and stops acquisition from the disk.
6--4
7/5/89
Direct-To-Disk
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
9.
TEKELEC
When the entire contents of the Direct-to-Disk area has
been replayed, acquisition stops. To stop the Directfrom-Disk application, make the Configuration page
active and press F10 Exit. This stops all applications
that are currently running and displays the main
configuration menu.
6-5
7/5/89
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Direct-To-Disk
Saving Direct-to-Disk Data to a File
You can replay traffic directly from the Direct-to-Disk area of
the hard disk. However, if you want to record new traffic, you
lose the data that is currently stored in that area of the hard
disk. Before you record new traffic, you must save the current
traffic to a file on either the hard disk or a floppy disk. Later
this file can be loaded into the Direct-to-Disk area of the hard
disk and analyzed.
To save Direct-to-Disk data to a file, perform these steps:
1.
Stop the Direct-to-Disk or the Direct-tram-Disk
application, if it is currently running. You cannot save
Direct-to-Disk data if either of these tasks is running.
2.
Make the Utilities page active. If the Utilities banner is
not on the screen, press Shift Utilities to display it, and
then make it active. (For more information about the
Utilities menu, refer to Chapter 9.)
3.
Press F4 Traffic Load/Save.
Operations menu ..
4.
Press F1 Save to select the operation.
S.
Enter a file name and press Return.
The file is
automatically saved to the hard disk unless you specify
b: as part of the file name, as shown in this example:
This displays the Traffic
b:filename
Note
If you save Direct-to-Disk data to a floppy disk, the
maximum traffic file size is 700 Kbytes. If you want to
save more than 700 Kbytes to floppy disks. you can back
up the Direct-to-Disk area of the hard disk using the
Utilities F8 Backup/Restore option.
6.
Press F1 Direct-to-Disk to select the Data Source.
7.
If you want to save less than 100% of the Direct-to-Disk
data, press Delete to erase the current percentage,
enter the new percentage, and press Return.
This percentage represents the most recently recorded
traffic. For example, it you enter SO%, the most recent
SO% of the traffic is saved.
8..
TEKELEC
Press Go and the traffic is saved. The size of the file in
Kbytes is displayed when the procedure is completed.
6-6
7/5/89
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Direct-To-Disk
Loading a Direct-to-Disk File
To analyze DirecHo-Disk traffic that has been saved in a file,
you must load the file into the Direct-to-Disk area of the hard
disk, before you start your monitoring applications.
Note
This procedure erases the traffic that is currently stored in the
Direct-to-Disk area. Before you begin this procedure, save or
back up any Direct-to-Disk data that you want to keep-.
To load a Direct-to-Disk file, perform the following steps:
1.
Make the Utilities page active. If the Utilities banner is
not on the screen, press Shift Utilities to display it, and
then make it active.
2.
Press F4 Traffic Load/Save.
Operations menu.
3.
Press F2 Load to select the operation.
4.
Enter a name for the traffic file. If you provided a file
name extension when you saved the file, you must
include the file extension as part of the file name.
This displays the Traffic
The file is automatically loaded from the hard disk
directory a:\tekelec\data\d2d unless you specify b: as
part of the file name, as shown in this example:
b:1l1ename.ext
If you used the Utilities F8 Backup/Restore option to
back up the Direct-to-Disk area to multiple floppy disks,
you must use the F8 Backup/Restore to restore the data
to the hard disk.
Note
TEKELEC
5.
Press Go and the traffic is retrieved from the disk and is
loaded into the Direct-to-Disk area of the hard disk.
6.
The data can now be analyzed by replaying the Direct-toDisk data as described on page 6-4.
6-7
7/5/89
CHAPTER SEVEN:
STATISTICS
Introduction
The Statistics application gathers and displays summary
information about the traffic being monitored, including line usage.
The Statistics application can be run with traffic from the line, or
using the Direct-From-Disk option. If you do not know how to load
and run a Statistics application, refer to Chapter 3: Using the
Chameleon.
Most Statistics applications provide multiple pages for displaying
information for all protocol layers and addresses, or for a selected
layer or address. Figure 7.1 lists the available statistics applications
by protocol, the display pages provided for each, and the pertinent
chapter in the Protocol Interpretation Manual.
PROTOCOL
APPLICATION
STATISTICS PAGES
Refer to Chameleon Protocol
Interpretation Manual:
esc
SSCSTAT
ISDN (0.921)
0921 STAT
0.921
0.921
Q.921
0.921
0.921
0.921
PRI
PRISTAT
PAl Error Statistics
ChapterS
SNA
SNASTAT
SNA Session Statistics
SoLC Une Statistics
Session PU Statistics
SNA LU Statistics
SoLC PU Statistics
SNA LU Line
Chapter 6
SS#7
SS7STAT
SS#7 Une Statistics
Chapter 13
X.25
X25STAT
X.25 Une Statistics
HOLC Une Statistics
X.25 LCN Statistics
Chapter 2
2S10
2610STAT
261
SSC Une Statistics
esc CU Statistics
Une Statistics
SAPI 0 Statistics
SAPI 0 Statistics
SAPI16 Statistics
SAPI 63 Statistics
Other SAPI Statistics
a Une Error Statistics
Chapter 6
Chapter 10
Chapter 20
Figure 7.1: Available Statistics Pages
Tekelec
7-1
09/27191
Statistics
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Statistics Display
The statistical information is displayed in numeric, and for some
information, graph form. This section describes the general format
and usage of a Statistics page and the associated Performance
page. The exact format and function keys for each Statistics page
are protocol specific, and are described in the Chameleon Protocol
Interpretation Manual.
The X.25 Line statistics page (Figure 7.2) will be used as the
example in this section.
In Monitoring, the Chameleon determines the baud rate at two
times:
•
when the Monitoring applications are started
•
when the Run/Stop key is pressed
If the line is idle when Monitoring applications are started, and then
traffic occurs, the baud rate will be calculated as zero. When this
occurs, the Line Utilization will be shown as zero in a Statistics
page. To prevent this, pres~ the Run/Stop key after traffic starts.
If the baud rate is less than 50 bps, all utilizatio·n fields will be blank
(in both the screen and the printed report).
Statistics Function Keys
Statistics page function keys are protocol specific. There are
several functions which are common to all Statistics pages;
however, they may not be assigned to the same function key for
each application. For example, the PRINT function key for X.25 is
F3, while the PRINT function key for ISDN is F5.
This section describes the common function keys. It also describes
the general procedure for activ.ating and deactivating the various
Statistics pages for a protocol. Since the function key numbers vary
by protocol, the options are described by function, and not by
function key number.
For a complete description of the function keys for a specific
protocol, refer to the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual.
Tekelec
7-2
09127/91
v"a."",.",uII ...... V;;)"";;)
o li::tll::> III.;::>
\";lUlU,,,
Most recent packet received
from highlighted address.
Current call status is highlighted.
l---+-----------Ir--------i.;~;25·~.rie.$t,~t~/
.X.25 LIN STATISTICS
START T E: 00:00:00:000 000 AM
LCN:
f::tlij2J 008
STATE:
CALL CALL CONFIRM
CALLS PLACED: 0
DqE PACKETS: 0
DATA PKT: 0
OVERHEAD: 0
PACKET RETRIES:
RESET:
RESTART:
PRNR:
PREJ:
PRR:
DIAG:
LAST TIME: 00:00:00:000000 AM
Uiiri?flt_eltJ
t!!ff"::;:::i:id?::;:(::::}:::;::()
QQE.;
DIE;.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
CLEAR CLEAR CONFIRM
CALLS ACTIVE: 00
DTE PACKETS: 0
DATA PKT: 0
OVERHEAD: 0
1ft:;:?::!;:::::;::;;;;;) 4-_ _ _ _--I-~r:ia~:~tr:~~~:ntation
AYSJ
ACCESS:
0.000
CLEAR:
0.000
SESSION:
0.000
PACKET RESP:
0.000
DCE LEN:
00000
DTE LEN:
00000
DATA BYTES/SEC: 0
LMI
~
MIN
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
00000
00000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
00000
00000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
00000
00000
DTE UTILIZATION: 0% _ _ _ _ __
gi~ g~1~~6~
Displays addresses
so that you can
activate statistics
pages for them.
X.2S: LCNs
SNA: PUs/LUs
BSC: CUs
ISDN: SAP Is Displays protocol
layer so that you can
activate statistics
pages for it. .
Prints a statistical report if the Chameleon
is configured for, and
connected to a printer.
0%
Resets all values and
timers to zero for all
statistics pages for
that protocol.
Mt::::):;:::::Ak:::t:rJ
Displays time or
date and time
Determines whether the number
of PACKETS or number of
BYTES is displayed for DCEI
DTE Packets. Data Packets, and
Overhead.
X.2S: HDLC
SNA: Session
Figure 7.2: Sample Statistics Page (X.2S LIne Statistics)
Teke/ee
7-3
09/27/91
Statistics
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Address Function Keys (LCNs, PUs, CUs, SAP/s)
You can activate a page which displays statistical information for a
selected address on the line. The active addresses are displayed
in the softkey strip at the bottom of the screen. Depending on the
protocol you are using, you will have a choice of selecting one of the
following:
•
•
•
•
A page for each'Logical Channel Number (LCN)
X.25
A page for each Physical Unit (PU) or Logical Unit
SNA
(LU)
SSC
A page for each Control Unit (CU)
ISDN A page for each of these Service Access Point
Identifiers (SAPls): 0, 16, 63, All Others
When the addresses are displayed in the softkey strip, if the
address has a + next to it. a page has been activated. If the address
has a - next to it, a page for the address is not currently activated.
Note
If you press F1 FUNCTwhen the addresses are displayed in the
softkey strip at the bottom of the screen, the Statistics softkey
strip with the functions is displayed. This is true except for ISDN
Statistics, which has a single softkey function strip with the
SAPls included.
To activate a Statistics page for a specific address, perform these
steps:
1.
Press Select to make a Statistics page active for the desired
protocol.
2.
Press F1 to display the addresses in the softkey strip. If you
do not have traffic in the buffer, there will not be any addresses
displayed.
3.
Press the function key that corresponds to. the address you
want to activate a Statistics page for, A banner for the address
page appears at the bottom of the screen. It also causes a + to
appear next to the address in the softkey strip.
4.
Press Select to make the Statistic page active.
To deactivate a Statistics page for an address, perform these steps:
Tekelec
1.
Press Selectto make one of the Statistic pages active for the
desired protocol.
2.
Press F1
3.
Press the function key that corresponds to the address you
want to deactivate the Statistics page for. The banner for the
address page disappears from the screen. It also causes "a to appear next to the address in the softkey strip.
to display the addresses in the softkey strip.
7-4
09/27/91
Statistics
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Protocol Layer Function Key (HOLe, SESS)
For X.2S and SNA Statistics, F2 activates or deactivates a page for
a specific protocol layer, as follows:
•
X.2S
•
SNA
A page for HOLC (layer 2) Statistics only
A page for Session (layer 3) Statistics only
In SNA, you can also select a specific PU or LU for a protocol layer.
For example, you can have one page for SOLC statistics for a
selected PU, and you can have another page for SNA statistics for
the same PU.
To activate a Statistics page for a protocol layer:
1.
Press Se/eet to make a Statistics page for the desired
protocol active. The layer name should appear for F2 in the
softkey strip (HDLe for X.25 or SESS for SNA). If the layer
name is not displayed, press F1.
2.
Press F2. A banner for the protocol layer page appears at the
bottom of the screen. It also causes a + to appear next to the
address in the softkey strip.
3.
Press Se/eetto make the Statistics page active.
To deactivate a statistics page:
1.
Press Select to make one of the Statistics pages for the
desired protocol active. The layer name should appear for F2
in the softkey strip (HOLC for X.2S or SESS for SNA). If the
layer name is not displayed, press F1.
2.
Press F2. The banner for the protocol layer page disappears
from the screen. It also causes a - to appear next to the layer
name in the softkey strip.
Print Function Key
The Print function key prints a statistical report that is similar to the
screen display format. If you have a printer connected to the
Chameleon 32, you can print a report. A sample X.25 Une statistics
report is shown in Figure 7.3.
If you do not have a printer, pressing F3 has no effect. The report
is not shown on the Chameleon screen. Refer to Chapter 9,
Utilities, for information about configuring the Chameleon to use
your printer.
Teke/ec
7-5
09/27191
Statistics
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Reset Function Key
The Reset function key resets the statistics values to zero and
resets the time displayed at the top of the statistics page. When you
press the Reset key, it resets the values to zero in all Statistics
pages currently active for that protocol. This function is available
for all Statistics pages.
Time/Date Function Key
The Time/Date key affects the format of the time fields displayed
at the top of each Statistics page.
If Time is selected, the times are displayed in the format:
hh:mm:ss:ddd ddd AM/PM
For example, 08:46:25:934 160 AM.
If Date is selected, the time display is in the following format:
. .:.
'
dd MMM yyyy hh:mm:ss
For example, 01 JAN 1989 08:06:45.
."
If you are analyzing data from disk the date will be the current
system date, but the time at which the event was originally captured
'
~d~k
Bytes Function Key
Each statistics page has a function key which displays optional
information about the number of bytes received. For example in
X.25, if the Byte option is selected, the display includes the total
number of bytes, the number of data bytes, and the number of bytes
received in control frames.
For most pages, the byte fields appear in lieu of other fields on the
page. For example, in X.25 the F6 key offers the option of Bytes or
Packets. If Bytes is selected, several fields with packet data are
replaced by the byte fields.
Tekelec
7-6
09/27191
Statistics
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
TEKELEC X25 LINE STATISTICS REPORT
START TIME:
LAST TIME:
LCNsACTIVE :
CALLS ACTIVE:
CALLS PLACED:
PACKET COUNT :
DATA PACKETS
OVERHEAD PACKETS:
FRAME ABORTS:
CRC ERRORS:
FRAME RETRIES:
PACKET RETRIES:
FRAME RRs:
FRAME RNRs:
FRAMEREJs:
FRAMEDMs
FRAMESABMs
FRAME DISCs
FRAMEUAs
FRAMEFRMRs
FRAME SABMEs
PACKETRRs:
PACKET RNRs :
PACKET REJs :
PACKET CLEARs:
PACKEt INTERRUPTs:
PACKET RESETs:
PACKET RESET CONFs
PACKET RESTARTs:
PACKET RESTART CONFs
PACKET DIAGs :
ACCESS TIME:
CLEARTIME:
SESSION TIME:
OCE PACKET LENGTH :
DTE PACKET LENGTH:
OCE PACKET RESPONSE:
DTE PACKET RESPONSE:
00:00:00:000000
00:00:00:000 000
000 000 000
0
oooooooo
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
AVG
0.000
0.000
0.000
00000
00000
0.000
0.000
OCE TOTAL BYTES:
OCE DATA BYTES:
DTE TOTAL BYTES:
DTE DATA BYTES:
OCE UNE UTILIZATION:
OCE DATA UTILIZATION:
DTE LINE UTILIZATION:
DTE DATA UTILIZATION:
DTE
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
OCE
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
. 00000000
LAST
0.000
0.000
0.000
00000
00000
0.000
0.000
MAX
0.000
0.000
0.000
00000
00000
0.000
0.000
MIN
0.000
0.000
0.000
00000
00000
0.000
0.000
0
0
0
0
00%
00%
00%
000/.
Figure 7.3: Sample Statistics Report (X.2S Line)
Utilization
Statistics
TekeJec
Frames with errors (such as ABORTs or bad CRCs) are not included
in the utilization statistics. Utilization fields will be blank if the baud
rate is less than 50 bps.
7-7
09/27191
Statistics
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
The Performance Page
The Performance page, a protocol-specific read-only display, is
used when Statistics Performance falls below 100%. This occurs
when the data stream rates cycling through the data and event
buffers of the Chameleon are so high that the Chameleon cannot
keep up with one or the other. At such times, the Chameleon is
forced to skip events or data in order to keep incoming events in
sychronization with incoming data. The Performance Page is
available for SS7, SNA, X.25 and 0.921 protocols. It is not available
for BSCSTAT (Bisynch), or U-Interface 2B10.
Function Keys
The Performance Page for any active Statistics page is opened or
closed by pressing Ctri + P.
To open or close the Performance Page:
1.
Select the Statistics Page banner and, if necessary, scroll it
onto the screen. (Do NOT use the blow-page mode.)
2.
Press Ctri+P. The Performance page banner appears at, or
disappears from the bottom of the screen.
There are no function keys for this page .
. Interpretation
The interpretation of the Performance Page is given in Figure 7.4.
The number of frames (FMs) or in the case of SS7 - signal units
(SUs) not skipped by the
Statistics apPlication,'\.
The number of complete cyclethroughs registered by the
Data buffers,
~
--Aa~-------~,\~-------fl X25 PER~ANCE I
o
total # of data wrapped = -<::::;0
total # of FMs processed =
Statistics Performance =
100 (# of event wrapped) =
o
%
# of data-wrapped Ski~
The level at which the SIatistics application functioned
shown as a percentage of
maximum performance.
0
t
The number
evenls
s~pped because of
data cyded through.
I
. The number of complete
cycle-throughs registered
by the Event buffer. See
NOTE.
Figure 7.4: The X.25 Performance Page
TekeJec
7-8
09/27/91
Statistics
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Note:
Whenever one wrapped event is counted, the whole Event buffer is
cycled through. Therefore.. 6143 (the size of the Event buffer)
events are skipped.
Calculation of
Statistics Performance
Statistics Performance is calculated using the following formula,
where:
N1
N2
N3
N4
NS
Tekelec
=
=
=
=
=
total # of FMs (SUs) processed
total # of data wrapped
Statistics Performance
(# of event wrapped)
# of data-wrapped skipped event
N3
-
7-9
(N1x100) / [N1 + (N4 x 6143) + NS]
09/27191
•
CHAPTER EIGHT:
TRIGGERING
Introduction
Chameleon Triggering is a powerful software tool which allows you
to define a set of conditions under which data acquisition is started
and stopped. This allows you to program the Chameleon to take
specific action only for certain user-specified frames.
Condition/
Action
Each trigger consists of a CONDITION ~ ACTION pair. You must
specify what CONDITION, or combination of CONDITIONS, you
want the trigger to search received events for, and the ACTION, or
ACTIONS, you want the trigger to take. For ACTIONS to take
effect, all CONDITIONS for that trigger must be true.
Default
The default CONDITION (in which the user does not enter any of
his own CONDITIONS) will match all received events. This means
that every event captured will cause the ACTIONS you specified to
be carried out.
Figure 8.1 illustrates the components of a trigger.
I NAMEI
I STATUS
1-4
character
name
Enablesl
Disables
Trigger
I
ICONDITION(s)1
Up to 4 Trigger Conditions
(logically ANDED) such as:
interface lead conditions,
frame types,
other conditions.
I
ACTION(S)
I
Up to 4 Trigger Actions
Figure 8.1: Trigger Components
Tekelec
8-1
09/27191
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
All the CONDITIONS within one trigger are logically ANDed.
Subsequent triggers are combined in logical OR statements. You
can perform any logical operation with a combination of AND and
OR operations (see Figure 8.2)~ For example, if the following
CONDITIONS are satisfied:
: Trg1
I
CONDITION 1 AND CONDITION 2 AND
CONDITION 3 AND CONDITION 4
OR
I
Trg2
~------------------------"
CONDITION 1 AND CONDITION 2 AND
.
CONDITION 3 AND CONDITION 4
OR
•
•
•
,p---------------------------------------~
: TrgN
,,
CONDITION 1 AND CONDITION 2 AND
CONDITION 3 AND CONDITION 4
--------------------------------------_ ..
FIgure 8.2: Logical Operations of Triggering
then the specified actions are performed.
Any trigger you build will be invoked if it satisfies the following
CONDITION:
.
If the trig~er is enabled, and if a/l CONDITIONS 1 throu9,h 4
are satisfied, then the Chameleon will perform the specified
ACTIONS (up to 4 per trigger).
'- Each trigger has a status that can be modified at run time to enable
or disable the trigger. This gives you the ability to use nested
triggers, iterative triggers, and provides a general control structure.
The Chameleon will always check to see if the trigger CONDITIONS
have been satisfied in the order you specify them. Because the
CONDITIONS within a trigger are in a logical AN D statement, the
Chameleon will not carry out the specified ACTIONS until a/l the
conditions have been satisfied.
Teke/ec
8-2
09/27191
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Triggering
The Chameleon allows you to define as many triggers as you need.
A Triggering Editor is provided so that you can create and modify
your triggers using a simple "menu-driven interface. The Triggering
Editor is described on page 8-7.
Note:
Tekelec
The form (A 1 AND A2 AND A3) OR (81 AND 82), and so on, allows
you to represent any logical expression.
09127191
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Starting Triggering
To start the Triggering application:
1.
2.
Configure the port( s) for the appropriate protocol. This
procedure is described in Chapter 1: Express Instructions.
Press Go to display the Applications Selection menu (Figure
8.3).
-0~------------------------~BlilliliI[QI
Acquisition stopped
Acquisition Mode
Monitoring
Ports
DIRTDSK
-+TRIGGER
EVENT
A
Monitoring
Ports
ANALYSIS
X25STAT
BASIC
Figure 8.3: The Chameleon Application Selection Menu (X.25 Monitoring)
Note:
Tekelec
In step 3, the function keys available to you will depend on your
configuration.
3.
Move the cursor to Trigger and press the F1, F2 or F3 to load
the application on the corresponding port(s).
4.
Load additional applications, .as desired.
5.
Press. Go to start the loaded applications. Page banners
appear ,at the bottom of the screen for each application
loaded. When Triggering is started, acquisition automatically
stops until you create or load a trigger to run. This procedure is
described on the following page.
09/27191
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
.
The Triggering Page.
To load or create a trigger, select and display the Triggering page.
The first menu, shown in Figure 8.4, is displayed.
--o1------------------~[fr:lfGGER.IN(il
. . . 1 ...
.
F1 - Start a New Session
F2 - Load a Triggering file from Disk
kNew
I load I
I
Ftgure 8.4: The Triggering Page
F1 New Session
This option enables you to create a new trigger from scratch. It
displays the Triggering Editor screen with blank fields, as shown in
Figure 8.5.
F2 Load a Triggering File from Disk
This option loads an existing triggering file into the TrigQering Editor.
This enables you to then run the trigger as is, or to modify the trigger
before you run it.
Use of the Triggering Editor for creating and modifying triggers is
.
described on the following page.
After creating or modifying your trigger with the Triggering Editor,
you run it by pressing the Go key. You then have access to a
Triggering Run Time page, as described on page 8-47.
Teke/ec
09/27191
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Figure 8.5 shows the Triggering page after selecting the New
Session option.
There are four fields in each trigger: NAME, STATUS,
CONDITIONS, and ACTIONS. Select each field with the arrow
cursor. The F-key options for each field are displayed in the softkey
strip at the bottom of the screen as the field is selected. Use the ~
and +- keys to· move the cursor to any field in a particular trigger.
Use the i and J, keys to move between triggers.
Each of the four fields is described on the following pages.
--o-----------------ff.;tftl¢G$I~G·f
TRIGGERING EDITOR
Press cancel to clear
NAME
TRG
Press Go to run
STATUS
. Whenever
CONDITIONS
-+
ACTIONS
do
.. -----~-~----------~----------------------.-------------The arrow points to the field which you are currently editing.
Use the softkeys to edit this field, or move the arrow to •.
.
. any field by using the arrow keys on the keyboard.
Use shifted F-keys to select NOT
FIgure 8.5: The Triggering Editor (New Session)
Tekelec
09/27191
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Triggering
Triggering Editor
This section explains the,Triggering Editor fields. These fields allow
you to build or modify a trigger.
NAME
This field enables you to add triggers, delete triggers and assign
names to triggers. When the red arrow cursor is positioned in the
NAME field, you have the following options:
F1 Addtrig
This option adds a new trigger below the currently
selected trigger. The trigger is blank except for the
default name and status (Whenever) assigned to
the trigger. The default name can be changed
using the F2 NewName option.
F2 NewName
This option enables you to assign a
user-specified name to a trigger. Triggers are
automatically assigned default names for your
convenience. However, you do not have to use
the default name; you can assign whatever name
you wish to the trigger. The default names used
are:
TRG1-TRG9
TR10-TR99
T100 - T999
These names are assigned in order. If a trigger is
deleted, the default name assigned to that trigger
is available to be reassig'ned. For example,
suppose you you have triggers named TRG 1,
TRG2, TRG3 and TRG4. If you delete TRG2, and
add a trigger to follow TRG4, the default name of
TRG2 is assigned to the new trigger. In other
words, all previously used default names are
reused before a new name is used.
When you press F2 NewName the current name
is erased and you are prompted for a new name.
Enter a four-character name, and then press
Return. You can use the +- and -+ keys to correct
entry errors.
F3 De/trig
Tekelec
This option deletes the current trigger.
&-7
09/27/91
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
. When the red arrow cursor is positioned in the NAME field, you also
have the following function keys available:
FB Restart
This option erases the field entries of the
displayed triggers. This enables you to enter a
new trigger without having to return to the first
triggering menu.
If you want to save the displayed trigger to a .file,
you must first use the F10 Save option before your
press FB Restart. When you press FB Restart,
you will be prompted for confirmation before the
screen is cleared.
F9 Load
This option loads a specified triggering file from
disk. It enables you to load a file without having
to return to the first triggering menu.
When you press F9 Load, you are prompted for
the file name. Enter the file name in the following
format, and then press Return:
a:filename
b:filename
. (hard disk drive)
(floppy disk drive)
A filename is 1 - 8 characters. If you do not specify
a drive, the default is the hard disk, (drive A). If you
enter more than an 8-character file name, without
a drive specifier" anything beyond the eighth
character is ignored.
F10Save
This option saves the
displayed to a named file.
trigger(s)
currently
When you press F10 Save, you are prompted for
the file name. Enter the file name in the following
format, and then press Return:
..
Teke/ee
a:filename
(hard disk drive)
b:filename
(floppy disk drive)
A filename is 1 - 8 characters. If you do not specify a drive, the
default is the hard disk, (drive A). If you enter more than an
8-character file name, without a drive specifier, anything beyond
the eighth character is ignored•
09/27/91
Triggering
Chameleon 3'2 User's Guide
STATUS
The STATUS field indicates how the Chameleon will invoke a
trigger. (Note that a 'trigger STATUS can be specified as a trigger
ACTION.)
F1 1st Time
The trigger will search received frames for the
specified conditions. If the conditions match, the
trigger actions will be performed, and the trigger
will then be disabled.
F2 Disabled
The trigger will not be invoked when the triggering
is run. ' Even though a trigger is disabled, it can be
armed at run time through another trigger's action.
F3 Whenever
(Default) The trigger will search received frames
for the specified conditions. If the CONDITIONS
match, the trigger actions will be performed, and
the trigger remains enabled.
When the red arrow cursor is positioned in the STATUS field, you
also have the following function keys available:
FB Restart
F9 Load
F10 Save
These are identical to the FB, F9, and F10 keys described on the
previous page.
Teke/eo
09/27/91
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
CONDITIONS
Triggering conditions are built using the softkeys.
The
CONDITIONS field allows you to specify up to four trigger
conditions for each trigger. The available options are shown in
Figure 8.5 in the softkey strip. Figure 8.6 shows the menu structure
for the triggering conditions.
To erase existing conditions for a trigger, move the arrow cursor to
the CONDITIONS field and press Cancel. Cancel erases one
condition at a time, starting with the bottom condition. The message
Press Cancel to Clear appears in the top left-hand corner of the
screen whenever the cancel option is applicable.
Logical NOT
You can logically negate any of the triggering conditions. This
enables you to filter specified items from the data being monitored.
For example, in X.2S you can define a condition which triggers on
anything that is not a data packet.
.
The availability of NOT logic is indicated by the message Use
shifted F-keys to select NOT, which appears above the function
key strip. To select the NOT logic. press Shift and the desired
function key. The NOT logic can be selected only from the first
(highest level) CONDITION function key strip. When NOT is
selected, the message You have selected NOT appears in the
CONDITIONS column in highlighted text. .
You then continue to define the condition by pressing subsequent
function keys, as needed. (Do not use Shift with these subsequent
function keys.)
When the condition is complete, it is'displayed in the CONDITIONS
column in highlighted text and is preceded by an exclamation point
(I) which represents the logical NOT.
For example, for SS#7 Triggering, if you want to filter all ISUP traffic
from the data, you would press the following function key sequence
to define your condition:
Shift
Fa Protocol Displays the message You have selected NOT
F7 #7l3l4
F1 SI
F61SUP
F1 Any
Tekelec
Selects SS#7 Level 3/Level 4 menu
Selects SS#7 Signalling Indicator option
Selects SS#7 ISUP Signalling Indicator
Selects ANY ISUP. Displays the condition !Any
ISUP messages, indicating that any ISUP
message will be filtered from the data.
8-10
09/27/91
DTE/DCE
Error
Counter
Timer
DTE
CRC
DCE
FAbort
Define
user
counter
1,2,3, or 4
Define
user
timer
1,2,3, or 4
Float
Const
$7
RLTlme
FramLen
> = or
<=
Protocol
> =,
< =,
specified
system
time
$8
Frame
Variable
Leads
Port
$7
Select lead:
dt, rt, ct, ds,
cd,sq,ri
PortA
=. >.
$8
specified
length
$9
=
<
$9
St~~~g
Port B
r--
High
I--
Low
I--
To High
"-
To Low
J
r- AscStr
EbcStr
Hex
Dec
F11
HDLC
F21
X.25
FJ
0.921
F41
0.931
F51
DASS2
F61
#7L2
Page
8-15
Page
8-16
Page
8-17
Page
8-17
Page
8-19
Page
8-21
F~
. #7 L3L4
Page
8-23
E9~
F81
TUP*
ISUP*
Page
8-31
Page
8-32
Binary
Variable
* When a protocol other than SS7 Is selected In the Setup
Menu, keys FB and F9 are T.UP and ISUP, as shown.
However, when SS7 is selected as the Setup protocol,
these two keys reflect the SS7 standards listed below.
Standard
CCITT (84 or 88)
NCC
NTT
ANSI
HR7
E8
CTTUP
NCCTUP
NTTTUP
ASNTUP
TR7TUP
E9
CT ISUP
NCCISUP
NTTISUP
ANSISUP
TR71SUP
Figure 8.6: Triggering Conditions Menu Structure
Tekelec
8-11
09/27/91
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
DTElDCE
When you press this key, you get a choice of DTE or DCE. The
Chameleon searches either the DTE or DCE side of the
communications line for the trigger conditions. The default is both
sides.
Error
If you select Error, the following function key options are available.
CRC
Triggers on CRC errors (displays CRC Error in the
CONDITIONS field).
FAbort
Triggers on Frame Aborts (displays Frame Abort in the
CONDITIONS field).
Counter
This option triggers on a counter value. You can use up to four
user-defined counters. When you select the Counter option, you
are prompted to select a counter number:
Cnt1
(Counter 1)
Cnt2
(Counter 2)
Cnt3
(Counter 3)
Cnt4
(Counter 4)
After selecting the counter, you define the counter val ue to trigger
on, by first selecting a comparison operator:
>=
<=
--
>
<
Greater than or equal to
Less than or equal to
Equal to
Greater than
Less than
You are then prompted to enter a decimal value (0 - 999). (You can
use the and keys to correct an entered value.) If you press Return
without entering a value, the value is set to O. When a counter
condition is defined, the Conditions column displays a message
similar to:
Cnt3 > 10 (perform the defined action(s) when counter 3 is
greater than 10)
This feature is used in conjunction with the trigger actions which
increment and reset counters. For example, you could increment·
a counter each time a CRC error occurs, and then trigger on the
counter value when it exceeds 10.
Tekelec
8-12
09/27/91
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Timer
This option triggers on a timer value. You can use up to four
user-defined timers. When you select the Timer option, you are
prompted to select a timer number (Timer1 - Timer 4) using the
function keys.
After selecting the timer, you define the timer value to trigger on, by
first. selecting a comparison operator:
=
<=
>
Greater than or equal to
Less than or equal to
You are then prompted to enter a decimal value (O - 99999
milliseconds). (You can use the and keys to correct an entered
value.) If you press Return without entering a value, the value is
set to O. When a timer condition is defined, the Conditions column
displays a message similar to:
Timer2 >= 45678 ms
In the above example, the trigger will fire when Timer2 is greater
than or equal to 45678 ms.
This feature is used in conjunction with the Timer trigger actions
which start, stop, or reset timers. A timer must be started before the
value can be checked. For example, you could start a timer when
acquisition begins and then reset the timer each time a CRC error
occurs, or. when the specified timer value is exceeded.
RLTi me
Trigger on Real Time Clock value. Real Time is checked only when
there is continuous traffic. Therefore, you cannot set triggering to
start acquisition at a specified time. When you press this softkey,
select a comparison operator (>= or <=) and enter a clock value
(with colons between hours, minutes, and seconds). Then, press
Return. If you enter <= and the clock value 12:30:00, the
CONDITIONS field will display Real-Time <= 12:30:00.
Frame
This option triggers on a specified data string within a frame. When
you press this softkey, you are prompted for the index, as follows:
Frame[lndex ?]
The index specifies the scope of the search forthe data string within
the frame. There are three types of indices:
Note:
As the floating index uses significantly more processing
time than the other index options, it is suggested it be
used sparingly.
Float
Tekelec
The Chameleon will search the entire frame for the data
string.
8-13
09/27191
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Const
Triggering
The Chameleon will look for the data string only at a
specified offset from the beginning of the frame. When
. you select this option, you are prompted for a starting
byte (offset). as follows:
[] ==
Enter a decimal value in the range 1 - 99. (The first byte
of a frame is 1.) The Chameleon will then search for the
data string to begin at that byte only. If no value is
entered, it is treated as a float index.
Variable
$7, $8, $9 The Chameleon will search for the data string using the
range specified by variable $7, $8, or $9. The variables
$7, $8, and $9 can be defined using the Variable
function key, described on pages 8-15. -42, and -46.
For example, if you use $7 as your index and $7 is
defined as >-10, the Chameleon will search for the data
string from byte 10 to the end of the frame. After
selecting an index, you are prompted to enter the data
string. The first step is to specify the type of data string
you are entering, using the following options:
AseStr
(ASCII String)
Enter 1 - 13 ASCII
characters.
For example, if you enter
12345, the CONDITIONS field will display
FrAse[ ] 12345.
(EBCDIC String) Enter '1 - 13 EBCDIC
characters. For example, if you enter 12345,
the CONDITIONS field will display FrEbc[ ]
= 12345.
(Hexadecimal string) Enter up to 12 HEX
digits (six hex pairs). For example, if you
enter the 000102030405, the CONDITIONS
field will display FrHex[ ] 000102030405.
(Decimal string) Enter a'decimal number in
the range 1 - 255, which represents a single
byte value. The CONDITIONS field will
display FrOee[ ] = xxx, where xxx is the
decimal value.
(Binary string) Enter an 8-digit binary mask.
You can enter an x (for don't care) for digits
you want the Chameleon to disregard. For
example, if you enter x01 Ox1 Ox, the
CONDITIONS field will display FrSin[ ]
x010x10x.
Select a string variable by pressing a
softkey. $1-$3 are byte strings and $4-$6
are bit strings, and are described on pages
=
EbeStr
Hex
=
Dee
Sin
=
Variable
8-37.
Tekelec
8-14
09/27/91
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
FramLen
This option enables you to trigger on the number of bytes in a frame.
You will be prompted for a logical operator, as follows: > =, <=, ==,
>, and <. You must then enter a decimal number. The Chameleon
will trigger on frames' which meet the specified size.
Protocol
This soft key provides subsequent softkeys that allow you to build
trigger conditions using protocol-specific mnemonics.
Teke/ec
8-15
09/27/91
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Protocol: HOLe
The HDLC options are:
Teke/ec
I-Frame
The Information Frame command transfers sequentially
numbered frames containing user-information across
the data link.
RR
The Receive Ready supervisory frame is used to
indicate that a station is ready to receive I-Frames, and
to acknowledge previously received I-Frames.
RNR
The Receive Not Ready supervisory frame is used to
indicate that a station is not ready to receive additional
incoming !-Frames.
REJ
The REJect superVisory frame is used to request
re-transmission of an I-Frame.
SABM
The Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode command
requests the link be set in Information Transfer mode.
DISC
The DISConnect command is used to perform a logical
disconnect.
FRMR
The Frame Reject (FRMR) response signals a condition
that is not recoverable by re-transmission of the errored
frame.
UA
Unnumbered
Acknowledgements
(UA)
are
unnumbered responses to SABM, SABME, and DISC
commands.
OM
The Disconnect Mode (OM) response is used to report a
non-operational status where the station is logically
disconnected from the data link.
SABME
The Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode Extended
(SABME) command places the addressed station in
asynchronous balanced mode - extended.
P/F
The PolVFinal Bit is used for various signaling tasks. By
using the function keys, you can select P/F to be 1 (set)
or 0 (unset).
.
.
8-16
09/27191
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Triggering
Protocol: Q.921
The protocol-specific Q.921 options are the same as the HOLC
options described on page 8-16 with the additions described below.
Tekelec
SAPI
Triggers on a Service Access Poi nt Identifier value in the
range 0 -63.
TEl
Triggers on a Terminal Endpoint Identifier value in the
range 0 -127.
C/R
Triggers on a Command/Response bit value of 1 or O.
8-17
09/27/91
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Protocol: X.2S
The protocol-specific X.2S' options include the ability to trigger on
the following types of packets:
CallReq
Call Con
Clr Req
Clr Con
Data
Intrupt
Inrpt C.
RRP
RNRP
REJP
Reset
Reset C
Restrt
RestrtC
Call Request
Call Confirmation
Clear Request
Clear Confirmation
Data
Interrupt
Interrupt Confirmation
Receiver Ready Packet
Receiver Not Ready Packet
Reject Packet
Reset
Reset Confirmation
Restart
Restart Confirmation
In addition to triggering on the X.2S packets above, you can also
trigger on these elements:
.
Subscrb Select this option to trigger on a user-specified calling or
called address in Call Request packets. When selected,
you are prompted for C.alled or Calling.
·1"
You are then prompted for the address. To specify don't
care digits, enter as many Xs as there are digits in the
corresponding address displayed in the History page.
For example, if the History page shows the Cal red
. Address 1234, enter XXXX for the Called Address
trigger.
Once the Chameleon finds a frame with the specified
address, it will store the LCGNlLCN. Each trigger can
store up to five LCGNILCNs for a given address. If more
than five are seen, the fifth LCGN/LCN is replaced by
the one just seen.
The stored LCGNlLCN is not active until a Call
Confirmation packet is seen with the same LCGNlLCN.
The specified actions then occur when incoming frames
containing this LCGNlLCN are found. This LCGNlLCN
is dropped when a clear confirmation or Restart
confirmation packet is seen. A Restart confirmation
packet will clear all LCGNlLCNs.
Tekelec
Q Bit
Triggers on a Qualifier (Q) bit value of 0 or 1.
o Bit
Triggers on
or 1.
M Bit
Triggers on a More (M) bit value of 0 or 1.
a Delivery Confirmation (D) bit value of 0
8-18
09127191
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Triggering
Protocol: Q.931
The protocol-specific 0.931 options are described below.
ProOise
Triggers on a Protocol Discriminator value. Enter an
8-bit binary string composed of 1,0, or x (ignore).
CR Flag
Triggers on a Call Reference flag value of 1 or O.
CR Valu
Triggers on a Call Reference value. The value you enter
must be the exact hex number string that would appear
. in the traffic. For example, if you want to trigger on a
frame with a Call Reference value of '5' and a Call
Reference length of '2', the trigger input condition for
CI-Rf Val: must be set to hex 0005.
Msg Type Triggers on a specific 0.931 message type:
ALERTing
CALL PROceeding
CONNECT
CONNect ACKnowledgement
SETUP
SETUP ACKnowledgement
RESUME
RESUme ACKnowledgement
RESUme REJection
RESTART
RESTart ACKnowledgement
SUSPEND
SUSPEND ACKnowledgement
SUSPend REJection
USeR INFOrmation
DETACH
DETach ACKnowledgement
DISConnect
RELEASE
RELease COMplete
CANCEL
CANCel ACKnowledgement
CANCel REJection,
CONgestion CONtrol
FACILITY
FACility ACKnowledgement
FACILITY REJection
INFOrmation
REGISTER
REGister ACKnowledgement
REGister REJection
STATUS
STATus ENOuiry
PROGress
Tekelee'
8-19
09/27191
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Protocol: DASS 2
The DASS 2 function keys enable you to trigger on one of the
following elements:
F1 LAP triggers on a user-specified LAP (time slot)
F2 Msg triggers on a specific type of message (see list below)
F3 SupServ triggers on a type of Supplementary Service (see list
below)
F1 LAP
If you press F1 LAP, the message DASS: LAP== appears in the
ACTION column and you are prompted to enter a decimal number
which indicates the Unk Access Protocol (LAP ortime slot) on which
to trigger. The valid range for this entry is 0 - 31 decimal.
F2Msg
If you press F2 Msg, the message DASS: appears in the ACTION
column and you are prompted to select a DASS 2 message type by
pressing the appropriate softkey. There are 28 message types to
choose from, as listed below. For more information about DASS 2
message types, refer to the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation
Manual, Volume II, Chapter 14.
Tekelec
$oftkey
Meanlna
CS
IClc
ICli
SCli
SClc
CA
NAM
NIM
CIM
RRM
WSR
SeSR
UDC
ISRMc
ISRM i
SSRMi
SSRMc
Channel Seized
Incoming Call Indication (Complete)
Incoming Call Indication (Incomplete)
Subsequent Call Indication (Incomplete)
Subsequent Call Indication (Complete)
Call Arrival
Number Acknowledge
Network Indication
Clear Indication
Recall Rejection
Withhold Service Request
Send Service Request
User Data Control
Initial Service Request (Complete)
Initial Service Request (Incomplete)
Subsequent Service Request (Incomplete)
Subsequent Service Request (Complete)
8-20
09/27/91
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Triggering
Softkey
Meaning
CAM
CRM
CCF
RMc
RMi
SRW
CCM
SM
UUDc
UUDi
MIMc
MCMc
MREJM
MIDMc
MRMc
MRMi
MACKM
MEOTM
. Call Accepted
Clear Request
Clear Confirmation
Recall (Complete)
Recall (Incomplete)
Service Request Withheld
Call Connected
Swap
User to User Data (Complete)
User to User Data (Incomplete)
Maintenance Information (Complete)
Maintenance Command (Complete)
Maintenance Reject
Maintenance Ind. (Complete)
Maintenance Result (Complete)
Maintenance Result (Incomplete)
Maintenance Acknowledge
Maintenance End of Task
F3SupServ
If you press F3 SupServ, you are prompted to select a DASS 2
Supplementary Service type by pressing the appropriate softkey.
There are eight services to choose from, as listed below.
Softkey
Meaning
Us~ to User Signalling
Closed User Group
Calling or Called Une Identification
Call Charge Indication
Network Address Extension
Information for Display
Maintenance Status Test Request
Mainentance Status Test Response
Usr>Usr
CUG
CCLld
CCI
NAE
I Disp
MSTRqst
MSTResp
Teke/ec
8-21
09/27191
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
55#7 Triggering
There are several protocol specific functions keys dedicated to
SS#7 Triggering:
•
F6 #7 L2 displays SS#7 Level 2 triggering options
•
F7 #7 L3L4 displays Level 3 and 4 triggering options
•
F8 CT TUPprovides direct access to simpler 55#7 Telephone
User Part (TUP) triggering
•
F9 CT ISUP provides direct access to simpler S5#7 ISDN
User Part (ISUP) triggering
S5#7 triggering options are specific to the S5#7 standard selected
when the Chameleon was configured (NCC, CCITT, ANSI, NTT,
etc.). This includes standard heading codes, CIC, and OPC
(Originating Point Code) and DPC (Destination Point Code)
formats.
Heading Codes
oPC, DPC and
CIC Format
. Heading codes are handled by way of heading code tables which
are specific to the SS#7 standard in use. These standard tables can
be modified as needed to suit your application.
When triggering on OPC, OPC, and CIC the SS#7 standard in use
determines how the field should be entered. The functions keys
indicate the options for the selected standard:
FIELDS
This option is displayed for all SS#7 standards. It
prompts you to enter the field in decimal in the format
shown at the bottom of the screen. For example, for
NTT OPC, the following prompts appears:
Enter decimal numbers in the format: ddd ddd ddd
HEX
This option is displayed for the CCITT 1984, CCITT
1988, 1TR7, NCC and NTT standards. It prompts you
for the field in hex in the format shown at the bottom of
the screen. For example, for NTT OPC, the following
prompts appears:
Maximum hex value is: ffff
DEC
This option is displayed for the 1TR7, NCC and NTT
standards. It prompts you for the field in decimal, with
the maximum value displayed at the bottom of the
screen. For example, for NTT OPC, the following
prompts appears:
Maximum decimal value is: 65535
Taka/ee
8-22
09/27/91
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Triggering
Protocol: #7 L2
F6 #7 L2 displays SS#7 Level 2 triggering options as shown in
Figure 8.7.
I
510
1,--1_S_'N--II, I...._5_1E---..JII
5105
II
SIPO
II
SIB
,Figure 8.7: 55#7 Level 2 Triggering Options
You can trigger on the following SS#7 Level 2 elements:
FSN
BSN
FIB
BIB
Forward Sequence Number
Backward Sequence Number
Forward Indicator Bit
Backward Indicator Bit
When you, select one of the above options, you are
prompted for a 1 - 3 digit decimal number. When you
enter a number and press Return, the Conditions
column displays one of the following:
FSN == nnn
BSN == nnn
FIB = nnn
BIB == nnn
nnn is the decimal number you entered.
Tekelec
FISU
(Fill In Signal Unit). When you select FISU, the message
Any FISU appears in the Conditi,ons column, and the
Chameleon will trigger on any FISU encountered.
LSSU
(Link Status Signal Unit). When you select LSSU, the
message Any LSSU appears in the Conditions column,
8-23
09/27191
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
and the Chameleon will trigger on any LSSU
encountered. To trigger on the status indicator of an
LSSU (SIO, SIE, SIOS, etc), use the LSSU_SF option
described below.
MSU
(Message Signal Unit). When you select MSU, the
message Any MSU appears in the Conditions column,
and the Chameleon will trigger on any MSU
encountered.
LSSU_SF [Link Status Signal Unit (Status Field)]. This option
enables you to trigger on the status field of an LSSU.
When you select LSSU_SF, one of the following can be
selected using the function keys:
SIO
SIN
SIE
SIOS
SIPO
SIB
Link Out of Alignment
Normal Alignment
Emergency Alignment
Link out of Service
Processor Outage
Busy
When you select one of these LSSU status field types,
the message LSSU_SF on nnn appears in the
Conditions column, where nnn is one of the status types
listed above.
Teke/ee
8-24
09/27/91 •
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Protocol: #7 L3L4
F7 #7 L3L4 displays the menu of SS#7 Level 3 and Level 4
triggering options, as shown in Figure 8.8. This option enables you
to trigger on spedfic Signalling Indicators, their components, and
the following Level 3 and Level 4 elements:
SI
(Signalling Indicator). This option enables you to trigger
on a specific component of a Signalling Indicator. When
you select SI, the function key strip displays the
message types that can be triggered on:
MGT
TMR
TUP
Signalling network management messages
Signalling network testing and maintenance
messages
Signalling network testing and maintenance
messages (spare)
-Data User Part (call and circuit related
messages)
Data User Part (facility registration and
cancellation messages
Signalling Connection and Control Part
Telephone User Part (see also page 8-33)
ISUP
ISDN User Part (see also page 8-35)
TMS
Dupe
DUPF
seep
When you select a specific Signalling Indicator type, the
function key strip displays the elements on which you
can trigger. Depending on the Signalling Indicator
selected, and the SS#7 specification in use (CCITT,
ANSI, or NTT) the available elements will be among the
following options:
Any
This option is available for all Signalling
Indicator types. When selected, it causes
the Chameleon to trigger on the selected
Signalling Indicator type. It displays the
message Any nnn in the Conditions column,
where nnn is the SI type .
.
Teke/ec
8-25
09/27191
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
= 5571
Protocol
I
I
I
I
I
II
MGT
I
TMA
I
I
, ANY
SI
DPC
I
I
II
I
HOH1
I
I
DUPC " DUPF
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
JI
I
SLC
I
I
I
SCCP
ANY
I
II
HOH1
French
I
SLS
ANY
I
English
-
Russian -
Gennan
Spanist I-OCS I-CSwP I--
I
I
I
I
HOH1
CIC
I
lAM
IL
I
I
I
I
Addlnd
-
SubNum
-
Spare
-
Nationl
-
InterN
,I
I
I
Cirlnd
I
-
NoStlt
1 Stlt
-
NtReqd
r-- Rquired
Spare 2
-
Prtmd
Spare 3
-
Spare
Inc Int
I
I
Aedir C
r--
Not Int
r-- Not Rdrc
Inclded
'--
InterNt
'-- Rdrc:ted
DataC I-TestC I--
Figure 8.8: 55#7 Level 3 and Level 4 Triggering Options.
-
I
I
Other
I
I
I
CIC
I
Ogt Pth
-
oPC
J
I
I
I
1TR7
CCITI
NumSig
I"- Not Inc
i.-
HOH1
Msg Ind
I
I Con Chk I EchoSu I
I
I
J
I
ISUP
II
ANY
I
-
-,
I
I
I
I
Value
I
*TUP
I
I
I
Clg Cat
·,SUP
I
I
TMS
I
*TUP
* The actual F-key labels shown
depends upon the protocol you
selected in the Setup Menu. See
pages 8-31 and 8-32 for details
I
I
I
I
I #7 L3L4 I I
#7L2
1
I
I
I
I
I
AddSig
I
I
Sig Pth
Spare
OrdCIi
I-- Any Pth
Ogtl CI
"-
SS7 Pth
I
~EB
~I
1
I
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Triggering
SL(C/S)
(Signalling Link Code). This option is
displayed for all Signalling Indicator types
except TUP and ISUP. When selected, you
are prompted for a hex value.
The
Conditions column displays the message
SLC==nnn, where nnn is the hex value of
the desired SLC.
(Signalling Link Selection). This option available for the SCCP 51 only - allows you
to trigger on the signalling link selection field.
When selected, you are prompted for a hex
.value. The Conditions column displays the
message SLS==nnn, where nnn is the hex
value for the desired SLS.
Tekelec
CIC
(Circuit Identification Code.) This option is
displayed when triggering on ISUP, TUP, or
1TR7 messages. The way in which this field
is entered is specific to the SS#7 standard
being used. Refer to page 8-22 for more
information.
HOH1
(Heading Code). This option is available for
all Siqnalling Indicator types. The heading
code IS a 4-bit field (HO H1) which identifies
the message group. When you select HO
H1, it displays a mnemonic table for the
selected message type. For example, if you
selectTUP HO H1, the table shown in Figure
8.9 is displayed.
lAM
(Initial Address MessageJ. This option,
available only when the TUP 51 is selected,
allows you to trigger on lAM elements. See
page 8-29 for further details. Figure 8.8 lists
the elements available for triggering.
8-27
09/27/91
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Triggering
Mnemonic Table for TUP
H1
o
•
2
345
IAI
SAM SAO
COT CCF
678
9
abc
d
e
HO 0--.00
1~
6
7
8
9
lAM
GSM
GRQ
ACM
SEC
ANU ANC
RlG
MGB
CFM
CHG
CGC
ANN
810
MBA
CPM
NNC
C8K
8LA
MGU
CPA
ADI
ClF
UBl
MUA
CVS
CFL
RAN
U8A
HGB
CVM
SSB UNN lOS SST ACB DPN
EUM
FOT CCl
EAM
RSC
HBA HGU HUA GRS GRA SGB SBA SGU SUA
CRM CLI
a
b
c
d
e
f
Use arrow keys ( i J, ~ -+ ) to select a choice
Press GO to accept selection or Cancel to abort entry·
Figure 8.9: Heading Code Mnemonic Selection for Telephone User Part (TUP)
To select a heading code by standard mnemonic:
1.
Move the arrow cursor to the mnemonic
2.
Press Go. This returns you to the Triggering editor
and displays the message TUP Heading Code is
nnn, where nnn is the selected mnemonic. In the
table, the selectee mnemonic or value is
displayed in green.
To exit the heading code table without making a
selection:
Press Cancel.
To trigger ona heading code value other than the
standard mnemonics displayed in the table:
1.
Move the arrow to the appropriate position in the
table.
.
.
2.
Press Go.
For example, to trigger on heading code HO value 0 and
H1 value 4, move the cursor to the fifth column of the first
row, and press Go.
Teke/ec
&-28
09/27/91
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
In addition, when you trigger on Telephone User Part (TUP), you
have the option of triggering on specific elements of Initial Address
Messages (lAM). This feature is provided because of the relative
importance of lAMs. Figure 8.10 illustrates the format of an lAM
so that you can relate the SS#7 triggering options to the lAM
components.
Spare
2
FEDCBA
0001
0001
CALLING PARTY
CATEGORY
HEADING
CODE
H1
HEADING
CODE
HO
LABEL
4
4
40
-6
First bit
transmitted.
r
LKJIHGFEDCBA
Address Signais
Number of
Address
Signals
MESSAGE INDICATORS
nx8
4
12
Figure 8.10: TUP Initial Address Message (lAM) Format
When you select TUP lAM, the function key strip displays the
following triggering options:
,
Num Sig (Number of address signals). This option enables you to
trigger on the number of address signals contained in
the initial address message. Enter one hex digit or X to
specify 'don't care.' This displays the message Num of
add sigs == x in the Conditions column; where x is the
hex value that you entered.
Add Sig
(Address Signal). This option enables you to trigger on a
specific telephone number, or specific elements of a
telephone number. When you select this option, you are
prompted for the telephone digits (in decimal) that you.
- want to trigger on. To ignore a digit, enter the letter x in
that poSition. For example, to trigger on area code 818,
enter the following:
818xxxxxxx
The Conditions column then displays the message lAM
digits = 818xxxxxxx.
.
The Chameleon will tri~Qer only on phone numbers with
the same number of dIgIts shown in the condition. For
example, if you enter the condition
Tekelec·
8-29
09127191
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
lAM digits == 123xx
the Chameleon will trigger only on phone numbers
beginning with 123 with a length of 5 digits. If the phone
number has more or less than 5 digits, the trigger will not
fire.
Ifthe number of 'don't care' digits will vary, for example,
in a country code, you can express a logical OR
condition by writing two triggers. For example, the first
trigger could specify two initial 'don't care' digits and
the second trigger could specify three initial' don't care'
digits.
Clg Cat
(Calling Party Category). This option triggers on a
specific Calling Party Category, with the following
options:.
French
English
German
Russian
Spanish
OCS
CSwP
DataC
Teste
Value
Operator, language French
Operator, language English
Operator, language German
Operator, language Russian
Operator, language Spanish
Ordinary Calling Subscriber
Calling Subscriber with Priority
Data Call
Test Call
Enter a decimal value which represents one
of the categories not defined above. An
appropriate message will be displayed in the
Conditions column, as described below. If a
value is entered that corresponds to one of
the above values, the appropriate message
will appear.
Admin.
Language
(Available
to
Administrations for selecting a particular
language provided by mutual agreement)
This appears when value 6, 7. or 8 is
entered.
Reserved
This appears when value 9 is entered.
Spare
This appears when values 14-127 are
entered.
Msg Ind
Tekelec
(Message Indicator). This option enables you to trigger
on message-indicator bit settings A - L (refer to Figure
8.10). The following options are available:
8-30
09/27/91
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Triggering
Add Ind
Nature of address indicator (Bits B A):
Sub Num
Spare
use)
Nationl
InterN
Cir Ind
Subscriber Number
Spare (reserved for national
National (significant) number
International number
Nature of circuit indicator (Bits 0 C):
No Stlt
connection
1 Stlt
connection
Spare 2
Spare 3
No satellite circuit in the
One satellite circuit in the
Spare (binary 1 0)
Spare (binary 1 1 )
Con Chk Continuity check Indicator (Bits FE):
Nt Reqd
Continuity check not required
Rquired
Continuity check required on
this circuit
Prfmd
Continuity check performed
on a previous circuit
Spare
Spare
Echo Su Echo suppressor indicator (Bit G):
Not Inc
Outgoing
suppressor not included
Inclded
Outgoing
suppressor included
Inc Inti
Call other than international
Incoming international call
Not a redirected call
Redirected call
Ordinary call
Digital path required
Signalling path indicator(Bit K):
Any Pth
SS7 Pth
path
Teke/ec
echo
All digital path required indicator (Bit J):
Ord CII
Dgtl CI
Sig Pth
half
Redirected call indicator (Bit I):
Not Rdrc
Rdrcted
Dig Pth
echo
Incoming International Call indicator (Bit H):
Not Int
inco.ming
InterNt
Redir C
half
8-31
Any path
All signalling system No.7'
09/27/91
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Spare
Spare (Bit L):
o
1
Tekelec
Spare bit not set
Spare bit set
OPC
Origination Point Code. The way in which this field is
entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used.
Refer to page 8-22 for more information.
OPC
Destination Point Code. The way in which this field is
entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used~
Refer to page 8-22 for more information.
8-32
09/27/91
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Protocol: CT TUP
.
.
FB CT TUP displays function key options for CCITT SS#7
Telephone User Part (TUP) triggering, as shown in Figure 8.11.
This option provides direct access for writing simpler TUP triggers.
Refer to F7 #7 L3L4 for more complex Level 3 and Level 4 TUP
triggering and for triggering on Signalling Indicators other than TUP.
See page 8-52 for an example of an SS#7 TUP trigger.
Protocol
CTTUP
CIC
Figure 8.11: 55#7 CCITT TUP Level 3 and Level 4 Options
With the FB CT TUPoption, you can trigger on the following TUP
components:
Teke/ec
ope
Origination Point Code. The way in which this field is
entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used.
Refer to page 8-22 for more information.
DPe
Destination Point Code. The way in which this field is
entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used. .
Refer to page 8-22 for more information.
ele
(Circuit Identification Code.) This option is displayed
when triggering on ISUP, TUP, or 1TR7 messages. The
way in which this field is entered is specific to the SS#7
standard being used. Refer to page 8-22 for more
information.
HOH1
(Heading Code) The.heading code is a 4-bit field (HO
H1) which identifies the message group. When you
select HO H1, it displays the mnemonic table for TUP.
The format and use of the TUP mnemonic table is
described on page 8-28.
09/27191
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Triggering
Add Sig. (Address Signal.) This option enables you to trigger on a
specific telephone number, or specific elements of a
telephone number. When you select this option, you are
prompted for the telephone digits (in decimal) that you
want to trigger on. To ignore a digit, enter the letter x in
that position. For example, to trigger on area code 818,
enter the following:
818xxxxxxx
The Conditions column then displays the message lAM
digits == 818xxxxxxx
Teke/ec
8-34
09/27191
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Protocol: CT ISUP
F9 CT ISUP displays function key options for CCITT SS#7·ISDN
User Part (ISUP) triggering, as shown in Figure 8.12. This option
provides direct access for writing ISUP triggers. Refer to F7 #7
L3L4 (page 8-25) for triggering on Signalling Indicators other than
ISUP.
Protocol
CTTUP
Called #
Figure 8.12: SS#7 CCITT ISUP Level 3 and Level 4 Options
With the F9 CT ISUPoption, you can trigger on the following TUP
components:
Tekelec
oPC
Origination Point Code. The way in which this field is
entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used.
Refer to page 8-22 for more information.
OPC
Destination Point Code. The way in which this field is
entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used.
Refer to page 8-22 for more information.
CIC
(Circuit Identification Code.) This option is displayed
when triggering on ISl!P, TUP, or 1TR7 messages. The
way in which this field is entered is specific to the SS#7
standard being used. Refer to page 8-22 for more
information.
HOH1
(Heading Cod'e) The heading code is a 4-bit field
(HOH1) which identifies the message group. When you
select HO H1, it displays the mnemonic table for ISUP
(see Figure 8.13 be/ow). The. use of an HO/H1
mnemonic table is described on page 8-28.
8-35
09/27191
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
MnemoniC Table for ISUP
H1
o
HO
0
I~
6
7
8
9
a
b
c
d
e
f
00
lAM
SAM
INR
INF
COT
ACM
FOT
ANM
UBM
REl
PAU
RES
RlS
..
1
RlC
CCR
RSC
BlO
UBl
BLA
UBA
GRS
CGB
CPU
CGB
CGU
CMR
CMC
RCM
FAR
2
3
FAA
FRJ
FAD
FAI
4
5
678
9
a
b
c
d
e
CSV
CSV
DRS
PAM
GRA
UAU
Use arrow keys ( i J. f- ~ ) to select a choice
Press GO to accept selection or Cancel to abort entry
Figure 8.13: The ISUP Mnemonic Table.
Add Sig
(Address Signal). This option triggers on a specific
address signal (telephone number) in a Cal/ed Party
Number information element of an lAM.
~
When you select this option, you are prompted for the
telephone digits (in decimal) that you want to trigger on.
To ignore a digit, enter the letter x in that position. For
example, to trigger on area code 818, enter the
following:
818xxxxxxx
The Conditions column then displays the message: lAM
digits
818xxxxxxx
==
Tekelec
8-36
09/27/91
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Triggering
The following option is available only if your Chameleon is
configured to monitor SS#7 standard 1TR7.
Tel. Num This option triggers on the called or calling Telephone
Number. Selecting this option calls up two other
options:
F1 Calling #
Prompts you for the telephone number of the
calling party.
The Chameleon triggers on the lAM frame
containing the complete Calling Number,
and on all messages related to the call.
F2 Called #
Prompts you for the telephone number of the
called party.
The Chameleon triggers on the lAM frame
containing the complete or partial called
number, the SAM containing the address
signal which completed the called number,
and on all the messages related to the call.
The following factors determine if a
message is related to the call when
triggering on Called #:
For ISUP messages, for those
messages with a CIC value which
matches the CIC in the lAM
For secp messages sent from the
same direction as the lAM, related
messages are those in which the
Source Local Reference matches the
lAM LocaJ Reference of Connection
Request IE.
For other SCCP messages, related
messages are those in which the
Destination Local Reference matches
the lAM Local Reference of Connection
Request IE.
Note:
TekelecO
When the Called Address in an lAM frame matches a
trigger condition, but the SAM fails to complete the
number, only the lAM frame will be triggered.
8-31
09/21/91
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
The telephone number you enter must· conform to the following
rules:
.
•
Enter a maximum of 20 digits.
•
Do not include spaces and hyphens (-) when you enter the
number.
•
You can use the following wildcards within ·the telephone
number:
•
Taka/ec
?
Wildcard substitution for a single telephone number
digit. for example:
41486??98
*
Wildcard substitution for the remaining digits of the
telephone number. For example, the following triggers
on any telephone number with the first three digits 414:
414*
A maximum of 16 telephone numbers can be entered in a
triggering file.
8-38
09/27191
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Protocol: TR71SUP
F9 TR71SUP displays function key options for 1TR7 #SS7 ISDN
User Part (ISUP) triggering, as shown in Figure 8.14. This option
provides direct access for writing 1TR7 SS7 ISUP triggers.
Protocol
= SS7
TR7TUP
Called #
Figure 8.14: SS#7 1TR7 ISUP Level 3 and Level 4 Options
With the F9 TR71SUP option, you can trigger on the following
components:
Tekelec
OPC
Origination Point Code. The way in which this field is
entered is specific to the SS#7standard being used.·
Refer to page 8-22 for more information.
OPC
Destination Point Code. The way in which this field is
entered is specific to the SS#7 standard being used.
Refer to page 8-22 for more information.
CIC
(Circuit Identification Code.) This option is displayed
when triggering on ISUP, TUP, or 1TR7 messages. The
way in which this field is entered is specific to the SS#7
standard being used. Refer to page 8-22 for more
information.
HOH1
(Heading Code) The heading code is a 4-bit field
(HOH1) which identifies the message group. When you
select HO H1, it displays the mnemonic table for ISUP
(see Figure 8.15 below). The use of an HO/H1
mnemonic table is described on page 8-28.
8-39
09/,27/91
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Mnemonic Table for 1TR7ISUP
~
H1
HO
0
1~
6
7
8
9
a
b
o
1
2
00
RlC
CCA
RSC
BlO
UBl
BLA
UBA
GAS
CGB
CPU
CGB
CGU
CMR
CMC
RCM
FAA
FAA
lAM
SAM
INA
INF
COT
ACM
FOT
ANM
UBM
REl
c
d
e
f
PAU
RES
RlS
3
4
5
678
9
a
b
c
d
e
FRJ
FAD
FAt
CSV
CSV
DRS
PAM
GRA
UAU
Use arrow keys ( i J, +- ~ ) to select a choice
Press GO to accept selection or Cancel to abort entry
Flgure 8.15: The 1TR71SUP Mnemonic Table.
Add Sig
(Address Signal). This option triggers on a specific
address signal (telephone number) in a Called Party
Number information element of an lAM.
When you select this option, you are prompted for the
telephone digits (in decimal) that you want to trigger on.
To ignore a digit, enter the letter x in that position. For
example, to trigger on area code 818, enter the
following:
818xxxxxxx
The Conditions column then displays the message: lAM
digits
818xxxxxxx
==
The following option is available only if your Chameleon is
configured to monitor SS#7 standard 1TR7.
Tel. Num This option triggers on the called or calling Telephone
Number. Selecting this option ·calls up two other
options: .
F1 Calling #
Tekelec
Prompts you for the telephone number of the
calling party.
8-40
09/27/91
~
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
The Chameleon triggers on the lAM frame
containing the ·complete Calling Number,
and on all messages related to the call.
F2 Called #
Prompts you for the telephone numberofthe
called party.
The Chameleon triggers on the lAM frame
containing the complete or partial called
number, the SAM containing the address
signal which completed the called number,
and on all the messages related to the call.
The following factors determine if a
message is related to the call when
triggering on Called #:
For ·ISUP messages, for those
messages with a CIC value which
matches the CIC in the lAM
For SCCP messages sent from the
same direction as the lAM, related
messages are those in which the
Source Local Reference matches the
lAM Local Reference of Connection
Request IE.
For other SCCP messages, related
messages are those in which the
Destination Local Reference matches
the lAM Local Reference of Connection
Request IE.
Note:
When the Called Address in an lAM frame matches a
trigger condition, but the SAM fails to complete the
number, only. the lAM frame will be triggered.
The telephone number you enter must conform to the
following four rules:
•
Enter a maximum of 20 digits.
•
Do not include spaces and hyphens (-) when you
enter the number.
•
. You can use the following wildcards within the
telephone number:
?
Wildcard substitution for a single telephone
number digit, for example:
41486??98
Teke/ec
8-41
09/27/91
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
.*
Wildcard substitution for the remaining digits
of the telephone number. For example, the
following triggers on any telephone number
with the first three digits 414:
414*
•
OPT
A maximum of 16 telephone numbers can be
entered in a triggering file.
. This option allows you to trigger on 1TR7 SS#7 ISUP
optional message parameters. Selecting this option
elicits a prompt for hex strings representing the optional
parameters to trigger on. This string of hex digits should
contain:
1.
The name of the optional part (1 octet): 2 hex digits
2.
The length of the optional part (1 octet): 2 hex
digits
3.
The contents of the optional part ( up to 9 octets):
up to 18 hex digits. .
For example:
OPT =080121
:;
1111
Contents
. Note:
OPT TRIGGER cannot be executed unless the
following file is in the Chameleon directory:
A:\Tekelec\setup\trigger\O PT. DEF.
This file contains the values of all message-types of
frames having an optional part. It also contains the
corresponding offsets of the pointer to the first optional
part. If you try to execute OPT TRIGGER without first
having loaded the OPT.DEF file, the following error
message is given:
Can't open OPT.DEF
Variable
Take/ec
This option allows you to compare an integer variable with another
integer variable or a constant. If you press this softkey, you will be
asked to select an integer variable ($7, $8, $9). You will then be
prompted for a logical operator (> -, < =, ==, >, <). You should then
select either another integer variable or a constant for comparison
with the first integer variable previously chosen.
09/27191
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Leads
This option allows you to trigger on the state or change of a specific
interface lead. When you press Leads, you are prompted for DCE
or DTE lead mnemonics shown in Figures 8.16 and 8.17 below.
Mnemonic
Name
CCITT
EIA Ref.
RS232 Pin
CTS
Clear to Send
CS/CS
DSR
Data Set Ready
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
RI
Ring Indicator
106
107
109
125
CElIC
5
6
.8
22
CC/DM
CF/RR
Figure 8.16: DeE Interface Leads
Mnemonic
RTS
DTR
Name
CCITT
EIA Ref.
RS232 Pin
Request to Send
Data Terminal Ready
105
108.2
CAIRS
CD/FR
4
20
Figure 8.17: DTE Interface Leads
After selecting a lead, you are prompted for the condition:
High
Low
ToHigh
To Low
Port
Tekelec
Triggers whenever the lead is high. High =Space
(driven).
Low =Mark
Triggers whenever the lead is low.
(undriven).
Triggers if the lead changes from low to high.
Triggers if the lead changes from high to low.
On a Dual Port machine, you can trigger on frames from either Port
A or Port S. If you do not indicate a preference, the Chameleon will
trigger from both ports. On a Single Port machine, the Port option
does not appear.
09/27/91
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
ACTIONS
Any combination of up to four trigger ACTIONS can be set to take
effect when all CONDITIONS selected for a trigger are true. More
than one trigger can access the same ACTION(s).
Note:
Triggers are checked in the order they were entered, and operate
on every event. For a trigger ACTION to take effect, all
CONDITIONS selected for that trigger must be true.
The ACTIONS will be displayed in the field that follows the word do
on the Trigger page. The Cancel key will remove previously
specified ACTIONS when the trigger editor cursor is on the
ACTIONS field. Canee/erases one condition at a time, starting with
the bottom condition.
All triggers are first evaluated to see if their CONDITIONS are true.
If all the conditions of a trigger are true, the trigger ACTIONS take
effect in order.
The Triggering language allows you to specify up to four ACTIONS
for each trigger: The softkey options are:
Arm
Alters the status of a trigger during run-time.
Enter the
four-character trigger name (for example, trigger ABCD), 'and
press . (Trigger ABeD is displayed in the ACTION
field). Then, select how it should be ARMed (1stTime, Disable, or
Whenever). For example, if you select Whenever, Whenever
ABCD will replace Trigger ABCD in the ACTION field.
Stats
(Statistics) You are given a choice between Process, Print, and
Reset. The Process option marks frames that satisfy the trigger
CONDITIONS. The Statistics application will only keep track of the
frames which cause the trigger to fire. The Print option forces the
Statistics program to print the Statistics screen, and the Reset
option resets the Statistics page to zero.
Stat Process, Stat Print, OR Stat Reset will be displayed in the
ACTION field for these options.
Display
When this Action is selected, Display will appear in the ACTION
field. This Action determines which data is displayed in the Real
Time and History pages.
In the Real Time page, only data meeting the triggering conditions
will be displayed.
Teke/ee
8-44
09/27/91
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's' Guide
In the History page, there are two DISPLAY options:
•
In normal mode, data which meets the triggering conditions is
shown in low intensity color. All other data is shown in high
intensity color.
•
In trigger mode, only data which meets the triggering
conditions is displayed in the History page. All other data is
suppressed from the display.
The triggering DISPLAY mode is controlled from the History page
using two comman~s:
•
:normal
Selects normal display mode. This is the default
mode.
•
:trigger
Selects trigger display mode.
When using these commands, you must include the colon (:) as part
of the command to invoke the command line. See Chapter 4 for
more information about the History page.
=>Disk
Marks frames that satisfy the trigger CONDITIONS so that they will
be recorded to the Direct-To-Disk area of the hard disk.
"Direct=>Disk" will be displayed in the ACTION field.
Note:
When' analyzing data from disk, this key is 'Not Active' (N/A).
,Pressing it elicits the error message:
"->DISK option is not valid when data source is DISK."
Mesg
Displays the message "Trigger Fired" and beeps, indicating that·
the trigger CONDITIONS have been met. This message ~i11 be
displayed on the Run time page. The words "Display Message"
will be displayed in the ACTION field.
.
StopAcq
(Stop Acquisition) Stops the acquisition of traffic from the line. A
variable number of frames may be captured after the trigger frame
by specifying, in decimal, the number to be captured (up to five
.
digits).
Incent
(Increment Counter) Increments the specified counter by one. For
example, if you specify Counter1 Inc, "Inc (Counter1)" will be
displayed in the ACTION field.
Tekelec
09/27/91
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
'?'"
Triggering
ResCnt
Resets specified counter. For example, if you specify Counter2
Res, "Reset (Counter2)" will be displayed in th~ ACTION field.
Timer
Starts, Stops, or resumes a specified timer. For example, if you
specify that Timer3 should stop, "Stop (Timer3)" will be displayed
in the ACTION field. Start resets itto 0, and resume continues from
where it was stopped.
SetVars
When you select SetVars option, there are three different kinds of
actions which can be performed. Triggering variables are used to
store sections of incoming frames for comparison with later frames.
There are nine variables in all, divided into three distinct types: byte,
bit, and int. Depending on which type you choose, you can store a
string of complete bytes, store a string of bits, or convert a number of
bits in to an integer.
Keys F1-F3 store a string of entire bytes. After pressing one of
these keys, you are asked at which byte of the frame you would like
to begin storage. Select a number and press return. Then enter a
number 1-32 to designate how many bytes should be stored.
.
Keys F4-F6 store a string of bits. After pressing one of these keys
you are asked at which byte of the frame you would like to begin
storage. After entering a number and pressing return, you are
asked at which bit within the designated byte you would like to begin
storag~. Enter a number between 1 and 8 and then press return
again. Finally, enter a number between 1 and 256 to deSignate how
many bits should be stored. You are allowed to store up to 256 bits.
Keys F7-F9 are used when you would like to convert a certain
number of bits (1-9) into an integer for use as an index. After
pressing one of these softkeys you are asked at which byte of the
frame to begin storage, then at which bit within the byte to begin
storage, and, finally, for how -many bits (1-9) ·storage should be
continued. Once you enter the final number, the bits are converted
to an integer for use as an index.
.
V Arith
This option allows you to change the value of one of the integer
variables ($7-$9). To do this, select one of the variables and then
select a variable or a constant to use to modify the first variable. You
have the option of adding, multiplying, subtracting, or dividing (+, x,
-, DIV, MOD) another variable or constant. Select the option 'Done'
if you do not wish to use any operation.
TrigOut
This option, when chosen, sets the Chameleon to trigger to trigger
an external device upon detecting an event. The external device
can be an oscilloscope, logic analyzer, or other Chameleon.- For
further details, see Example 4: Triggering an External Device.
Tekelec
09127191
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Run Time Triggering Page
When you have completed building or modifying your trigger. press
Go to run it. You can press Go to start a trigger whenever the Press
Go to Run message is displayed in the upper right corner of the
Triggering Editor screen. This starts the trigger and displays the
Run Time Triggering page shown below.
Acquisition is stopped while you are in the Triggering Editor. This
allows you to, go back and forth from the Triggering Editor to
'Triggering Run Time. You can use Run/Stop to continue
acquisition.
The Run Time Triggering page (see Figure 8.18) displays the status
of a maximum of 20 triggers.
Note:
-Q-------------------ffi:::Tttggedn9;:,··1
RUN TIME TRIGGERING
Real Time Clock: 00:00:00
Counterl.
Prey:
Curr:
0
Counter3
Counter4
o
o
o
o
o
0
"TImer1
Prey:
Curr:
Counier2
o
"TImer2
00000:000:000
ooOOO:QOO:OOO
"TImer4
"TImer3
00000:000:000
00000:000:000
00000:000:000
00000:000:000
000000:000:000
000000:000 :000
TRIGGERS STATUS:
t
Exit
Figure 8.18: Run-TIme Triggering Page.
The fields of the Run Time Triggering page are:
Teke/.ec
Real Time Clock:
Displays the time of day.
Prey: and Curr:
Curr keeps track of the current counter and
timer. When either are reset, Prev displays
the old value of the counter or timer for later
review..
8-47
09/27191
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Timer
•
Timer keeps track of time in the following
format:
sssss:mmm:uuu,
where
s=seconds.
m=milliseconds,
and
u=microseconds. This field is based on the
time stamps from the events.
TRIGGERS STATUS Displays the status of the trigger it is
currently checking. The display will be
blue if the conditions are being
checked ~nd green if it is disabled.
The fields are:
•
•
•
Trigger status:
+ = Enabled (first time)
- = Disabled
• =- Whenever
Trigger name
Number of times the trigger
conditions have been met.
Messages
The following messages can be displayed during Run Time:
Note:
Teke/ec
•
No more active triggers
In Run Time, all the triggers were disabled.
•
Waiting on acquisition
The Chameleon is waiting for new frames to
arrive.
•
Data overwritten
The data currently displayed has been
overwritten by new data in the data buffer.
To avouid this message, do one of three
things: run at a lower speed, run off-line, or
reduce the number of triggers in your
triggering program.
•
Trigger fired
The trigger conditions have been met.
A message is displayed until it is no longer valid.
09/27/91
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Programming
Examples
The following examples show how to program a trigger for a specific
application. Remember, because the Chameleon looks at trigger
CONDITIONS as constraints, and checks them in the order you
specified them, the first CONDITION you specify within each trigger
should be the CONDITION you think is the least likely to be
satisfied. This will minimize the time the Chameleon spends
checking subsequent CONDITIONS.
Example 1: Displaying Frames with same Call Reference.
Assuming that you are monitoring an ISDN line, you want to tell the
Chameleon to capture the Call Reference value when the first
SETUP message type is seen and to display all subsequent frames
with that Call Reference value (see Figure 8.19).
r-of-------------------fB·)Irigg~rtr1g~ 1\
TRIGGERING EDITOR
NAME
SET
STATUS
ACTIONS
CONDITIONS
1st Tame
0.931: SETUP
do
$7=Frm{6,5,4]
$4=Frm{7,2,7]
Whenever LEN2
Whenever DABL
~-----------------------------------------------------------LEN2
Disabled. $7 == 2
do
$4=Frm{7,2,l5]
DABL
Disabled
do
Disable LEN2
~-----------------------------------------------------------DSPL
Whenever
CI-Af Val: $4
~----------------.---.-------------
Enter String
do
Display
.. --.--- .. -........ ------(cr) to terminate
\ I Arm I Stats IDlspla~ =>DISkl
Mes;
I Stop Iincent I Ree"t I TImer I Clear I
J
Figure 8.19: Programming Example 1 - Display Frames with Same Call Reference.
Note:
Tekelec
Only three triggers can actually be seen at a time on the screen.
Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll up or down to display
additional triggers.
.
8-49
09/27/91
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Triggering
The SET trigger will search for a frame with the message type
SETUP. Once it finds this frame, the Call Reference length will be
stored in the integer variable $7. (The call reference length is coded
in the frame as 4 bits, starting at bit 5 in the 6th byte.) The Call
Reference value is stored in the variable $4. (Assume that the Call
Reference is of length 1, in which case it is 7 bits, starting at bit 2
in the 7th byte.) Triggers LEN2 and DASL are then enabled. The
SET trigger will only fire once, since its status is 1st Time.
Condition in the SET trigger. Protocol: 0.931: MsgType: Setup
Actions used in the SET trigger:
SetVars. Arm
The LEN2 trigger will look at the Call Reference length stored in the
integer variable $7. If the length equals 2, the Call Reference value
is stored in the variable $4. (The Call Reference value is 15 bits,
starting at bit 2, in the 7th byte.)
Condition used in the LEN2 trigger:
Action used in the LEN2 trigger:
The DASL trigger disables the LEN2 trigger.
Action used in the DABL trigger:
Variabl: canst
SetVars
Arm
The DSPL trigger will search for frames with a Call Reference value
equal to the value stored in the variable $4. Such frames will then
be displayed by Real Time.
Condition used in the DSPL trigger:
Protocol: 0.931: CallRef
A9tion used in the DSPL trigger:
Display
Tekelec
8-50
09/27/91
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Triggering
Example 2: Displaying ALERT Frames
Assuming that you are monitoring an ISDN line, you want to tell the
Chameleon to display 'all frames with message type ALERT, and
with the first information element after the call reference not equal
to hex 18 (see Figure 8.20).
TRIGGERING EDITOR
NAME
ALRT
STATUS
CONDITIONS
Whenever
ACTIONS
Q.931: ALERT
do
$7.Frm[6,5,4]
$7-$7+8
Whenever DSPL
Whenever DSBL
DSPL
Disabled
IFrBin($7].."'OOO11 000
do
Display
-------------------------~---------------------------------DSBL
Disabled
do Disable DSPL
I. __________ , _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
\r
Arm
I Stats·1 Displa~ =>DISkl
Mesg
l Stop IlncCntlRecntJ TImed ClearJ J
Figure 8.20: Programming Example 2 - Alert Display
The ALERT trigger will search for a frame with the message type
ALERT. Once it finds this frame, the call reference length will be
stored into the integer variable $7. (The call reference length is
coded in the frame as 4 bits, starting at bit 5 in the 6th byte.) The
number 8 will be added to the length in the integer variable $7 so
that $7 will contain the offset in the frame of the first byte after the
message type. The triggers DSPL and DSBL will then be enabfed.
Condition used in- the ALRT trigger:
Action used in the ALRT trigger:
Protocol: Q.931 MsgType
SetVars, V Arith, Arm
The DSPl trigger will check to see if the octet at the offset of $7
equals 00011000 (hex 18). If the offset does NOT equal hex 18, the
frame is displayed.
.
Condition used in the DSPL trigger:
Action used in the DSPL trigger:
Tekelec
8-51
Not Frame
Display
09/27191
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
The DSBl trigger disables the DSPl trigger
Arm
Action used in the DSBL trigger:
Example 3: Storing Defined Address Messages
Figure 8.21 illustrates a trigger for SS#7 CCITT TUP, which stores
to disk any address message containing the called number
(address signal) 818-880-5656 with the DPC (Destination Point
Code) 02-012-01. Because trigger conditions are logically
ANDed, the address message must have the specified DPC and
address Signal in order to be stored to disk.
I'
r ---{J------------------tf;ntttggerfng
TRIGGERING EDITOR
NAME
DPC
STATUS
CONDITIONS
Whenever
,DPC -
ACTIONS
2 012 1
do
Direct-=>Disk
Add Sig-= 8188805656
\ I Ann I stats·1 Displa~ =>olskl
Mesg
I Stop JInccntl ReCnt I TtmerL Clear J
J
Figure 8.21: CCITT TUP Sample Trigger
The sequence of keystrokes necessary to build this trigger is listed
below.
CONDITIONS
Tekelec
F8 Protocol
For the first condition, this displays the menu of
protocol options.
F8CTTUP
Selects the SS#7 CCITT Telephone User Part
menu.
8-52
09/27191
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F10PC
Selects the TUP OPC option.
Specifies the OPC value on which to trigger.
Enter: 2 012 1
Fa Protocol
For the second condition, this displays the menu
of protocol options.
Fa CTTUP
Selects the SS#7 CCITr Telephone User Part
menu.
F5 Add Sig
Selects the TUP Address Signal option.
Specifies the address signal value on which to
trigger.
Enter: 8188805656
ACTIONS
Selects the Oirect-to-Oisk action if the specified
conditions are met.
F4 =>Disk
Example 4: Triggering an External Device.
Figure 8.22 illustrates the setup for triggering an external device.
When you implement such a setup, any defined event detected by
the Chameleon will be reported to an external device connected to
the Chameleon at the RS232 (AUX 2) port. Figures 8.23 and 8.24
illustrate certain physical characteristics of the TrigOut action.
t2ff.n~:ger.lri~~;·1 \
1-0
TRIGGERING EDITOR
NAME
STATUS
TRG1
CONDITIONS
..
ACTIONS
Whenever
do
Trigger out
_._---------------------------------------------------------
The arrow points to the field which you are currently editing.
Use the softkeys to edit this field, or move the arrow to
any field by using the arrow keys on the keyboard.
\
I
(SetVarsf: V Arfth TrigOut
I·
I
t.
f
I
:
t
'.
(."
IJ
Figure 8.22: A Basic TrigOut (Trigger External Device) Setup.
Tekelec
8-53
\
09/27/91
Triggering
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
The external device may be an oscilloscope, logic analyzer, or
some other instrument for registering the occurrence of an event.
When the Chameleon detects a triggering event, a pulse is
transmitted to the external device over signal line 5 of the AUX 2
port, as shown in Figure 8.23.
R5-232 connection from the
Chameleon AUX2 Serial Port
R5-232 connection to
external device.
Pln#
Pin #
f'5\- _____________________ Q
External triggering
signal line: \:./
Ground:
\V
0----------------------0
Figure 8.23: R5-232 Pinouts for Triggering to External Device.
Regardless of the nature of the event detected and being reported,
the testing Chameleon generates a pulse of 6 microseconds in
width. Figure 8.24 illustrates this pulse pattern and width.
R5-232 High slgnal-......
R5-232 Low signal
.
..
6 J1sec. pulsewidth
(approximate)
Figure 8.24: TrlgOut Pulse Pattern.
Tekelec
09/27/91
· CHAPTER NINE:
UTILITIES·
Introdu eti 0 n
This section describes the Chameleon 32 Utilities Menu options.
The Utilities Menu options are:
Tekelec
F1
Remote I/O Port Setup (Page 9-3)
Configures the Remote I/O port so that the Chameleon 32 can
be remotely controlled from an asynchronous terminal,
Chameleon 20, or other Chameleon 32.
F2
Printer Setup (Page 9-9)
Configures a Chameleon 32 printer port to output to a serial or
parallel printer.
F3
Set Date and Time (Page 9-12)
Sets the Chameleon 32 system time and date.
F4
Traffic Load/Save (Page 9-13)
Saves Direct-To-Disk or Acquisition buffer traffic to a file.
Loads a traffic file for Monitoring.
F5
645/705 Analysis Conversion (Page 9-16)
Converts traffic saved on-disk over a V-type interface by
Hard Engineering models 645 and 705 testers to a format
compatible with the Chameleon 32 and Chameleon 20.
F6
Check Free Disk Space (Page 9-20)
Displays the number of bytes available on the hard disk or a
floppy disk.
F7
Kermit'Connect Mode Setup (Page 9-21)
Configures the Chameleon 32 Aux Serial Port 2 for Kerm it File
Transfer.
F8
Backup/Restore Menu (Page 9-26)
Backs up and restore user files or Direct-to-disk data larger
than 700 kbytes on .the Chameleon hard disk.
F9
FMS ,File Conversion (Page 9-29)
Converts files created with the Chameleon 32, Release 2.6.1
and ea.r1ier, to the Chameleon 32 MS-DOS file format used
with Software Releases 3.x and 4.x.
9-1
09/27/91
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Menu Access'
The Utilities menu is available at any time during operation of the
Chameleon 32. To access the Utilities Menu. do the following:
1.
Press Shift Utilities. The Utilities banner appears in several
seconds (in yellow) at the bottom of the Chameleon 32
screen.
2.
Use the Select key to make the Utifities page active. You can
then display the page (Figure 9.1 below), and use its function
keys, as described on the following pages.
--0
[:YtIJtilitles/
Utilities Menu
F1
F2
Printer Setup
F3
Set Date and lime
F4
Traffic Load/Save
F5
6451705 Data Conversion
Check Free Disk Space
Kermit/Connect Mode Setup
Backup/Restore Menu
FMS File Conversion
F6
F7
Fa
F9
'1
Ft
t
F2
F3
Remote I/O Port Setup
F4
F5
F6
F7
I
Fa
F9
Exit
Figure 9.1: Utilities Menu
Tekelec
9-2
09/27191
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
- - o - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i [ · . U t i I i U e s.•.·1
Terminal Setup Menu
Compatible Terminat Type
VT100
9600
Baud Rate
Number of Data Bits
8
Number of Stop Bits
1
Parity
None
Configuration Files
None
+-
After making selections Press GO
Exit
Figure 9.2: Terminal Setup Menu
Compatible Terminal Type
This selects the type of device that is connected to the Remote I/O
Port to control the Chameleon. The options are:
F1 VT100
F2 CHAM32 (for Chameleon .32 or Chameleon 20)
Baud Rate
This specifies the baud rate required by the device connected to the
Remote I/O Port. The options are in bits per second:
.
F1300
F2600
F31200
Tekelec
F42400
F54800
F69600
09/27191
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Number of Data Bits
This specifies the number of data bits required by the device
connected to the Remote VO Port. The options are:
F15
F26
F37
F48
Number of StOD Bits
This specifies the number of stop bits required by the device
connected to the Remote VO Port. The options are:
F11
F21.5
F32
Parity
This parameter allows you to specify the parity that will be used for
error checking on the Remote VO Port. The options are:
F1 None
F20dd
F3 Even
Configuration files
This option allows you to load or save a setup file. The default path
for terminal setup files is:
A:\TEKElEC\SETUP\UTllITy\
The function key options are:
F1 None This indicates that you want to use the parameters as
shown, and do not want to load a setup file, or save the
displayed parameters.
Press Go to set up the
Chameleon 32 using the displayed parameters.
F2Load This loads an existing setup file. When you press F2
Load, the default file TERMINAL OF is displayed. If you
want to load a file other than TERMINAL.OF, use the
delete key to erase it, and enter the file name you want.
When the name is correct, press Go to load the file and
perform the setup.
Tekelec
09/27191
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F3 Save
Utilities
This saves the displayed parameters to a file. When you
press F3 Save, the default file name TERMINAL.OF is
displayed. If you want to use a name other than
TERMINAL.OF, use the delete key to erase it, and enter
the file name you want. When the name is correct, press
Go to save the file and perform the setup.
Remote Terminal Keyboard
Figure 9.3 shows the Chameleon 32 keyboard. The keys in
parentheses indicate which keys you have to press on a remote
terminal to emulate the Chameleon 32 keyboard.
1= (Taba] I~~[;::]~~~~~ 6]E]
I=~abb]
I~~)II=
~ 1=*(TabC]
(Tab (Tab
~g
1=-1fabdl
[;]~~
E;J
[!J
1=-(TabO]
:
AX
I
Ay
,
~
f)
S
~
l!
tW' . . ,
!aO~
lQOe _ .
"~ _(I ~
l'IOII: OM! ..De; 'IU &0,. 11011......11 'On .U 'OOI!II 90e 9O1!' 906 IWU 'U. "!lOS 'VOt'
*"'lIO&I
~oc
9(6'
1106: /fie!! 'OO1t lIOl!I Joe
en IIU. "'06
!=
;D6 ~
w.
h)
~
,•>~
~
>
~
§
~
~
~
,~
§
I
~
~
~
:l
~
~~~e ~=~ 906~
Figure 9.3: Chameleon 32 Keyboard Emulation
To cause a remote terminal to perform the same functions as the
Chameleon 32, you use three keys:
.
Teke/eo
Clrl
' The caret symbol (") indicates the Control key. For
example, to execute the Cancel key function, type,
"X.(Ctrl+X)
Tab
The use of the Tab key is indicated by the word Tab. To
use the Tab key, press the Tab key, release it, and then
press the other key. For example, to perform the Files
key function, press Tab, release it, and then press b.
Shift
The Shift key works the same way on a remote terminal
as it does on the Chameleon 32. Pressing the Shift key
with the other Tab or Ctrl key combinations, executes
the upper function on the key. ForexampJe, Tab,
Shift-d is the same as pressing Shift Replace on the
Chameleon 32.
.
9-7
09/27191
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
You can refresh the screen on a remote terminal by pressing the Tab
key twice.
Figure , 9.4 shows the HEX codes for a remote terminal keyboard.
To emulate the
Chameleon key:
On the host,
use:
Hex
Code
To emulate the
Chameleon key:
Tab 1
Tab 2
Tab 3
Tab 4
0981
0982
0983
0984
0985
0986
0987
F8
F9
FlO
Cancel
Go
Move"
Print Page
Print Scm
Hide Page
Show Page
Tab 5
Tab 6
Tab 7
Tab 8
Tab 9
Tab Ctrt J
Ctrt X
Ctrt Y
Tabe
Tab. A
Tab a
TabC
Tabc
Shift i
Tab Ctrt L
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
On the host,
use:
Hex
Code
Scroll"
Move
Scroll
Tabg
Tabf
Tabh
0967
0966
0968
Left Arrow
Up Arrow
Right Arrow
Down Arrow
Ctrt H
Ctrt J
Ctrt L
Ctrt K
Tab 0
Tabd
Tabb
08
Ob
Oc
Oa
0944
0964
0942
0963
Utilities
Run/Stop
Space bar
ESCape
Return
Help
Delete
TabS
Tab 0
Space bar
ESCape
Return
Ctrt w
Delete
0962
0980
20
lb
Cd
17
7f
090C
Shift .J.
Tab Ctri N
090E
0988
0989
098a
18
19
0965
0941
0961
0943 .
Replace
Seled
Files
,
Figure 9.4: Keyboard Hex Values
Teke/ec
09/27/91
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F2 Printer Setup
To configure the Chameleon 32 for your printer, press F2
Printer Setup in the Utilities menu. This displays the Printer
Setup Menu as shown ·in the figure below. You can connect a
serial or parallel printer to the Chameleon 32 for printing
screens, program code, program results, and statistics
reports.
If you are using a parallel printer, connect the print~r cable to
the Chameleon 32 Parallel Printer port. The Parallel Printer
port is compatible with standard IBM PC compatible printers.
If you are using a serial printer, connect the printer cable to
the Chameleon 32 Serial Printer port. The Serial Printer port is
a standard DCE interface.
Refer to Chapter 2: Hardware and Installation, for a
description of the Chameleon 32 ports. Refer to Appendix C
for a description of the pinouts.
Printer Setup Menu
Printer Type
Parallel
Configuration Files
None
After making selections Press
f-
GO
Printer Setup Menu
The Printer Setup Menu parameters are a/ways loaded from
.the system default file PRtNTER.DF. The default path is
-A:\TEKELEC\SETUP\UTILITY\.
On power up, this file is
automatically loaded, and the printer port set up according to
its parameter values. .
TEKELEC
9-9
7/5"89
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
You also have the ability to save additional printer setups in
named files using the .Configuration Files option described
below.
Printer Type
This parameter identifies the type of printer you are using. The
options are:
F1 Parallel
F2 Serial
If you select F2 Serial, these additional printer parameters are
displayed:
Baud Rate
Number of Data Bits
Number of Stop Bits
Parity
Configuration Files
These parameters are identical to the options on the -Terminal
Setup Menu, which are described on pages 9-5 and 9-6.
Configuration Files
.
,
,
~
This option allows you to load or save a setup file. The default
path for terminal setup files is A:\TEKELEC\SETUP\UTIUTY\ .
The options are:
F1 None This indicates that you want to use the parameters
as shown, and do not want to load a setup file, or
save the displayed parameters. Press Go to set up
the Chameleon 32 using the displayed parameters.
F2 Load This loads an existing setup file. When you press F2
Load, the default file PRINTEROF is displayed. If
you want to load a file other than PRINTEROF, use
the delete key to erase it and enter the file name you
want. When the name is correct, press Go to load
the file and perform the setup.
F3 Save This saves the displayed parameters to a file. When
you press F3 Save, the default file name
PRINTEROF is displayed. If you want to use a name
other than PRINTEROF, use the delete key to erase
it, and enter the file name you want. When the name
is correct, press Go to save the file and perform the
setup.
TEKELEC
9·10
7'5/89
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Figure 9.5 below lists the commands and keys available for
printing with the Chameleon 32.
KEY/COMMAND
APPLICATION
All applications
RESULT
Print Scrn key
Prints the current screen
Print Page key
Prints the active page.
History
Ctrl P
Displays print menu to print a userdefined range of events.
X.25 Statistics
F3 Print key
Prints an X.25 statistical report
SNA Statistics
F3 Print key
Prints an SNA statistical report
BSC Statistics
F2 Print key
Prints a
ISDN Statistics
F5 Print key
Prints an ISDN statistical report
SS#7 Statistics
F1 Print key
Prints an SS#7 statistical report
BASIC Simulators
LFILES command
Prints ·file directory
LFLIST command
Prints current function key
assignments
LLIST command
Prints the program in memory
LMLIST command
Prints the mnemonic table in memory
LPRINT command
Prints text
LTPRINT command
Prints the contents of the trace buffer
LDISPT command
Prints timer values in decimal
LDISPC command
Prints counters in hex
LDISPV command
Prints variable values
LDISPX command
Prints numeric variables in hex
LDISPM command
Prints length and contents of
message buffer
LLiST command
Prints the scenario in memory
LPRINT command
Prints text
>.PRT
Redirects output to the printer from
the shell (.PRT must be in upper case
letters)
Aux Serial Port 2 Ubrary
Redirects output to the Aux 2 serial
port. (See the Chameleon 32 C
Manual, Chapter 5.7 for more
information. )
esc statistical report
I
SITREX
C Development
System
Triggering
ACTION
= STATS PRINT
Prints a statistics report when userdefined conditions are met.
Figure 9.5,: Print Commands and Keys
TEKELEC
9-11
7/5/89
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F3 Set Date and Time
The Chameleon 32 Real-time clock is backed up by battery.
You should not have to reset the time after your initial setup.
When you press the F3 softkey, the Set Date and Time Menu
is displayed. (See Figure 9.6 below.)
Set Date and Time Menu
Feb 01 1989
13:30:00
Figure 9.6: Set Date and Time Menu
Date
To set the date, press F1 Date, enter the date in the format
MM-DD-YYVY, and press Return. For example to set the date
to February 1, 1989, enter:
02-01-1989
Note
or
2-1-1989
The year does not automatically increment on January 1 st.
You must manually update the year each January using this
option.
Time
To set the time, press F2 Time, enter the time in the format
HH:MM:SS, and press Return.
Entering the seconds is
optional. The time uses the 24-hour clock. For example to
set the time to 1 :30 p.m., enter:
13: 30: 00
TEKELEC
9-12
or
13: 30
7/5/89
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F4 Traffic Load/Save
This option enables you to save Direct-to-Disk and acquisition
buffer data to files. It also enables you to load a file which
contains Direct-to-Disk or acquistion buffer data. Refer to
Chapter 6: Direct-to-Disk for a complete description of the
Direct-to-Disk application.
When you press F4, the Traffic Operations Menu is displayed.
(See Figure 9.7 below.)
Traffic Operations Menu
'Save
Operation
+-
File Name
Data Source
Direct-to-Disk
Percentage
100
Data Size
a K bytes
After making selections Press GO
Figure 9.7: Traffic Operations Menu
Operation
This parameter allows you to select the traffic operation. The
options are:
F1 Save This option enables you to save either Direct-to-Disk
or acquisition buffer traffic. Once saved, these files
can be loaded and used as the data source for
Monitoring applications.
You 'cannot save Direct-to-Disk data while the Directto-Disk or Direct-trom-Disk applications are running.
TEKELEC
9-13
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Utilities
You can save the acquisition buffer to a file while
Direct-trom-Disk is running, but the applications
stops temporarily, while the buffer is being saved.
The applications starts again automatically when the
save operation is complete.
To save the acquisition buffer to a file while Directto-Disk is running, you must stop acquisition by
pressing Run/Stop. When the save operation is
'complete, press Run/Stop to resume acquisition.
F2 Load The F2 Load option enables you to load an existing
direct-to-disk or acquisition buffer file from disk.
Once loaded the traffic in the file can be used as the
data source for Analysis. You must have previously
used the save option to save traffic to disk before it
can be loaded with this option.
File Name
This parameter specifies the name of the direct-to-disk or
acquisition buffer file that you want to save or load. Refer to
the Chapter 10: File Management for a description of valid file
names.
Data Source
If you select Save as the Operation, this parameter specifies
the type of traffic you want to save. The options are:
TEKELEC
F1 DrD
You want to save the Direct-to-Disk data. This is
traffic that is stored to the Direct-to-Disk portion of
the hard disk. Refer to Chapter 6: Direct-to-Disk
for more information.
F2 Buffer
You want to save the acquisition buffer. If not
saved to a tile, this is traffic that is volatile, and will
be lo.st when the Chameleon 32 is reset or
applications are restarted.
9-14
7/5/89
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Percentage
If you are saving Direct-to-Disk data, this parameter enables you
to specify the percentage of the Direct-to-Disk area that you want
to save. The Direct-to-Oisk area of the hard disk is 10 Mbytes in
size.
For example, to save the most recent 50% of the Direct-to-Disk
data, you would enter 50 and press Return. To save the most
recently acquired traffic, you must save 100% of the Direct-to-Disk
data
If you are saving data to a floppy disk, the maximum you can save
is 700 kbytes of data (approximately 7% of the Direct-to-Disk
area). If you want to save more than this amount to floppy disks,
you must use the FB Backup option in the Utility menu.
Data Size
If you are saving Direct-to-Disk data, this parameter displays the
number of kbytes of data being saved from the Direct-to-Oisk area
to the file.
/
Teke/ec
9-15
09/27191
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F5 645/705 Data Conversion
This utility converts data saved to disk on Hard Engineering tester
models 645 and 705 to a format compatible with the Chameleon 32
and Chameleon 20 testers. The procedures given here do not deal
with installation of the software, which procedure is given in the
documentation accompanying your software package.
The data on your 6451705 disk can be analyzed either as it is being
converted, after it has been converted or, after it has been
converted and saved.
Limitations
This conversion utility has the following limitations:
•
It operates only on traffic data acquired over a V-type
interface.
•
Data conversion begins on the first complete event on the
starting track and ends with the last complete event on the
ending track. Therefore, if an event overlaps tracks, it could
be lost in the conversion process. To prevent this from
happening when converting large blocks, it is best to break
such blocks down into smaller segments and start the
conversion of each segment with the same track as the last
one ended on. For example, if you are converting the data on
tracks 3 through 48 (a total of 45 tracks), c6nvertthe block in
three segments of 15 tracks each, each successive segment
beginning on the last track of the preceding segment: '3
through 18; 18 through 33; 33 through 48.
•
To avoid overwritinQ events in cases where you are analyzing
the data as it is belngc:onverted, conversion is limited to 48
tracks at a time.
•
If you are going to save converted data, do so before
beginning any other conversion or Direct-to-Oisk operations.
Converted data remains on disk until another conversion or
direct-to-disk operation is performed, at which time it is
overwritten. Resetting your Chameleon, or turning it off and
on, will not erase or otherwise corrupt converted, on-disk
data
•
If the file being converted is largar than the Direct-to-Disk
operation can accommodate, your Chameleon will hang up.
. I f the file name you enter for your converted data already
exists, data conversion will proceed, but you will be given an
error message when the Chameleon tries to save the data.
Begin data conversion again, using a different file name.
Teke/ec
9-16
09/27191
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Data Conversion Procedure
To convert the data to a Chameleon format:
1.
Press F5 6451705 Data Conversion.
2.
Insert the 645/705 data disk into the Chameleon floppy drive
and press Return.
The 6451705 Data Conversion menu appears (Figure 9.9).
--Q--------------------fFlJtiUties:
64saos Data Conversion
Data Type (60p/Async)
:6 . :10
Starting Track
Ending Track
58 MAX
: 12
All data OK? y
Number of events
500
I
I: . ·1
Figure 9.9: 6451705 Data Conversion Menu
3.
In the Data Conversion menu, enter the parameters
appropriate for the data you want to convert:
a.
Data Type:
B •. bit-<>riented protocol
A =- Asynchronous
c.
Staljing Track:
Designates the starting point of the data you are
converting. Enter a number in the range of 0 to 79, but
not greater than the number entered for the Ending
Track.
.
Teke/ec
9-17
09/27/91
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Utilities
d.
Ending Track:
Designates the end point of the data you are converting.
Enter a number equal to or greater than that entered for
the Starting Track up to the maximum number indicated
to the right of ENDING TRACK. The maximum number
of tracks that can be converted at anyone time is 49. All
79 tracks can be converted in two passes.
e.
All data OK?
A No cancels the parameters entered and allows you to
re-enter them correctly, or to cancel the conversion
operation at this point.
A Yes to this prompt confirms that all parameters
entered are correct.
Data conversion begins immediately upon entering this
response and the number of events read and converted
is displayed on the Number of Events line .
. Data Anal ysis
Converted data is handled as if it were received from an outside
soiJrce with the Direct-to-Disk application running. As noted
earlier, this provides three means of analyzing the 645/705 data:
•
•
While conversion is in process
After the data has been converted and saved to the
Chameleon TekeleC/Data/02D directory
•
By playing the data back through analysis after saving the
Direct-to-Disk captured data in a file.
Each of these means is explained below.
Analysis During Conversion
Analysis of data during conversion is begun prior to starting the
conversion operation. As this entails using the Direct-to-Disk
application, it is suggested that you first read Chapter 6:
Direct-to-Disk and page 9-131.
Note:
Tekelec
Since the Data Conversion uitility is emulating Direet-to-Oisk. DO
NOT select the Direct-to-Disk application for storing the converted
data.
9-18
09/27/91
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Utilities
1.
In the Traffic Operations Menu (see F4 Traffic Load/Save,
page ,9-13), select Line as the Data Source.
2.
Proceed with the conversion operation as explained on the
preceding page. The converted data will be displayed in the
analysis windows as if it were being received 'live' over an
external line.
Analysis After Conversion
1.
In the Traffic Operations Menu (see F4 Traffic Load/Save,
page 9-13), select Disk as the Data Source.
2.
Proceed with the conversion operation as explained on the
preceding page.· The converted data will be displayed in the
analysis windows as if it had been captured by the
Direct-to-Oisk function.
Analysis After Saving to Direct-To-Disk
1.
Do the conversion operation as explained on the preceding
page.
2.
Press F4 Traffic Load/Save.
3.
In the Traffic Operations Menu,
a.
b.
Tekelec
For Operation, select Save.
For File Name, enter the name of the file in which the
data is to be saved.
4.
Press GO.
5.
Return to the Operation parameter and select Load.
6.
At Data Source, select Disk.
7.
Press GO. The saved and loaded data is now analyzed.
9-19 .
09/27191
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F6 Check Free Disk Space
This option displays the number of bytes available on the hard disk
or a floppy disk. When you press F6 Check Free Disk Space, the
Check Free Disk Menu is displayed as shown in Figure 9.10 below.
Check Free Disk Menu
Disk Drive
"
"
"
Hard-Oisk . . . .
After making selections, press GO
f
Exit
Figure 9.10: Check Free Disk Menu'
Disk Drive
This parameter enables you to select the disk you want to check.
The options are:
F1 Hard
To check the free disk space on the hard disk, press F1
Hard, and then press Go. The following message is
displayed:
Free Disk Memory Space =xxxx K Bytes
F2 FloppyTo check the free disk space on a floppy disk, press F2
Floppy, insert the floppy disk into the floppy drive, and
press Go. The following message is displayed:
Free Disk Memory Space =xxx K Bytes
Tekelec
9-20
09/27/91
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F7 Kerrt:1itlConnect Mode Setup
Two Modes
The Chameleon operates in two modes with a host computer. For
both modes, Aux Serial Port 2 is used for the physical connection
to the Chameleon 32. This requires the use of a special cable which
can be purchased as an option from Tekelec (Part Number
932-5001-01) or can be made as shown in Appendix M.
The two operating modes are:
•
Data Transfer
Use Kermit to transmit and receive files from
a host computer that is using a compatible
file transfer protocol.
•
Connect Mode Use your Chameleon as a host terminal and
employing the Connect page.
Data Transfer
In Data Transfer mode, Kermit automatically uses 8 data bits with
no parity. Even if you use the Kermit menu to change these
parameters, when Kermit is invoked, the data bits and parity setting
are changed to 8 and none, respectively. The host computer Kermit
program must also be configured for 8 data bits and no parity.
There are additional Data Transfer parameters that you can
configure using this menu. For example, you must select the type
of file you are transferring. Once you have set up the Chameleon
32 using this menu, you use the File Management menu to
establish a connection with the host computer and perform the file
transfer. Refer to Chapter 10: File Management, for information
about file transfer procedures.
Connect Mode
In Connect mode, the Chameleon 32 Aux Serial Port 2 is configured
to the settings in the Kermit menu. The parameters must be
compatible with your host for terminal emulation. Refer to Chapter
10: File Management, F9 Connect/Disconnect for information
about the Connect window.
Tekelec
~21
09127/91
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Default Setup File
When you access the Kermit Setup menu, it loads and displays the
default setup file KERMIT.OF. The default path is:
A:\TEKELEC\SETUP\UTILJTy\
You can also save and load additional Kermit setups in named files
using this option. When you press F7 Kermit Connect Mode
Setup, a configuration menu is displayed (Figure 9.11 below).
(/ .•. tJtitities< . .
--a
I
Kermit/Connect Mode Setup
Baud Rate
9600
Number of Data Bits
8
-+-
Number of Stop Bits
Parity
None
File Type
Binary
Number of Retransmissions
6
Transmission Interval
3_Sec
Configuration Files
None
After making selections Press GO
110
300
11200
I 2400 I 4800. I 9600 119200 I
EXit
Figure 9.11: Kermit Connect Mode Setup Menu
Baud Rate
This parameter allows you to specify· the baud rate (in bits per·
second) that the Chameleon 32 will use to transmit or receive a file.
The baud rate on the other computer must be set to the same as
the Chameleon 32. The options are:
F1110
F2300
F31200
F42400
Teke/ec
F54800
F69600
F719200
9-22
09/27191
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Number of Data Bits
. This parameter specifies the number of data bits for each character
being transmitted or received. For Connect mode, the data bits
setting on the host computer must be the same as the Chameleon
32. For Data Transfer mode, the Data Bits are automatically set to
8, regardless of the value you set in this menu~ The options are:
F15
F37
F26
F48
Number of Stop Bits
This parameter specifies the number of stop bits between
characters being transmitted or received. The stop bits setting on
the host computer must be the same as the Chameleon 32. The
options are:
F11
F21.S
F32
Parity
This parameter specifies the parity setting. Parity is used to detect
errors during file transfer. For Connect mode, the parity setting on
the host computer must be the same as the Chameleon 32. For
Data Transfer mode, the Parity ·is automatically set to None,
regardless of the value you set in this menu. The options are:
F1 None
F20dd
F3 Even
File Type
This parameter allows you to specify the type of file being
transmitted or received. For Data Transfer mode, this must be set
correctly. You cannot transfer Binary and Text files together. The
options are:
F1 Binary
F2 Text
Teke/ec
9-23
09/27191
Utilities
Chameleon 3.2 User's Guide
Number of Retransmissions
In Data Transfer mode, if an error is detected, a packet will be
retransmitted. This parameter specifies the total number of times
a data packet will be transmitted. If the packet has not been
received correctly following the number of configured
retransmissions, the file transfer is aborted.
The options are:
F1
F2
1
2
F3
3
F4
4
F5
5
F6
6
F7
Fa
7
a
More
F9
F1
F2
9
10
Transmission Interval
This parameter specifies the time interval between each
retransmission of a data packet. The options are:
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Fa
F9
1 Sec
2Sec
3Sec
4Sec
5Sec
6 Sec
7Sec
aSec
More
F1
F2
9 Sec
10Sec
The data transfer timeout is the Number of Retransmissions
multiplied by the Transmission Interval. Therefore the maximum
timeout is:
.
.
10 (retransmissions) x.10 seconds (interval) =- 100·seconqs
Taka/ec
09127191
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Utilities
Configuration Files
This option allows you to load or save a Kermit setup file. The
default path for terminal setup files is:
A:\TEKELEC\SETUP\UTlLlTY\
The options are:
F1 None This indicates that you want to use the parameters as
shown; you do not want to load a setup file, nor save the
displayed parameters.
Press Go to set up the
Chameleon using the displayed parameters.
F2 Load This loads an existing setup file. When you press F2
Load, the default file name KERMIT. OF is displayed. If
you want to load a file other than KERMIT.OF, use the
delete key to erase it and enter the file name you want.
When the name is correct, press Go to load the file and
perform the setup.
F3 Save
Teke/ee
This saves the displayed parameters to a file. When you
press F3 Save, the default file name KERMIT.OF is
displayed. If you want to use a name other than
KERMIT.OF, use the delete key to erase it and enter the
file name you want. When the name is correct, press Go
to save the file and perform the setup.
9-25
09/27/91
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F8 Backup/Restore Menu
This utility allows you to back up the hard disk to floppy disks and
restore the hard disk from floppy disks. You can do the following:
Notes
•
Back up/restore the entire hard disk to/from floppy disks
(excluding the Direct-to-Disk and bootable system areas)
•
Backup/restore the Direct-to-Disk area of the hard disk.
•
Back up/restore a large file to/from a floppy disk. If the file fits
on a single floppy disk (700 kbytes or less), use the Copy File
option in the File Management menu. If the file is larger than
700 kbytes, you must use this Backup option to make a floppy
backup copy.
While a backup or restore operation is in progress, do not change
the current directory using the File Management menu.
When the Backup option is used, the files on the backup floppy
cannot be accessed unless they are first restored to the hard disk.
When you press F8 Backup/Restore Menu, the Backup Menu is
displayed (Figure 9.12).
-o-----------------f(;:u• ·.Ufilitles.:.ir!
Backup Menu
Operation
Backup
Source
Hard_Disk
After making selections Press GO
I
I
I Exit
Figure 9.12: Backup Menu
Tekelec
9-26
09/27/91
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Operation
This parameter enables you to select
.
a~:
th~
operation. The options
F1 Backup This option makes a backup copy of the item selected in
the Source parameter. The backup procedure formats
the floppy as it copies; therefore, any data that is on the
floppy disk will be erased during the backup.
F2 Restore This option restores files to the hard disk that have been
backed up to a floppy disk. Refer to the additional notes
below about restoring Direct-to-Disk data.
Source
This parameter specifies what portion of the hard disk you want to
back up or restore. The options are:
F1 Harddsk Backs up/restores the entire hard disk, except the
Direct-to-Disk and bootable system areas. When you
restore the hard disk, all files on the hard disk are erased
(excluding the Direct-to-Disk and bootable system
areas).
F2DTD
Backs up/restores the Direct-To-Disk area of the hard
disk. When you restore the Direct-to-Disk area of the
hard disk, the current data in the Direct-to-Disk area is
erased. See the additional notes provided below.
F3 File
Backs up/restores a single file. When you select this
option, you are prompted for a file name.
If you are backing up a file, enter the path and name of
the file you want to copy from the hard disk.
If you are restoring a file, enter the path and name of the
file you are restoring. If you do not enter the
destination path when restoring a file, the file is
restored to the root directory of the hard disk.
When the path and file name are entered, press Go to
begin the procedure. You are then prompted for the first
disk to back up or restore. Insert the disk and press
Return to continue the selected procedure.
Tekelec
9-27
.
09/27/91
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Restoring Directta-Disk Data
Beginning with System Software Release 4.10, the Chameleon 32
may have the standard 2Q-.Mbyte hard disk drive or an optional
4O-Mbyte hard disk drive. The 2O-Mbyte hard disk stores up to 10
Mbytes of Direct-ta-Disk data, while the 4O-Mbyte option stores up
to 3O-Mbytes of Direct-ta-Disk data. The following guidelines
apply to backing up and restoring files between 4O-Mbyte and
2Q-Mbyte hard disk drives.
If data was backed up from a 2O-Mbyte hard disk drive, it can be
restored to either a 2O-Mbyte or 4O-Mbyte hard disk drive.
If data was backed up from a 4O-Mbyte hard disk, it can be restored
to either a 2O-Mbyte or 4O-Mbyte hard disk drive on a Chameleon
with System Software Release 4. 10 or later. It cannot be restored
to a Chameleon with System Software prior to Release 4.10.
A Direct-to-Disk file larger than 10 Mbytes cannot be fully restored
to a 2Q-Mbyte hard disk having only 10 Mbytes available for
direct-to-disk storage. When restoring a file larger than 10 Mbytes
to a 2O-Mbyte drive, use the following procedure:
1.
Start the Restore procedure, inserting each backup disk in
sequence as prompted on the screen.
2~·
When the Direct-to-Oisk area of the hard disk is full, the
restore procedure pauses and a message is displayed which
provides you with several options.
3.
Once the Restore procedure pauses, you can press one of
keys described below, or you can replay and analyze the data
that has been restored up to that point, and then press one of
the keys.
C
If you press C, the restore procedure will continue and
the data that has just been restored to disk will be
overwritten as additional data is restored.
T
If you press T, you will temporarily exit the Restore
menu and return to the Utilities menu. When you select
FB Backup/Restore, you are returned to the Restore
menu to continue the back up that you temporarily
interrupted.
F10 If you press F10, you will exit the Restore menu and
return to the Utilities menu.
If you select FB
Backup/Restore, you start a new restore; you cannot
continue the previous restore .
•
Note
Teke/eo
. The direct-from-disk data from two or more 1O-megabyte restores
is not treated contiguously. This means, for example, that you
cannot run Statistics and accumulate statistical data for more than
1O-megabytes of direct-irom-disk dcda at a time.
9-28
09/27191
Utilities
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F9 FMS File Conversion
FMS File Conversion converts Chameleon 32 files from Release
2.6.1 and earlier software (FMS operating system) to a format
compatible with Release 3.0 and later. This enables you to convert
your old user files to the new format, so that you can use them with
the new Chameleon 32 operating system.
FMS File conversion copies files from a floppy in the old format to
the appropriate directory of the hard disk of a Chameleon 32
running the new operating system. After converting your files, you
can copy them to an Ms-DOS formatted diskette using the File
Management menu.
Note
You cannot convert files while Monitoring applications are running
on the Chameleon 32.
To convert files to the new format:
1.
Insert the diskette containing the files you want to convert
(Release 2.6.1 or earlier) into the floppy drive.
2.
Access the Utilities page and press F9 FMS File Conversion.
This displays a file directory of the floppy disk and displays the
following softkeyoptions:
F1 Dlr
This option lists the files on the floppy disk. It
enables you to select the files you want to convert.
F2 Convert This option converts selected files to the new
format.
F3 Full Cv
3.
Note
Teke/ec
This option automatically converts all files on the
floppy disk (up to 80 files maximum) to the new
format.
If you want to convert all files to the new format, press F3 Full
Cv. As each file is converted, the file name and file type are
displayed at the top of the screen. Once F3 Full Cv process is
started, you cannot abort the operation unless you reset the
Chameleon 32.
.
This operation converts a maximum of 80 files from the floppy disk.
If you attempt to convert more than 80 files, you will get the error
message Too Many.Files.
.
9-29
09/27191
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Utilities
4.
To convert selected files, use the List Selector to select one or
more files. (To use the List Selector, use the arrow keys to
move the red arrow cursor to the desired file and press the
space barto highlight the name in red. Select as many files as
desired. If a file is selected in error, press the space bar again
to remove the red highlight.)
Once all desired files are selected, press F2 Convert. As
each file is converted, the file name and file type are displayed
at the top of the screen.
5.
Teke/ec
If you want to copy files from another diskette, insert the
diskette in the floppy drive and press F1 Dirto display the file
directory of the floppy. Then use F2 Convertor F3 Full Cvas
described above.
9-30
09/27/91
CHAPTER TEN:
FILE MANAG.EMENT
Introduction
This section describes the features and usage of the
Chameleon File Management menu. The File Management
menu options are:
F1 Chdir (Page 10-8)
Changes the current disk directory.
F2 Copy (Page 10-10)
Copies selected files to the hard disk or a floppy disk.
F3 Delete (Page 10-12)
Deletes files from the the hard dIsk or a floppy disk.
F4 Rename (Page 10-13)
Renames the selected files.
F5 Format (Page 10-14)
Formats floppy diskette.
F6 Disk Copy (Page 10-15)
Copies the entire contents of a floppy disk to another
floppy disk.
F7 Transmit File (Page 10-16)
Transmits files to a host computer.
Fa Receive File (Page 10-19)
Receives files from a host computer.
F9 Connect (Page 10-21)
Establish a communications connection between the
Chameleon and a host computer for file transfer or host
terminal emulation.
TEKELEC
7'5/89
Chameleon 32 User's Guide .
File Management
File and Directory Structure
Files
Chameleon files are compatible with MS-DOS 2.x and 3.x
format. File names must adhere to these conventions:
•
•
•
•
•
File names are 1 - 8 characters in length
Optional 1 - 3 character file extension
Optional drive specification of A: (hard disk drive) or 8:
(floppy disk drive)
File name and file extension separated by a period (.)
Acceptable file name and path characters are:
A-Z
a-z
0-9
\
Hard Disk Directories
The Chameleon hard disk has a number of directories that
contain the system files it needs for each application. When
you create user files (programs, history files, traffic files, etc.)
these are also stored in specific directories so that they can
be located as needed by an application. Chameleon file
extensions are listed in Figure 10.2 on page 10-4 and 10-5.
The Chameleon hard' disk has the directory structure shown in
F!gure 10.1. The root directory can contain a maximum of 140
files. The other directories can contain a maximum of 600
files.
These are the only directories necessary for operating the
Chameleon in Monitoring and Simulation mode; therefore, you
do not have the ability to create or delete directories from the
. hard disk.
If the optional C Development System package is installed on
your Chameleon 32, you will also have these directories: \BIN,
\INCLUDE, \UB, and \USA. You also have the ability to create
Refer to the
additional directories using the C shell.
Chameleon 32 C Manual, for a description of these directories.
Floppv Disk Directories
If you save traffic or copy files to a floppy disk, the file is
always copied into the root directory of the floppy disk (unless
When
you copy an entire directory to a floppy disk).
accessing a floppy disk for an application, the Chameleon
searches only the root directory. Therefore all user files
should be in the root directory of a floppy disk.
A maximum of 112 files are permitted in the root directory of a
floppy disk.
TEKELEC
10-2
T5/89
File Management
Chameleorr32 User's Guide
I
ROOT DIRECTORY (\)
J
I TEKELEC I
I
I ANALYSIS I
SIMUL
I
(Simulation
System Files)
DATA
I
I
I
MAN
SYSTEM
UTIL
I
(User Program
S~stem
iles
System
Files
I
Direct-to-Disk
Files
I
HIST
History Files
Files)
I
MENU
UTILITY
TRIGGER
Menu
Config Files
Utilit
Config ~iles
Tri~Rering
les
BISYNC
-
ASYNC
I--
BISYNC
H
APPL
(Non protocol-specific Analysis Flies)
I--
ISDN
r--
ASYNC
I--
DMI
f--
BISYNC
I--
SNA
r--
SS7
'--
X25
-
t--
'--
SHDLC
SNA
-
Protocol-specific Analysis Flies
(Files used based on the protocol
selection in the main configuration
menu.)
SLAPD
-
t--
-
I--
V120
'--
DDCMP
SSDLC
SIMplL
SDLC Files
I--
SIMP/L V120
Files
X75
SITREX
SIT REX Files
I--
X25
FLAPD
FRAMEM
LAPO Files
SIMP/L
LAPD Files
S57
FBOP
FRAMEM
HOLC'SOLC
Files
SIMP/L
HDLC Files
ISDN
QllC
r--
ASYNC
Async Files
FRAMEM
DMI Files
DPNSS
PSH
-
SSC Files
FDMI
t-- .DPNSS
I
SIMULATE
Help Flies
D2D
I
I
SETUP
FKEY
Function Key
Files
Figure 10.1: Chameleon 32 Hard Disk Directory Structure
TEKELEC
10-3
7/5 /89
File Management
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
File Extensions
Figure 10.2 (below and continued on page 10-5) lists the file
name extensions used by the Chameleon.
These file
extensions are automatically assigned to files and should not
be changed. These files must reside in the directories shown
in order for the application to be able to locate the file.
Some files are not assigned extensions automatically.
In
these cases, you can specify an extension when you enter the
file name, if desired. These files include History print files,
traffic files, and C files. If you specify a file name extension for
these files, you must include the extension as part of the file
name when you access the file.
File extension
Hard Disk Directory
File Type
C LIBRARY
\LIB
FRAMEM SOLC/HOLC SETUP MENU
\TEKELEC\SIMULATE\FBOP
SYSTEM FILE
\TEKELEC\ANALYSIS
.BA
SITREX PROGRAM
\TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\SITREX
.CB
FRAMEM SOLC/HOLC PROGRAM
\TEKELEC\SIMULATE\FBOP
.CF
FRAMEM SOLC/HOLC DATA
\TEKELEC\SIMULAT8FBOP.
.CG
FRAMEM SOLC/HOLC MNEMONIC
TABLE
\TEKELEC\SIMULATE\FBOP
.CO
SYSTEM FILE
\TEKELEC\SYSTEM
.OB
SIMP/L SOLC PROGRAM
\TEKELEC\sIMULA TE\SSOLC
.OE
SIMP/L SOLC SETUP MENU
\TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\SSOLC
.OF
SIMP/L SOLC DATA
\TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\SSOLC
.OG
SIMP/L SOLC MNEMONIC TABLE
\TEKELEC\SIMULATE\SSOLC
.EB
SIMP/L HOLC PROGRAM
\TEKELEC\SIMULA TEISHOLC
.EE
SIMP/L HOLC SETUP MENU
\TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\SHDLC
.EF
SIMP/L HOLC DATA
\T6KELEC\SIMULA TE\SHDLC
.EG
SIMP/L HOLC MNEMONIC TABLE
\TEKELEC\SIMULATE\SHOLC
.FE
SITREX SETUP MENU
\TEKELEC\sIMULATE\SITREX
.GB
SIMP/L V.120 PROGRAM
\TEKELEC\SIMULATEW120
.A
.AE
.AOU·
Figure 10.2: Chameleon File Name Extensions
TEKELEC
10-4
7/5'89
File Management
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
File Extension
Hard Disk Directory
File Type
C HEADER FILE
\INCLUDE
.HB
BISYNC SIMULATION PROGRAM
BSC EXERCISER FILE
\TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\BISYNC
.HF
BISYNC BASIC OATA FILE
\TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\BISYNC
.HE
BISYNC BASIC SETUP MENU
\TEKELEC\SIMULATE\BISYNC
.HG
BISYNC BASIC MNEMONIC TABLE
\TEKELEC\SIMULATE\BISYNC
.IB
ASYNC BASIC PROGRAM
\TEKELECISIMULA TE\ASYNC
.IE
ASYNC BASIC SETUP MENU
\TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\ASYNC
.IF
ASYNC BASIC DATA
\TEKELECISIMULA TE\ASYNC
.IG
ASYNC BASIC MNEMONIC TABLE
\TEKELEC\SIMULATE\ASYNC
.JB
FRAMEM DMI PROGRAM
\TEKELEC\SIMULATE\FDMI
.JF
FRAMEM DMI DATA
\TEKELEC\SIMULATE\FDMI
.JG
FRAMEM DMI MNEMONIC TABLE
\TEKELECISIMULA TE\FDMI
.KE
SIMULATION FUNCTION KEY FILE
\TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\FKEYS
.LB
FRAMEM LAPD PROGRAM
\TEKELEC\SIMULATE\FLAPD
.LE
FRAMEM LAPD SETUP MENU
\TEKELEC\SIMULATE\FLAPD
.LF
FRAMEM LAPD DATA
\TEKELEC\SIMULATE\FLAPD
.LG
FRAMEM LAPD MNEMONIC TABLE
\TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\FLAPD
ON-LINE HELP
\TEKELEC\MAN
.MB
SIMP/L LAPD PROGRAM
SIMP/L MULTi-LINK LAPD PROGRAM
\TEKELEC\SIMULA TE ,SLAPD
.ME
SIMP/L LAPD SETUP MENU
ITEKELECISIMULATE\sLAPD
.MF
SIMP/L LAPD DATA
\TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\SLAPD
.MG
SIMP/L LAPD MNEMONIC TABLE
\TEKELEC\SIMULA TE\SLAPD
.SU
SYSTEM FILES
\TEKELEC\sETUP\MENU
.SYS
SYSTEM FILES
\TEKELEC\UTIL
.TR
TRIGGER FILE
\TEKELEC\sETUP\TRIGGER
.H
.MAN
Figure 10.2 (continued): Chameleon File Name Extensions
TEKELEC
10-5
75;89
File Management
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
C Applications
C application programs compiled on the Chameleon 32 can be
started from the Applications Selection menu, if the executable
C file conforms to the following:
•
•
The file has the extension .exe.
The file is copied to one of the directories below (xxxx is
one of the subdirectories shown in Figure1 0.1):
a:\tekelec\analysis\xxxx
a:tekelec\simul
The directory determines when the application will be
displayed in the Applications Selection menu. For example, if
the application resides in a:\tekelec\analysis\appl, the
application is displayed in the Monitoring window for a/l
protocols. If the application resides in a:\tekelec\analysis\X2S,
the application is displayed in the Monitoring window only
when X.2S is the selected protocol. If the application resides
in a:tekelec\simul, the application appears in the Simulation
window for all protocols.
Menu Access
File Management is available at any time during operation of
the Chameleon by pressing the Files key, which is located on
the left side of the keyboard.
This causes the File
Management banner to appear at the bottom of the screen.
You can then select the page (Figure 10.3) and use its
function keys, as described on the following pages.
Current Directory: A:\
... BIN
INCLUDE
LIB
LOGIN
TUELEC
USR
(D)
(D)
(D)
(D)
(D)
Figure 10.3: File Management Menu (with optional C package installed)
TEKELEC
10-6
7'5/89
File Management
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
List Selector
For many of the File Man?gement options, you can select several
files or sub-directories for a single operation. (However, for
F1Chdir, Dir., and F4Rename you can select only one directory or
file at a time.) For example, you can select three files, and then copy
all three by pressing F2 Copy one time. This feature is referred to
as the List Selector.
- The List Selector is available for the following operations:
•
•
•
•
•
Chdir
Copy
Delete
Rename
TX File
To use the List Selector:
NOTE:
1.
Use the arrow keys to move the red arrow cursor to the first file
or directory you want to select.
2.
Press the space bar to highlight your selection.
3.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select other directories/files.
To de-select a directory or file, move the red arrow cursor to the
file or directory you want to de-select. Press the space bar. The
red highlight disappears.
4.
Press the F-key corresponding to the operation you wish to
execute. For example, press F2 Copy to copy the selected
file(s).
This feature can also be used to change directories.
NOTE:
1.
Select the desired directory and press the space bar to
highlight it. You can only select one directory at a time.
(Directories are identified by a following the directory
label.)
2.
Press F1 Chdir.
If you highlight .. and press F1 Chdir, it changes to the parent of
the current directory.
View File(s)
Once you have opened a directory via F1 Chdi', you can view any
ASCII file using CTRL V. This applies to ASCII files only, not to
directories or binary files. For details, see page 10-9.
Teke/ec
10-7
09/27/91
Fite Management
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F1 Chdir
Change Directory
F1 changes the current directory listed at the top of the screen. File
names and sub-directories are displayed in the current directory.
A <0> following the file· name identifies a sub-directory. For
example, if TEKELEC is the current directory, the screen displays:
Current directory: A:\TEKELEc\
cO>
cO>
ANALYSIS
cO>
DATA
SIMULATE
cO>
SYSTEM
MAN
cO>
SETUP
cO>
TMP
cO>
UTIL
cO>
cD>
Only the files and sub-directories in the current (TEKELEC) directory
are listed. Before using the List Selector (copy, delete, transmit,
etc.), use the i and .I. keys and the space bar to select the directory
containing the files you want to work with, then press F1 Chdir to
open that directory.
. 11 the current directory contains more than 60 files, Page x is
displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. To display the next
directory page, press Shift i. To display the previous directory
page, press Shift .I..
.
When using F1 Chdir you can specify the directory you want by
entering the name manually, or by using the List Selector.
To enter the name manually:
1.
Press F1 Chdir. The following message is displayed:
Please enter path name:
2.
Enter the path to the directory that you want to open, and
press Return. For example, to select the ANALYSIS
sub-directory on drive A, enter:
A:\TEKELEC\ANALYSIS
You only have to specify the drive name (A: or B:) if you want to
change disk drives.
To change to the root directory, use the back slash (\). For example:
Please enter path name: A:\
To change to the parent directory of the current directory, use two
dots ( .•). For example,
Please enter path name:..
Tekelec
10-8
09/27191
File Management
Chameleon ;32 User's Guide
Ctrl D
Re-Display
The directory listing shown on the. previous page illustrates the
default display format. By pressing Ctr:1 D, you can re-display all
files in alphabetical order along with the time, date, and size of each
file. For example, the file display shown on the previous page would
be re-displayed as follows:
Current directory: A:\TEKELEc\
ANALYSIS
DATA
MAN
SETUP
SIMULATE
SYSTEM
TMP
UTIL
<0>
.<0>
<0>
<0>
<0>
<0>
<0>
<0>
<0>
<0>
01-19-1989
01-19-1989
07-22-1989
07-22-1989
07-22-1989
06-15-1989
04-12-1990
08-22-1989
11-17-1988
12-12-1988
00:02:36
00:02:36
10:16:00
10:16:00
10:16:00
13:43:55
09:12:23
10:15:15
15:22:07
09:33:44
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Only 15 files are displayed at one time. The size of listed directories
is always shown as 0 bytes. Use Shift i or Shift J. to move to the
previous or next page, respectively.
To return to the default directory format, press Clrl D again.
View File(s)
Once you have opened a directory via F1 Chdir, you can view one
or more ASCII file (and only ASCII files) using CTRL V.
To view an ASCII file:
1.
.2.
Open the directory containing the desired file .
Select the file(s) to be viewed. (If more than one file is to be
selected, see· List Selector, page 10-7.)
3.
Press CTRL-V. The text of the file(s) is displayed. Keys F1
through F5 take on the following functions:
F1 MORE
Scrolls down 1 page of current file.
F2 NEXT
Returns to files list or to start of next file
F3 PREV
Jumps to start of previous file; or current one if only
one file open ..
F4 RESTART Jumps
F5 QUIT
Teke/eo
to start of current file.
Quits to directory.
10-9
09/27/91
.
File Management
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F2 Copy
Copy Files
The Copy option copies one or more selected files from the current
directory to a specified target location. To copy files, perform the
following steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
.':.
,
If necessary, use F1 Chdir to change to the directory that
contains the files you want to copy.
Use the List Selector to select one or more files or directories
to copy..(To use the List Selector, use the arrows keys to move
the red arrow cursor to the desired file and then press the
space barto highlight the file in red. Press the space bar again
to unselect the file.)
After· all files have been selected, press F2 Copy. The
following message appears on the screen:
.Copy to:
If you are copying files, enter the directory or filename to copy
the fife to. For example, to copy the selected files to the
TEKELEC directory on the A: drive, enter:
':
Copy to: \TEKELEC\ or
Copy to: \TEKELEC
To copy a selected file to the current directory using a new
filename (for example, TESTS.TXT) enter:
Copy to: TESTS.TXT
If you copy multiple files, you can copy them to a directory in a
single operation. If you do this AND specify a new filename,
the following occurs:
•
The first file is copied using the new filename.
•
The Chameleon attempts to copy the second file to the
same filename, recognizes that the file already exists,
and displays the message:
overwrite file (y\n) ?
If you press y, the first copy is overwritten by the second file
copy. If you press n, the copy operation for the second file is
aborted. If additional files were selected to copy, the overwrite
file message is displayed for each existing file.
Take/ec
10-10
09/27/91
File Management
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
To copy one directory into another directory, use the
following syntax for the Copy to path:
Copy to:
B:\dira
where: dira is the name of the directory you are copying
to. The directory you are copying becomes a
subdirectory of the directory it is being copied to.
To copy all the files from a given directory (but not the
directory itself) to another directory, use the List Selector
to select the files and the syntax:
Copy to:
B:\dira
To copy a file from one floppy disk to another floppy
disk, use the syntax:
Copy to:
z:\filename
The destination z:\ copies the file to a virtual drive, which
can then be copied onto a different diskette. When you
enter z:\ as the destination drive, this message appears:
Direct-to-disk data will be overwritten. Do you still want to
continue? (yIn)
The Chameleon copies the source files to the Direct-toDisk area of the hard disk before it copies them to the
target disk.
If you have direct-to-disk data that you need to keep,
press n to abort the copy procedure, use the Utilities
menu to save the direct-to-disk data to a file, and then
perform the file copy operation.
If you do not have direct-to-disk data, press y to
continue.
The message Reading floppy disk... appears. When
the file has been read into the virtual drive, you are
prompted to insert the target disk with the message:
Please insert floppy disk, and enter RETURN key
Insert the disk that you want the file to be copied on, and
press Return.
Note
You can use ·z: (virtual drive) to copy from the B (floppy)
drive only.
10.
. TEKELEC
When the last copy operation is completed or aborted,
the current directory is displayed with the new file entries .
10-11
7'5/89
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
File Management .
F3 Delete
Delete File
The Delete option deletes one or more files from the current
directory. To delete files, perform the following steps:
1.
If necessary, use F1 Chdir to change to the directory
that contains the files you want to delete.
2.
Use the List Selector to select one or more files or subdirectories to delete. (To use the List Selector, use the
arrows keys to move the red arrow cursor to the desired
file and then press the space bar to highlight the file in
red. Press the space bar a second time to unselect the
file.)
3.
After all files have been selected, press F3 Delete.
4.
For each file, the following question is asked:
Erase mea? (yIn)
To delete the file., press y. To abort the deletion of that
file, press n.
5.
TEKELEC
When all selected files have been deleted, the current
directory is displayed.
File Management
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F4 Rename.
Rename File
The Rename option renames files in the current directory.
You cannot rename sub-directories (entries followed by
<0».
Note
Do not include a path as part of the new file name. If you wish
to rename a file and move it to another directory, first rename
the file, and then use the F2 Copy option.
To rename a file, perform the following steps:
1.
If. necessary, use F1 Chdir to change to the directory
that contains the file you want to rename.
2.
Use the List Selector to select one file name from the
current directory . (To use the List Selector, use the
arrows keys to move the red arrow cursor to the desired
file and then press the space bar to highlight the file in
red. Press the space bar a second time to unselect the
file.)
3.
Press F4 Rename. The following message appears:
Rename to:
4.'
Enter the new filename for the selected file.
For
example, to rename the selected file to CODE 1.TXT,
enter:
Rename to: caDEt. TXT
You can rename only one file at a time. If you select
more than one filename and press F4 Rename, the
following error message appears:
Too many selections
You cannot move a file from one directory to another by
specifying a path as part of the new file name.
TEKELEC
10-13
7/5i89
File Management
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F5 Format
Format Floppy Disk
F5 Format formats the diskette in the floppy drive in MS-DOS
format. It Is not possible to format the hard disk drive
using this option.
Warning!
Formatting erases all data on the floppy diskette. 00 not
format a diskette that contains files you want to keep.
To format a disk, perform the following steps:
1.
Insert the diskette you want to format into the Chameleon
floppy disk drive.
3.
Press F5 Format.
the screen:
The following message appears on
00 you really want to format this disk (yin)?
4.
To abort the format procedure, press n.
To begin the format procedure, press y.
message appears:
The following
Formatting floppy disk to MS-DOS format ...
Formatting
drive light
formatting
directory is
TEKELEC
will take several minutes. The floppy disk
is 'lit during the format procedure. The
procedure is complete when the current
displayed on the Chameleon screen.
10-14
715189
File Management
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F6 Dsk Copy
Disk Copy
This option copies the entire conten~s of a floppy disk onto a
second floppy disk, enabling you to make one or more backup
copies of the entire floppy disk. (To copy a single file from
floppy to floppy, use the z: option for F2 Copy.)
F6 DskCopy does not format the diskette as it makes the
copy. Therefore, you first need to format enough diskettes for
the number of copies you want to make. To use the F6
DskCopy option, follow these steps:
1.
Press F6 Dsk Copy. This message appears:
Please insert the source disk and type < cr >
2.
Insert the disk that you want to copy (source disk) into
the floppy drive and press Return.
3.
The following message appears:
WARNING
This copy will erase the direct to disk
data. Continue? (yin)
The Chameleon copies the source disk files to the
Direct-to-Disk area of the hard disk before it copies it to
the target disk.
If you have direct-to-disk data that you need to keep,
press n to abort the copy procedure, use Utilities menu
F8 Backup to save the Direct-to-Disk data to a file, and
then perform the F6 DskCopy procedure ..
Otherwise, press y to continue with the copy operation
and'the message Reading floppy disk ... appears.
4.
When the floppy has been read, this message appears:
Please insert the destination disk and type < cr >
5.
Insert a blank formatted disk in the floppy drive and
press Return. The following message appears:
Writing floppy disk
6.
When the copy is complete, this message appears:
Do you want to copy this disk again? (yin)
To make additional copies of the same diskette, press y.
When you have made sufficient copies of the disk, press
n and the Disk Utilities menu is displayed.
TEKELEC
10-15
File Management
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
F7 TX File Transmit File
The Transmit File option transmits text or binary files from the
Chameleon to a host computer. The host computer must
have a file transfer protocol that is compatible with the Kermit
protocol.
File transfer operations can be initiated by either the
Chameleon or the host computer.
When entering host
commands, you can enter the commands on a host terminal
OR you can use the Chameleon Connect wIndow to emulate a
host terminal. To use the Chameleon Connect window for
host terminal emulation refer to F9 Connect on page 10-21.
To use the Chameleon file transfer option, follow this
procedure:
1.
Verify that the host has a file transfer utility that is
compatible with the KERMIT protocol.
2.
Connect the host to the Chameleon Aux Serial Port 2
using an RS232 cable. This capability requires the use,
of a special cable which can be purchased as an option
from Tekelec (Part Number 932-5001-01) or c'an be
made as shown in Appendix M.
The Chameleon will act as the DCE.
3.
Note
Use the KermiVConnect Mode Setup menu in the Utilities
page to configure the Chameleon for file transfer. Make
sure that you select the type of file you are going 'to
transfer: Text or Binary.
Kermit automatically sets the Data Bits to 8 and Parity to
None regardless of how these two parameters are
configured in the Kermit'Connect Mode Setup menu.
4.
Call up the host Kermit program. For example, to call up
KERMIT, enter:
KERMIT
and the host will respond:
KERMIT)
. This prompt indicates that the file transfer program has
been loaded on the host and will execute KERMIT
commands.
5.
TEKELEC
On the Chameleon make the File Management page
active.
10-16
9:5:90
File Management
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
6.
If necessary, use F1 Chdir to select the drive and
directory that contains the files you want to transmit to
the host.
7.
Use the List Selector to select one or more files to
transmit. (To use the List Selector, use the arrows keys
to move the red arrow cursor to the desired file and then
press the space bar to highlight the file in red. Press the
space bar a second time to unselect the file.)
Note
You cannot transmit binary and text files at the same
time.
8.
Enter the following command on the host computer:
receive
9.
In the Chameleon File Management menu, press F7 TX
File. This begins the transmission.
10.
As the file is transferred. information is displayed so that
you can monitor the progress of the transmission (Figure
10.4).
+------'"'!------------------4.• .••.•.•
f.il •••• Me~IJt..··.· •. .
Current directory
:
KERMIT: File transfer utility
A:\tekelec
Transfer operat10n
File operation
Sending filex
Reading: filex
Number of bytes: xxx
xx
xx
xx
Ina packets
Open File packets
End of File packets
Data packets
Break packets
Retransmissions
lOl
type ESC key to abort
Figure 10.4: File Transfer Utility (Transmit) Screen
TEKELEC
10·17
File Management
Chameleon 32 User's GUide
11.
When the transfer is complete the screen displays the
message Recept ion OK.
To abort the operation in the middle of the transfer. press
Esc. The message Send fa i 1ed is displayed.
If an error was detected during the file transfer, the
following message appears Se n d fa i 1e d.
If the transfer fails, you can retransmit the file( s) by
pressing F1 Retry.
12.
TEKELEC
When the file transfer has been completed successfully,
. press F10 Exit to return to the File Management menu.
10-18
9/5/90
File Management
Chameleon 32 Use,s Guide
Fa RX File Receive File
The Receive File option enables the Chameleon to receive
text or binary ·files from a host computer. The host computer
must have a file transfer protocol that is compatible with the
Kermit protocol.
File transfer operations can be initiated by either the
ChameleEln or the host computer.
When entering host
commands, you can enter the commands on a host terminal
OR you can use the Chameleon Connect window to emulate a
host terminal. To use the Chameleon Connect window for
host terminal emulation refer to F9 Connect on page 10-21.
To use the Chameleon Receive File option, follow this
procedure:
1.
Verify that the host has a file transfer utility that is
compatible with the KERMIT protocol.
2.
Connect the host to the Chameleon Aux Serial Port 2
using an RS232 cable. This requires the use of a special
cable which can be purchased as an option from T ekelec
(Part' Number 932-5001-01) or can be made as shown in
Appendix M.
The Chameleon will act as the DCE.
3.
Note
Use the Kermit/Connect Mode Setup menu in the Utilities
page to configure the Chameleon for file transfer. Make
sure that you select the type of file you are going to
transfer: Text or Binary.
Kermit automatically sets the Data Bits to 8 and Parity to
None regardless of how you configure these two
parameters in the Kermit/Connect Mode Setup menu.
4.
Call up the host Kermit program. For example, to call up
KERMIT, enter:
KERMIT
and the host will respond:
KERMIT)
This prompt indicates that the file transfer program has
been loaded on the host and will execute KERMIT
commands.
5.
Enter the host command that transmits the files.
example:
send filename. ext
TEKELEC
10-19
For
9590
File Management
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
You can use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard to select more
than one file to transmit. For example, to transmit all files
from the host with the extension .doc, enter:
send •• doc
Note
You cannot transmit binary and text files at the same
time.
6.
Make the File Management page active.
7.
Press F8 RX File.
8.
As the file is transferred, information is displayed so that
you can monitor the transmission (Figure 10.5).
-t----------------------t::::::::::f~'lit:~i.:,::,.·
Current directory
:
KERMIT: File transfer utility
A:\tekelec
Transfer operation
File operation
Receiving filex
Writing file: x
Number of bytes: xxxx
xx
xx
Init packets
Open File packets
End of File packets
Data packets
Break packets
Retransmissions
Xli
1I11
type ESC key to abort.
Figure 10.5: File Transfer Utility (Receive) Screen
9.
When the transfer is complete the screen displays the
message Recept i on OK.
To abort the operation in the middle of the transfer, press
Esc. The message Se n d fa i 1ed is displayed.
If an error was detected during the file transfer, the
following message appears Send fa i 1ed.
If the transfer fails, you can retransmit the file( s) by
pressingF1 Retry.
10.
TEKELEC
When the file transfer has been completed successfully,
press F10 Exit to return to the File Management menu.
10-20
95:90
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
File Management
F9 Connect
The F9 Connect option enables you to use the Chameleon for
terminal emulation. This gives you the ability to control the
host from a remote location. For example, you can use the
Chameleon from a remote location to transfer files between a
host computer and the Chameleon 32.
Using the Connect window, you can also control a Chameleon
32 using a remote Chameleon 32 or 20. Refer to Appendix M
for a description of this procedure.
To use the Chameleon for terminal emulation, perform these
steps:
1.
Connect the host to the Chameleon Aux Serial Port 2
using an RS232 cable.·
This requires the use of a
special cable which can be purchased as an option from
Tekelec (Part Number 932-5001-01) or can be made as
shown in Appendix M.
The Chameleon will act as the DCE.
2.
Use tlie Kermit Connect Mode Setup in the Utilities menu
to configure the Chameleon to be compatible with the
host. See Chapter 9: Utilities for more information.
3.
On the Chameleon 32, make the File Management page
active.
4.
Press F9 Connect. This causes the Chameleon screen
to go blank and behave as a host terminal.
You can now enter host commands. To transfer files
between the Chameleon and the host, refer to pages 1016 to 10-20,
5.
TEKELEC
To exit the Connect window, press Shift Cancel. This
maintains the connection with the host, but enables you
to operate the Chameleon independently of the host.
10-21
CHAPTER ELEVEN:
BERT
Introduction
The Chameleon BERT application provides synchronous or
asynchronous Bit Error-Rate Testing (BERT) for a variety of data
communications systems. With the Chameleon configured as
either a DTE or a DCE, the BERT application transmits a data
stream consisting of a known pattern. One of two operations is then
performed on this data stream:
•
It is looped back at the device under test and analyzed by the
Chameleon; or,
•
It is monitored by the data tester, which then performs the
same analysis.
To accomplish these test scenarios, the Chameleon can:
Note:
Testing
Configuration
Note:
TekeJec
•
Simulate synchronous data rates from 50 Hz to 64 kHz where
the data is selectable from several transmission patterns with
an option for error insertion
•
Simulate standard asynchronous data rates from 50 Hz to
19.2 kHz where the data is selectable from several
transmission patterns with optional error insertion
.
•
Perform single interval or continuous testing
BERT testing is not available for a Basic Rate Interface D-Channel.
This is in keeping with the protocol specification as defined in CCITr
Recommendation 1.430.
Figu~e 11.1 shows the location of the Chameleon within the network
when the Chameleon is simulating and monitoring data. The
remote device on the line must be set up to loop the incoming
informati.on back to the Chameleon. This provides the known
pattern required to completely analyze the incoming Signal.
For a V-type interface, the BERT application presumes that the
DCE provides the clock and the DTE transmits on the received
clock.
11-1
09/27191
BERT.
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
.
',',
Remote DTE
Device
Chameleon emulating
aDCE
.
Remote DCE
Device
Chameleon emulating
aDTE
Agure 11.1: Hardware Configurations
If the Chameleon is not simulating the data stream, but simply
monitoring the output of the device,. you must transmit a known
pattern from the remote device and configure the Chameleon to .
receive that pattern.
Two Chameleons can also be used to test a network. In this
configuration (see Figure 11.2), the two Chameleons are set up
with the same pattern.. The first transmits the information through
the network. It can then be analyzed by the second machine
positioned at the other end of the connection. .
DCE
1----4
1----+
DCE
Figure 11.2: Network Test Configuration
The Signal used for BERT is accessed through the 1/0 modules in
the rear panel of the Chameleon. If your Chameleon has more than
one type of 1/0 module, the physical interface is selectable through
software.
Tekelec
11-2
09/27191
BERT
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Using the BERT
Application
The following summary procedure assumes that your Chameleon
is powered up and booted. To use the BERT application:
1.
At the main configuration menu select. F2 Simu/at as the
Mode of Operation for the port you want to use.
2.
Press the appropriate F-key to select the Physical Interface
for the port you are using.
Note:
If your protocol is ISDN. use F7to set the physical
setup now.
3.
Press F6 Setup to display the Simulation menu.
4.
With the arrow cursor positioned on the Protocol parameter,
press F9 More to display the additional protocol options.
5.
Press F6 BERTto select the BERT option.
6.
Press Go to load your selection( s) and return you to the main
configuration menu.
7.
Press Goto load the main configuration setup and display the
Applications Selection menu.
8.
Press F1 LoadA or F2 LoadBto load the BERT application on
the appropriate port(s}.
9.
Press Go to start the application and display the BERT page
banner at the bottom of the screen.
10.
Press Shift Hide Page to display the full BERT Setup menu
applicable to your chosen protocol (Figures 11.3 through
11.6).
11.
Complete the BERT Setup menu as required by your testing
application. Description of the Setup menu begins on page
11-9.
12.
After completing the Setup menu, press Go. One of the
following screens is displayed:
•
•
If you selected USER for the Pattern parameter in the
Setup menu, the Pattern Editor screen will appear. The
use of the Pattern Editor is described on page 11-13.
If you selected something other than USER for the
Pattern parameter (you will use a standard data
pattern). the first of the BERT run-time displays appear.
The BERT run-time displays are described beginning
..
on page 11-15.
(Procedure continues on next page).
Tekelec
11-3
09/27191
BERT
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
13.
The BERT run-time pages display bit and block error statistics
and. enable you to start and stop testing intervals. When your
entire testing session is complete, press F10 Exit to stop the·
BERT application and return to the Applications Selection
menu.
'.1
,I,
Tekelec
11-4
09127191
BERT
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Setup Menus
There are four BERT setup menus. The first - displayed by
pressing F1 SYNC - is used for defining BERT parameters for
synchronous transmissions. The second - displayed by pressing
F2 ASYNC - is used for defining the BERT parameters for
asynchronous transmissions. The third and fourth are displayed
when their respective ISDN-type interface is selected for Physical
Interface. These menus enable you·to:
•
Configure the Chameleon as a DCE or DTE device
•
Set the Baud rate (all except ISDN)
•
Specify the data pattern which will be used for the test
•
Define a user preamble.
•
Define the data block length
•
Select the type and duration of BERT test
The setup menus for synchronous and ISDN transmission (Figures
11.3, 11.5 and 11.6) allow you to define an error insertion rate, but
do not allow you to define:
•
Data bits
•
Stop bits
•
Parity bits
The asynchronous setup menu (Figure 11.4) allows you to define
data, stop and parity bits, but does not allow you to define an error
insertion rede.
Two ISDN setup menus (Figures 11.5 and 6) allow you to define
Transmit and Receive Channels, and Transmit and Receive lime
Slots, respectively.
.
Figure 11.7.is a summary chart of the parameters available for each
of the protocol types. Each parameter is described beginning on
page 11-9.
To change a parameter:
Teke/ec
1.
Move the cursor to the desired parameter. The options are
displayed in the F-key strip at the bottom of the screen.
2.
Press the F-key corresponding to the desired parameter. In
the ASYNC mode, the Data, StQP and Parity bit settings for the
Chameleon must be the same as those for the
device-under-test.
3.
Press Go to display the first BERT run-time page. For a
description of the three available pages, see page 11-15.
11-5
09/27191
BERT
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
BERT Setup
Press GO to accept
-+ Interface
Framing
SYNC
DCE/DTE
Baud Rate
64000
Pattern
63
Error Insertion Rate
NONE
User Defined Preamble
User Preamble (2 Hex Bytes)
Block length
Mode
Duration of Test
YES/NO
This line is displayed only
0000 .....- - - - - when YES is selected for
01024
User Defined Preamble
REMOTElOOPBACK
00:00:00
.I
Figure 11.3: BERT SYNC Setup Menu
BERT Setup
Press GO to accept
ASVNC
DTE/DCE
"'Framing
Interface
Data Bits
Stop' Bits
Parity
Baud Rate
NONE
Pattern
63
User Defined Preamble
User Preamble (2 Hex Bytes)
Block length
Mode
Duration of Test
NONES
This line is displayed only
0000
when YES is selected for
01024
User Defined Preamble
REMOTE lOOPBACK
00:00:00
.4-----
I
I:
Figure 11.4: The BERT ASYNC Setup Menu
Tekelec
11-6
09/27191
BERT
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
BERT Setup
Press GO to accept
ISDN Interlace. Present
-+ TX
Channel 1-24
TX Time Slot 1-15, 17-31.
RX Channel 1-24
RX TIme Slot 1-15, 17-31
01
01
01
01
Pattern
63
Error Insertion Rate
NONE
User Defined Preamble
User Preamble (2 Hex Bytes)
Block Length
Mode
Duration of Test
YES
This line is displayed only
0000
.....- - - - - when YES is selected for
01024
User Defined Preamble
REMOTE LOOPBACK
The two Channel lines are for ANSI only.
The two Time Slot lines (in boldface type)
are tor CEPT only.
00:00:00
I
Figure 11.5: The BERT Setup Menu for ISDN PRI.
BERT Setup
Press GO to accept
ISDN Interface Present
-+ Pattern
f
63
Error Insertion Rate
NONE
User Defined Preamble
NO
Block Length
Mode
.
Duration of Test
01024
REMOTE LOOPBACK
·. .• f
(
00:00:00
(
l
I
I.
I
I
•
Figure 11.6: The BERT Setup Menu for ISDN 2B1 Q and BRI.
11_7
nq/27/q1
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
BERT
BERT Setup Parameters
Framing
Interface
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Parity
Baud Rate
TXChannel
TXlimeSlot
RX Channel
RXlimeSlot
Pattern
Error Insertion Rate
User-Defined Preamble
User Preamble
Block Lenath
Mode
Duration of Test .
Sync
Async
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
~
X
ANSI PRI CEPT PRI
BRI/2B1 Q
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Figure 11.7: The BERT Setup Parameters for Available Interfaces•
•
Teke/ec
11-8
09/27/91
BERT
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Setup Parameter
Descriptions
Framing
The Framing parameter selects Synchronous or Asynchronous
timing. If you select asynchronous framing, you must also specify
the Data Bits, Stop Bits and Parity, and Baud Rate.
. Interface
The Interface parameter specifies whether the Chameleon will
simulate a DCE or a DTE device. However, see the second NOTE on
page 11-1 regarding V-type interfaces.
Data Bits
In Asynchronous Framing only, the Data Bits parameter specifies
the number of data bits in each byte as 8, 7, 6, or 5. The setting for
this parameter must be the same as that for the remote device.
Stop Bits
In Asynchronous Framing only, the Stop Bits parameter specifies
the number of stop bits being used in each byte of data as 1, 1.5, or
2. The setting for this parameter must be the same as that for the
remote device.
.
Parity
In Asynchronous Framing only, the Parity parameter specifies the
parity setting being used as None, Odd, or Even. The setting forthis
parameter must be the same as that for the remote device.
Baud Rate
The Baud Rate parameter specifies the speed (in bits per second)
that the Chameleon will use to transmit or receive data. This
parameter is displayed only when the Chameleon is configured for
asynchronous framing, or as a DCE using synchronous framing. If
the Chameleon is configured as a DTE using synchronous framing,
the Chameleon will match the received clock.
lx/RX Channels
The Transmit (TX) and Receive (RX) Channels parameters (Figure
11.5) allow yo.u to specify which ANSI Primary Rate Interface
channel the bit stream is to be transmitted and received over. When
working with two Chameleons, or with a port-to-port network in
which one end transmits and the other receives the same bit
stream, the Tx channel must be the same one as the Rx channel.
lx/RX Time Slots
The Transmit (TX) and Receive (RX) Time Slots parameters (Figure
11.5) allow you to specify which CEPT Primary Rate Interface time
slots the bit stream is to be transmitted and received over. When
working with two Chameleons, or with a port-to-port network in
which one end transmits and the other receives the same bit
stream, the Tx time slot must be the same one as the Rx time slot.
Pattern
The Pattern parameter specifies the type of data that the
Chameleon will transmi~ or expect to receive on the line. The
following patterns are available:
•
Tekelec
You can select a bit pattern of 63, 511, 2047, 4095, or 32767
bits in length. The algorithm for each pattern is shown in
.
Figure 11 .8.
11-9
09/27/91
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
BERT
•
Press F6 01010101 to select the pattern 1010101.
•
Press F7 FOX to select the standard FOX message: THE
QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG
1234567890 c R
•
Press F8 USERto define your own pattern of 3 - 200 bytes in
length. See page 11-13 for the procedure for specifying your
own pattern.
511
I
I
r~ 1 12 1314151
2047
§~ 1 121314151617181~ 110Illif
617 I 8191-r
4095
Figure 11.8: BERT Data Pattern Algorithms
Error Insertion Rate In Synchronous Framing only (see Figure 11.3), this parameter sets
the rate at which errors are automatically inserted into the bit
stream. When you set the F4 key, you activate the F8 key of the
Run-Time Menu for turning error insertion on and off. See page
11-17 for details. Keys F2through F7setthe following rates:
Taka/ec
F1 None
There will be no automatic insertion of errors.
F21.04E-2
Errors will be automatically inserted into the bit
stream at the rate of 1040 in every 1oo,qoo bits.
11-10
09/27/91
BERT
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
User-Defined
Preamble
F31.02E-3
Errors will be automatically inserted into the bit
stream at the rate of 102 in every 100,000 bits.
This rate is just above the threshold defining
severely errored seconds from errored seconds.
F41.00E-3
Errors will be automatically inserted into the bit
stream at the rate of 100 in every 100,000 bits.
This is the threshold rate defining errored seconds
from severely errored seconds.
F59.54E-4
Errors will be automatically inserted into the bit
stream at the the rate of 95.4 in every 100,000 bits.
This rate is just below the threshold defining
errored seconds from severely errored seconds.
F61.00E-4
Errors will be automatically inserted into the bit
stream at the the rate of 10 in every 100,000 bits.
F71.00E-5
Errors will be automatically inserted into the bit
stream at the the rate of 1 in every 100,000 bits.
This parameter enables you to enter a 2-byte preamble which may
be required by the remote device in order to synchronize the line.
When you select YES, the User Preamble parameter appears, as
described below.
User Preamble
This parameter appears only when you select Yes for the
User-Defined Preamble. Enter the required 2 hex bytes and press
Return.
Block Length
The Block Length parameter enables you to select the block length
required for your testing application. The block length varies by
standard and may correspond to the pattern length or to a fixed
number of bytes, such as 1000 or 10000. To specify a block length,
enter the number of bits in decimal and press Return. The range is
o-64k bits. .
Mode
The Mode parameter determines the function of the Chameleon
during a test session. There are three options:
F1REMOTE
Teke/ec
is the normal mode of operation, in which the
Chameleon generates and transmits a BERT pattern
and expects the remote device to either
physically/logically return that pattern, or generate its
own pattern. Either method of pattern loopback is
acceptable and will be checked for validity.
11-11
09/27/91
BERT
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Signal transmitted by the
Chameleon to the remote device
REMOTE
DEVICE
C
-...
Sbtal is looped back to the
ameleon and analyzed
for &\TOrs
"
~
Ifml~
.J
I
"
..
I
==all
•.....
~
:~:;:-:
I-
ernl
Figure 11.9.= Signal Path In Remote (Transmit) Mode.
is a logical loopback mode in which the Chameleon
waits for synchronization on an incoming BERT pattern.
It then transmits that pattern back to the remote device.
The Chameleon does a full validity check on the
received pattern. (Figure 11.10).
F2LOCAL
,-R_D~ ~_?_CTE_E- -, ~::: ~
and loops it back to the
remote device
I~.I=J===!I
.,,781
I_
CJ
wi
Figure 11.10: Signal Path in Local (Transmit) Mode.
F3RECEIVE
is the mode in which the Chameleon waits for
synchronization on an incoming BERT pattern and
checks it for validity. The Chameleon does not transmit
a BERT pattern in this mode. (Figure 11.11).
REMOTE
DEVICE
' - -_ _---'
remote
device
to the Chameleon
Signal
transmitted
by the
'1IIImli;~;
III
The Chameleon analyzes the
received signal for &\TOrs but
does not loop signal back to
the remote Clevice.
Figure 11.11: Signal Path In (Local) Receive.
Duration of Test
Tekelec
This parameter determines how long the test will run when in
continuous mode (see F2 Contins on page 11-16). It does not
specify the time at which to start or stop a test, but only indicates test
duration. Enter the test duration in the format hh:mm:ss. A value of
00:00:00 causes the testto run until manually stopped (see F3 Stop
on page 11-16). The maximum duration for a test is 97 hours, 59
minutes, and 59 seconds (97:59:59).
11-12
09/27/91
BERT
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
BERT Pattern Editor
The BERT Pattern Editor (Figure 11.12) enables you to define a
data pattern for the Chameleon to transmit. To use the editor:
1.
Access the BERT Pattern Editor..
a. . In the- BERT Setup menu, select USER for the Pattern
parameter.
b.
When the BERT Setup menu is complete, press Go.
This displays the Pattern Editor.
If the Pattern parameter is other than USER, the BERT
run-time display appears.
Note:
BERT
Press GO To Accept
Pattem Editor
Current Entry Mode is: HEX
Pattem Length is : 00 1
00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000
Change message length by moving cursor to' the last character
desired (maximum message length is 2QO bytes;
minimum message length IS 3 bytes).
I:
HEX
lAsclI
t SAvel lOAD. I
I·.·
I· . . . . .-.,
-,
l
Figure 11.12: BERT Pattern Editor.
2.
Select an Entry Mode.
The data pattern will be shown in hex pattern on tne left and in
ASCII on the right of the editor screen. You can enter data in
either hex or ASCII, by pressing either F1 HEX or F2 ASCII.
The current entry mode (hex or ASCII) is displayed above the
Tekelec
11-13
09/27/91
BERT
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
data and is also indicated by the blinking cursor in the data
entry area.
Note:
In step 3, if you are using asynchronous framing with 5 or fewer
data bits, see the note following step 6.
3.
Enter the pattern.
The pattern must be 3 - 200 bytes in length. The data is
displayed in 10 lines of 20 bytes each. If you enter more than
200 bytes, the cursor will loop back to the top of the data and
begin overwriting the first part of the pattern. The current
pattern length is displayed above the data entry area.
Patterns of
5 or Fewer
Data Bits
4.
When your pattern is complete, position the cursor on the last
byte of the data pattern. The cursor position determines the
last byte of data in the pattern, regardless of the data that is
displayed in the editor screen. This gives you the option of
varying the pattern length while having entered only one
pattern. If you do not move the cursor back one space after
completing the pattern, an extra 00 byte is added to the end of
the transmitted pa~ern.
5. -
If you want to save the pattern to a file for future use, press F3
Save. You will be prompted for a file name. Enter a name of
up to 8 characters and press Return. (The file extension .pat
will automatically be added to the file as it is saved to disk.)
Files which are saved can later be retrieved from the Pattern
Editor using the F4 Load key.
6.
Press Go. This displays the first BERT run-time display as
described on page 1.1-18.
If you are using asynchronous framing with five or fewer data bits,
set the-Setup menu Data Bits parameter to 5 and define the pattern
using the BERT pattern Editor. Your pattern must conform to· the
following binary format:
Bit #
5 data bits
4 data bits
3 data bits
2 data bits
1 data bit
76543210
OOOddddd
1000dddd
11000ddd
111000dd
1111000d
where d represents the data bit(s) being transmitted, followed by
three Os, with the remainder of the byte filled with 1s.
Tekelec
11-14
09/27191
BERT
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
BERT Run-time
Pages
There are three BERT run-time pages for displaying the results of
the Chameleon's analysis of data received on the line. These
pages are illustrated in Figure 11.13 through Figure 11.15.
Each of these pages share certain features. Also, the function keys
for the two BERT run-time pages are identical. These shared
features are described below. The features peculiar to each page
are described in detail following the illustration of the page.
Common Displays
The top three lines of all BERT run-time pages display the same
kinds of non-statistical information.
Elapsed
Seconds
Displays the number of seconds which have
elapsed since the test was started. This timer is
restarted when F1 1block, F2 Contins, or F6
Reset is pressed. This timer is stopped when the
F3 Stop key is pressed.
Time
Displays the system time as derived from the
Chameleon clock in the format hh:mm:ss.
Mode
Displays the current testing Mode as configured in
the Setup menu. The field will display one of the
following: Remote UB (loop back), Local UB, or
Receive Only.
Pattern
Displays the current Pattern as configured in the
Setup menu. If a user-:I
Keyboard
(8031 CPU)
805-0384
P5 I/O
IT
I
)
rL,
PRIOption
ANSI or CEPT
~
i
2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
Serial
110
2Mbyte
RAM
Battery
Backed
RTC
i
•.?
4
3
I
I
805-0266
: }...
2 )(Z80H
@8MHz
or
2 )(Z80
@16MHz
128 Kbytes
RAM
2 xZ80H
@8MHz
or
2 )(Z80
@16MHz
128 Kbytes
RAM
/j j
Ij~11
I
I
::
I
I
I
I
I
I
805-0268
I
::
I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L.J
I
I I
I
.'.....
I:
1
805-0203
I
CEPT 805-0267
.;:.;;
0
Option
I
-----C;bi;----j'
Parallel
iSBX
Bus
I
:
Dual Port Option
ANSI 805-0204
I>
I
68010@ 10 MHz
1 MRAM
(144k Capture
Buffer inC I.)
!
Top
P5 CPU #2
:
---805B~T~//6
805-0234
I;
.-----.01/
....
805-0385
P5 CPU # 1
I
..
9H
r---
I
I
External
RGB Video ......1 - - - -....1" ...
High Res.
Color
Monitor
:
Piggyback
Au)(SenaI2+
80186@6MHz
512k RAM
805-0260
BRI #2
IIF
L__ .,
111...----'- ------------ ----~~;-~;;~-- -'----- -
SCSI
AuxSenal1+
.
Gl
W
805-0009
V-series
IIF #2
Remote ......1--_ _ _......1 : · : 1 - - - - - - - - - - 4
Control>
Piggyback
Parallel
'.:,.,
Printer ......1 - - - - -...... ,"'."
.
o.
((PT 805·0274 .. 120 Ohm
805-0215·-75 Ohm
L-----..
805-0170
P3
805-0088
P4
ANS180S-0235
I !--------I
I
+-___________-1
P1 ,. All SenalliO
805-0130
Front
Panel LEOs
805-0260
BRI #1
IIF
SCSI
Disk
Control
P2 ,. BasIc Language Simulator Engine
5
6
I
I
I
I
I
7
805-0117
8 Slot "Multibus I" Motherboard
80ttom
Notes: Different Board Configurations for BRI, PRI, and Dual Port
A-3
TEKELEC
Copyr'ghtC 1988 Tekelec. All fights reserved
APPENDIX 8:
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE
V.24 AND V.3S INTERFACES
V.24 Interface
This section describes the V.24 interface
Chameleon 32.
for
the
The electrical characteristics of V.24 series plugs on the
Chameleon conform to the CCITT V.28 Recommendation.
The V.24 series plugs have the following
specifications:
electrical
Line Receiver:
•
•
•
Impedance:
6 < Z < 8 (Kohms)
Max. Input Voltage:
± 25 V
Decision Threshold:
±3V
Line Transmitter:
•
•
Impedance:
< 100 ohms
Output Voltage:
± 12 V
The connectors of the V.24 series· are 25 pin socket
connectors of the standard ISO DB 25.
TEKELEC
8·'
81789
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Appendix B: V.24 and V.35 Interfaces
V.24/RS232
Specifications
RS232C is a United States standard that corresponds to the
CCID's V.24 International standard. RS232 specifications are
applicable to asynchronous and synchronous binary data
transmission using either private lines or swithched network
systems at speeds up to 20K bps.
The physical connection of interchange circuits within a data
terminal and a data set is made by a pair of pluggable
connectors (the interface point). The terminal side consists of
25 pins and the data set side consists of 25 holes arranged in
two columns.
Cable
The data terminal equipment must be provided with an
extension cable no longer than fifty feet. Longer cables are
permitted only if the load capacitance at the interface point
Restricting cable
does not exceed 2500 picofarads.
connections to fifty feet between the computer
communications adaptor and the local data set and between
the remote data set and the associated· terminal guards
against excessive sign.al distortion.
The tables on the following pages show the RS232 celD
equivalent pin numbers and their functions.
The pins
described are only those handled by the TEKELEC RS232
interface module. Pin 12 is included in this group, although it
.
is not visible on the front panel LED display.
TEKELEC
8/17'89
Appendix 8: V.24 and V.35 Interlaces
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
V.24 PIN ASSIGNMENTS
Monitoring Mode
0825
Pin
No.
CCITT
Circuit
No.
EIA
Ground
Incoming
1
101
AA
X
X
X
Frame Ground
2
103
BA
X
Transmitted Data
·3
104
BB
105
CA
5
106
CB
6
107
CC
7
102
AB
8
109
CF
x
x
x
x
x
x
Received Data
4
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Outgoing
Processed by
Chameleon
RS232 Name
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Data set Ready
Signal Ground
Data Carrier Detect
9
+ de Test Voltage
10
-de Test Voltage
11
Unassigned
x
x
12
122
SCF
13
121
SCB
2nd Clear to Send
14
118
SBA
2nd Transmitted Data
15
114
DB
16
119
SBB
17
11.5
DO
x
x
2nd Data Carrier Detec
Transmitted Clock
2nd Received Data
x
x
18
Receiver Clock
Receiver Dibit Clock
19
120
SCA
20
108.2
CD
21
110
CG
22
125
CE
2nd Request to Send
x
x
Signal Quality Detect
x
x
23
24
Ring Indicator
Data Rate Select
113
DA
x
x
25
T£K£L£C
Data Terminal Ready
Ext. Transmitter Clock
Busy
8·3
81789
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Appendix B: V.24 and V.35 Interfaces
V.24 PIN ASSIGNMENTS
Simulation Mode
DB25
Pin
No.
CCITI
Circuit
No.
EIA
Ground
1
101
AA
X
2
103
SA
3
104
SS
4
105
CA
5
106
CS
6
107
CC
7
102
·AS
8
109
CF
.-"~
To
'DCE
From
DCE
X
x
x
x
x
x
x
Processed by
Chameleon
RS232 Name
X
Frame Ground
x
Transmitted Data
x
x
Received Data
x
Clear to Send
x
Data set Ready
x
Signal Ground
x
Data Carrier Detect
Request to Send
9
+ de Test Voltage
10
-de Test Voltage
11
Unassigned
12
122
SCF
13
121
SCB
14
118
SBA
15
114
DB
16
119
SSS
17
115
DO
x
x
x
2nd Data Carrier Detect
2nd Clear to Send
x
2nd Transmitted Data
x
x
x
x
Transmitted Clock
2nd Received Data
x
18
Receiver Clock
Receiver Dibit Clock
19
120
SCA
20
108.2
CD
21
110
CG
22
125
CE
x
x
2nd Request to Send
x
x
x
Signal Quality Detect
x
23
24
Ring Indicator
Data Rate Select
113
DA
x
x
25
TEKELEC
Data Terminal Ready
Ext. Transmitter Clock
Busy
B-4
Appendix 8: V.24 and V.35 Interfaces
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
V.35 Interface
This section describes the Chameleon 32. V.35 interchangeable interface module, which includes:
•
•
One male connector
(reference AMP 201 357-1)
One female connector
(reference AMP 200 838-2)
•
Standard SAE 632 mounting hardware single lead
jackscrew.
The male connector's male jackpost is near pin MM.
The female connector's female jackscrew is near pin MM.
The diameter of the pins is 0.060" for units to be used in the
U.S., Japan, Australia and England. For France, Switzerland
and Sweden, the diameter is 0.040".
The pins can be removed or reassigned easily using an AM P
tool (reference AMP 305 183).
Electrical
Characteristics
The unbalanced signals have electrical characteristics which
conform to the CCITT's V.28· EIA RS232.
Driver
Output voltage:
Output impedance:
Output slew rate:
Receiver Input resistance:
Input voltage max:
hysteresis:
+:- 10 volts
300 ohms
30 volts/microseconds
approximately 5 Kohms
+ /- 25 volts
3 to 4 volts
The balanced signals have electrical characteristics which
conform to the CCITT's X.27.:EIA RS422.
Driver
Output resistance:
Lead to ground:
Output current:
Output voltage:
Receiver Input resistance:
Lead to ground:
Input sensitivity:
TEKELEC
8-5
100 ohms differential
175 ohms
150 mA maximum
+ /- 3 volts
100 ohms differential
175 ohms
+ /- 200 mvolts
8:17 89
Appendix 8: V.24 and V.35 Interfaces
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
V.35 PIN ASSIGNMENTS
Pin
No.
CCITT
Circuit
No.
Ground
A
-
X
FG
8
102
X
P
103
S
103
R
104
T
104
C
105
D
106
E,
From
DCE
To
DCE
Bal.
Unbal
Frame Ground
-
SG
Signal Ground
-
-
x
TD (A)
Transmit Data
x
x
TD (8)
Transmit Data
x
x
RD (A)
Receive Data
x
.x
RD (8)
Receive Data
x
Name
RS232 Name
RTS
Request to Send
x
x
CTS
Clear to Send
x
107
x
DSR
Data Set Ready
x
F
109
x
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
x
H
108
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
x
J
125
x
RI
Ring Indicator
)(
y
114
x
SCT (A)
Transmitter Signal Timing
x
AA or
a
114
x
SCT (8)
Transmitter Signal Timing
x
V
115
x
SCR (A)
Receiver Signal Timing
x
X
115
x
SCR (8)
Receiver Signal Timing
x
U
113
x
SCTE (A)
Transmitter Signal Timing
x
W
113
x
SCTE (8)
Transmitter Signal Timing
x
TEKELEC
x
x
8-6
,
8:17 89
APPENDIX C:
PINOUTS
Parallel Printer·
Connector Pinout
The Chameleon 32 parallel printer connector is a 25 pin D-sub
socket (female) connector (DB25S). The pinout is shown as
viewed from the rear of the machine:
All signals are standard TTL levels.
Description
Pin Number
/STROBE (Active Low)
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
/ ACK (Active Low)
Busy
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
No Connection
Ground
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
This connector is pinout and signal compatible with the IBM
PC. It is also signal compatible with Centronics compatible
parallel interface printers.
TEKELEC
C-1
8.'17'89
Appendix C: Pinouts
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Serial Printer
Connector Pinout
The Chameleon 32 serial printer connector is a 25 pin 0subminature socket (female) (0825S). The pinout is shown as
the connector is viewed from the rear of the machine:
All signals are standard RS-232 voltage levels. The connector
is physically and electrically a OCE type connector.
OB25 Pin
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
15
17
20
24
TEKELEC
EIA
Designation
AA
BA ,
BB
CA
CB
CC
AB
CF
DB
DD
CD
DA
CCITI
Circuit
Signal Name
101
103
104
105
106
107
102
109
114
115
108
Chassis Ground
TXD, Transmit Data
RXD, Receive Data
RTS, Request to Send
CTS, . Clear to Send
DSR, Data Set Ready
GND, Signal Ground
DCD, Carrier Detect
TXC, Transmit Clock
RXC, Receive Clock
DTR, Data Term. Rdy.
CK, External Clock
C-2
Source
Chassis
Printer
Chameleon
Printer
Chameleon
Chameleon
Signal Gnd.
Chameleon
Chameleon
Chameleon
Printer
Printer
8/17'89
Appendix C:. Pinouts
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Remote Terminal
Connector Pinout
The Chameleon 32 remote terminal connector is a 25 pin 0subminature socket (female) (D825S). The pinout is shown as
the connector is viewed from the rear of the machine:
All signals are standard RS-232 voltage levels. The connector
is physically and electrically a DCE type connector.
0825 Pin
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
15
17
20
24
TEKELEC
EIA
Designation
AA
8A
BB
CA
CB
CC
AB
CF
DB
DO
CD
DA
CCITT
Circuit
Signal Name
101
103
104
105
106
107
102
109
114
115
108
Chassis Ground
TXD, Transmit Data
RXD, Receive Data
RTS, Request to Send
CTS, Clear to Send
DSR, Data Set Ready
GND, Signal Ground
DCD, Carrier Detect
TXC, Transmit Clock
RXC, Receive Clock
DTR, Data Term. Rdy.
CK, External Clock
C-3
Source
Chassis
Terminal
Chameleon
Terminal
Chameleon
Chameleon
Signal Gnd.
Chameleon
Chameleon
Chameleon
Terminal
Terminal
81789
Appendix C: Pinouts
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Auxiliary 1 and
Auxiliary 2
Connector Pinouts
The Chameleon 32 Aux. 1 and Aux. 2 connectors are 25 pin
D-subminature sockets (female) (DB25S). The pinout for both
is shown as the connector is viewed from the rear of the
machine:
All signals are standard RS-232 voltage levels. The connector
is physically and electrically a DCE type connector.
DB25 Pin
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
15
17
20
22
24
TEKELEC
EIA
Designation
AA
BA
BB
CA
CB
CC
AB
DB
DO
CD
CE
DA
CCITT
. Circuit
Signal Name
101
.103
104
105
106
107
102
114
115
108
125
Source
N/C
Chassis Ground
TXD, Transmit Data
Terminal
RXD, Aeceive Data
Chameleon
Request
to
Send
.
Terminal
RTS.
Chameleon
CTS, Clear to Send
Chameleon
DSR, Data Set Ready
GND, Signal Ground
Signal Gnd.
TXC, Transmit Clock
Chameleon
RXC, Receive Clock
Chameleon
DTR, Data Term. Rdy.
Terminal
AI,
Ring Indicator
Terminal
Terminal
CK, External Clock
C·4
8/1T89
Appendix C: Pinouts
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Video Connector
Pinout
The Chameleon 32 video connector is a 9 pin O-sub socket
(female) connector (OB9S). The pinout is as shown below:
All signals are standard TTL levels.
Description
Pin Number
Ground
Ground
Red
Green
Blue
Intensity
Monochrome
Horizontal Sync.
Vertical Sync.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
This connector is pinout and signal compatible with the IBM
PC. The video signal requires a monitor capable of displaying
640 pixels by 240 lines (this is higher resolution than the
standard PC CGA standard). High resolution or "Multisync"
type monitors are recommended for use with the Chameleon
32.
T£K£L£C
C-5
Si17'S9
APPENDIX D:
SCSI SIGNAL INTERFACE
SCSI Interface
Signals
The Chameleon 32 SCSI interface signals are as shown
below. All signals are low true.
All odd pins are ground.
GND
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21·
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
.
GND
41
43
45
47
49
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
DATA BIT 0 (DBO)
DATA BIT 1 (DB1)
DATA BIT 2 (DB2)
DATA BIT 3 (OB3)
DATA BIT 4 (OB4)
DATA BIT 5 (DB5)
DATA BIT 6 (OB6)
DATA BIT 7 (OB7)
DATA PARITY (DBP)
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
BUSY (BSY)
ACKNOWLEDGE (ACK)
RESET (RST)
MESSAGE (MSG)
SELECT (SEL)
CONTROUOATA (C/O)
REQUEST (REQ)
INPUT/OUTPUT (I/O)
The SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) Bus was
designed to tie peripherals and one or more hosts together on
small computer systems. SCSI has been standardized by
ANSI, with a protocol that enables a driver to be used with
slight modification on a wide variety of hosts. SCSI uses a 50
pin ribbon cable, with 8 leads used for data and one for parity.
TEKELEC
0-1
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Appendix 0: SCSI Interface
Nine Jines are used for control signals (select, busy, request,
acknowledge, control/data, inpuVoutput, message, ·reset and
attention). All control and data lines are biased at a positive
voltage by terminating resistors and are considered to be
asserted when pulled low to ground.
The sequence for the host to, for example, read a logical
sector on a disk is divided into several phases. The selection
phase requires the host to assert one of the data lines to
identify which controller (target) is desired and then assert the
select line. The target addressed then asserts the busy line to
indicate it has recognized its selection.
In the command phase, the target un asserts the inpuVoutput
line to indicate a block of six or ten bytes of command
information should be outputted by the host to the target. The
target asserts the request line for the first byte until the host
asserts the acknowledge line to indicate the byte is on the
data lines. When the target has read the byte, the request is
unasserted. The host then unasserts the acknowledge line
and the handshake sequence continues until all bytes of the
command. are transferred to the target. .
In the data phase, once the controller has read the sector(s)
on the disk into a' buffer, it will un assert the control/data line
and assert the inpuVoutput line to indicate that the host can
no'w input the data.
Th is is don e with th e
request/acknowledge handshake as before.
When all data is transferred, the status phase is entered and
the controller asserts the control/data line to indicate the status
byte may be input by the host. The status byte will indicate if
all is well.
The message phase is indicated by the message line being
asserted by the target.
TEKELEC
0·2
8/1789
APPENDIX E:
CHAMELEON 32 LED OVERLAYS
Standard LED
Display Overlay
On the standard CCITT V-Series Interface LED Display Overlay,
there are five groups of LED displays:
Note
•
Analysis
Indicates when the Chameleon 32 is in
Analysis Mode.
•
Simulation
Indicates when the Chameleon 32 is in
DTE or DCE Simulation Mode.
•
Data
Indicates transmission or reception of
Data.
•
Clocks
Indicates transmission or reception of
clocks.
•
Controls
Indicates the state of the Interface Control
Signals.
The first two groups indicate whether you are running Analysis
or Simulation (DCE or DTE).
The LED display is shown in Figure E.1 on the following page.
TEKELEC
E·l
8/17'89
Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Analysis
EEJ
Simulatjon
DeE
DTE
IEiI
EE3
Data
M
S
(:::::::;;1
r::::1
3
BB/RO 104 RO
M
S
1::1
1=:1
2 BA/SO 103 TO
Clocks
M
S
I:::::::::::::!
b::::::::::!
15 OB/ST 114 TC
1::::::::::::::1
I::~::::::::::I
17 OO/RT 115 RC
M
S
r:::::::::;:!
,,:::::::::::1
24 OAITT 113 TC
Controls
M
S
I:}:'I
5 CBICS 106 CTS
M
S
1:>::::::::1
(::::1
1':::1
ii:::::!
E:::::!
1'::0·1
1:':::::::1
E::::::::::::::!
1::::::::::::::\
6 Cc/OM 107 OSR
8 CF/RR 109 OCD
[:::::::::1
[:::::<1
22 CElIC
4 CAlRS 10S
RTS
20 CDITR 108.2 OTR
125 RI
Figure E.1: The Standard LED Display Overlay
The remaining groups have two columns of LED displays,
indicating Mark or Space. There are also four columns in
each row. These columns are from left to right:
•
•
•
•
TEKELEC
DB 25 pin number
EtA circuit descriptionN.35 circuit description
CCID circuit number
EIA signal name
E·2
81T89
Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
ANSI Primary Rate
Interface
LED Overlay
The ANSI Primary Rate LED Overlay is shown in Figure E.2
below. (See the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual,
Volume 1/, Chapter 11: ISDN Primary Rate Interface, for more
information. )
YELALARM
DS1 Interface
E3
NOSYNCL1
NO SYNCL2
EZI
IEEI
eso Channel X
0
_1 mm
eso Channel Y
Configuration
1
0
EEl
EEl
Configuration
MON ONLY
MON
EZEl
SIM
CEl
Signaling Simulation
1
0
1::,,::·::::;·1
I:::::::.:>:!
Channel Y
Figure E.2: The ANSI Primary Rate Interface LED Display
The Level 1 information for both signals includes:
•
NO SYNC L 112
No Frame Synchronization
The LED for the corresponding line is lit when an out-offrame condition exists on that line.·
TEKELEC
E-3
8.17'89
Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
•
YEL ALARM
Yellow Alarm
This LED is lit when remote end problems exist,
indicating one of the following conditions has been met:
•
~
In ESF framing (Extended Superframe, with or without
signaling), the Receiver has detected 16 Yellow Alarm
patterns of 0000000011111111 or 1111111100000000 on
the 4K bps Data Link .
.~
In SF framing (Superframe, with or without signaling).
a Yellow Alarm is detected when BIT 2 equals 0 for
255 consecutive channels. A switch on the Multibus
Board allows selection of an alternate Yellow Alarm
which activates when the S-bit of Frame 12 is high.
DSO Channel XJY
The two LEOs for Channels X and Y show what
constitutes the DSO data of the corresponding channel.
If the data is all ones, only the LED labeled 1 is lit. The
same is true for a/l zero data. If the data is ones and
zeros, then both the LED labeled 0 and 1 are flashing.
~
Configuration
The MON LED, when lit, indicates that the DSO
Channel Y is in Monitoring Mode. (DSO Channel X is
always in Monitoring Mode.)
The SIM LED indictates that the Channel Y is in
Simulation Mode.
•
Signaling Simulation
The two LEOs show the current state of the "A" signaling
bit for Channel Y when the channel is in Simulation
Mode. (Channel X is always in Monitor Mode.)
TEKELEC
E·4
8.17·89
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays
CEPT Primary Rate
Interface
LED Overlay
The CEPT Primary Rate Interface LED Overlay for the
Chameleon 32 Front Panel LED display is shown in Figure E.3
below. (See the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual,
Volume 1/, Chapter 11: ISDN Primary Rate Interface, for more
information. )
REMOTE ALARM
CEPT 2048 KBPS Interface
IETII]
NO SYNC L1
NOSYNCL2
tZiliill
~
Time Slot Y
Time Slot X
1
1
0
mEl] WillE]
0
BEIJ fIE3]
Configuration
Configuration
MON
MaN ONLY
SIM
fillE8l
[llij£]
Signalling Simulation (a bit)
1
0
1. :::<1 1:.:1
Time Slot Y
Figure E.3: CEPT Primary Rate Interface LED Display
Level 1 information on the LED display for both signals
includes:
•
REMOTE ALARM
This LED is lit when remote end problems exist.
TEKELEC
E-5
8.1T89
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
•
Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays'
NO SYNC L 1/2
No Frame Synchronization
The LED for the corresponding line is lit when an out-offrame condition exists on that line.
•
Time Slot XIV
The two LEOs for Time Slots X and Y show what
constitutes the data of the corresponding Time Slot. If the
data is all ones, only the LED labeled 1 is lit. The same is
true for all zero data. If the data is ones and zeros, then
both the LED labeled 0 and 1 are flashing.
~
Configuration
The MON LED, when lit, indicates that Time Slot Y is in
Monitoring Mode. (Time Slot X is always in Monitoring
Mode.)
The SIM LED indictates that the Time Slot Y is in
. Simulation Mode.
• Signalling Simulation (a bit)
.. The two LEOs show the current state of the "A" signaling
bit for Time Slot Y, when the Time Slot is in Simulation
Mode. (Time Slot X is always in Monitor Mode.)
TEKELEC
E-6
8/17:89
Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Basic Rate
Interface
LED Overlay
The Basic Rate Interface LED overlay is shown in Figure E.4
below. (See the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual,
Volume II, Chapter 12: ISDN Basic Rate Interface, for more
information. )
ISDN BASIC RATE INTERFACE
Monitor
I3I]
Simulate
TE
NT
GEl
o
Data
o 1
EEl EEl
RO
o
1
E3
EEJ
TO
External Data
o
o
1
k:,\,'J
[:><,:,1
B
t,:,:,'::::::1
c:::J
0
1
c::J
c:::J
c::.:J B
[]I]
0
TO
RO
Figure E.4: Basic Rate Interface LED
The Level 1 information on the LED display includes:
•
TEKELEC
Monitor and
Simulate LEOs
E·7
These LEOs indicate the operating
state of the Chameleon 32. It can
be NT Simulation, TE Simulation, or
Monitor (AnalysiS).
8/17'89
Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
•
ROITD Data LEOs
Note:
•
TEKELEC
These LEOs show the state of the
signals (Receive and Transmit) on
the B or 0 Channel running the
Chameleon 32 protocol software. If
the data is all 1s, then only the LED
labeled 1 is lit. (The same is true
for all zero data.) If the data is 1s
and Os, then both the LEOs labeled
o and 1 are flashing.
In the current release of the Basic Rate
Interface, the RDITD Data LEOs show the data
on the SIT Interface.
RDITD External
Data LEOs
E·8
These LEOs show the state of the
signals on the External Band 0
connectors on the Chameleon 32
Interface Module.
8/17/89
Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
X.21 Interface LED Overlay
The X.21 Interface LED overlay is shown in Figure E.5 below.
See the Chameleon Protocol Interpretation Manual, Chapter
18: X.21 Interface, for information about the operation of the
X.21 Interface module.
X.21 INTERFACE
Analysis
iZJ
Simulation
OTE
DeE
o
E2]
Data Transfer
o
S
1:::::;';:::'4
1
1:::;:;·;:;:::1
Receive
OFF
k::::;::;:!
ON
(::;::;::1
6/13
o
1;::,::·,:·:1
1
1:;:::;:;:":'1
Transmit
Signal eJementtiming
X.21 Lead Status
1/0FF OION
R
1/0FF OION
EEl
E2II
4111
Receive
T
c::J
0
219
Transmit
EEl
GEl
5/12
Indicate
e
c:::J
0
3/10
Control
7/14
Byte Timing
ON
B
IEEJ
Figure E.5: X.21 Interfac.e LEO Overlay
TEKELEC
E·9
5/1,'90
Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
The Level 1 Information displayed for the X.21 interface
includes the. following:
TEKELEC
•
Analysis/Simulation
Indicates the current use of the
Interface, either Analysis, DCE
Simulation or DTE Simulation.
•
Data Transfer
Displays the Data- being received
or transmitted by the Chameleon.
•
Signal element timing
Indicates the state of the Signal
element timing circuit.
•
X.21 Lead Status
Displays the status of the four
leads, Receive, Indicate, Transmit
and Control.
•
Byte Timing
Indicates whether Byte timing is
active.
E·10
Appendix E: Chameleon 32 LED Overlays
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
U-Interface
Overlay
Figure E.G illustrates the U-Interface overlay. When you' are using
the U-interface software (281 Simulation and/or Monitoring), you
must apply this overlay to the Chameleon LED panel. Explanations
of each of the LEOs follow the figure.
a
ISDN BASIC RATE U-INTERFACE 2B1 Q
c::J
Network
Monitor
SIMULATE
Terminal
L::l
IIiIJ
a
_
1
(,::':::1
DATA
Receive
Transmit
ALARMS
.-,
Network
Terminal
R1 No ActJAIP (Blink).
mill . No Frame Sync
Figure E.6: The Chameleon 32 281 Q U-Interface LED Overlay.
•
Monitor
This green LED lights to indicate that you are running the
2810 Monitoring application.
•
Simulate
These green LEOs lights to indicate that you are running the
2810 Simulation application. When Simulating an LT, the
Network LEO is on; when simulating an NT, the Termina/LED
is on.
.
Teke/ee
E-11
09/27191
Appendix E: ~hame/eon 32 LED Overlays
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
•
Data
These LEOs show the bit-values of received and transmitted
data. They light to signify one of the three following
conditions:
•
Red only:
The Receive and Transmit bit streams are binary Os
(zeros) only.
•
Green only:
The Receive and Transmit bit streams are binary 1s
(ones) only.
•
Red and Green:
The Receive and Transmit bit streams are binary Os and
1s.
•
Alarms
The four red ALARMS LEOs signal three conditions on either
the Network side or Terminal side of your configuration:
•
No Act/AlP (blink)
These LEOs light to indicate two dfiferent states:
•
1)
That there is no activation (No Act) of the link;
or,
2)
That link activation is in progress (AlP) and
that no other action should be taken u"ntil the
link is fully up and the LED stops blinking.
No Frame Sync
The No Frame Synchronization LEOs light to signal that
frame synchronization ·of Receive and Transmit data is
not occurring between the LT and the NT. Loss of
synchronization may result from clocking irregularities,
or from corrupted structures of the Synchronization
Word and - at the superframe level - Inverted
For further details on
Synchronization Word.
synchronization, see ANSI Spec. T1.601-1988.
Teke/ec
E-12
09/27/91
APPENDIX F:
DECIMAL-HEXADECIMAL
CONVERSION CHART
Conversion
Chart
Use the conversion chart below to convert from hexadecimal
to decimal and vice versa.
163
0
4096
8192
12288
16384
20480
24576
28672
32768
36864
40960
45056
49152
53248
57344
61440
Example
160
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
HEX
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Look up E in the first column (16 0)
Look up 3 in the second column (16 1 )
Sum equals decimal value
14
48
62
To convert 1A72 hexadecimal to decimal:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
TEKELEC
0
256
512
768
1024
1280
1536
1792
2048
2304
2560
2816
3072
3328
3584
-3840
To convert 3E hexadecimal to decimal:
1)
2)
3)
Example
161
0
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
162
Look up 2 in the first column (16 0)
Look up 7 in the second column (16 1 )
Look up A in the third column (162 )
Look up 1 in the fourth column (163 )
Sum equals decimal value
F·1
2
112
2560
4096
6770
8/17'89
Appendix F: Conversion Chart
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Example
To convert 6770 decimal to hexadecimal:
·6770
-4096
2674
-2560
114
- 112
--2
2
= 6770)
(highest number in table > = 2674)
(highest number in table> = 114)
(highest number in table > = 2)
(highest number in table >
Hexadecimal value is equal to line numbers of each value
chosen from table.
value:
hexadecimal:
T£K£L£C
4096
1
F·2
2560
A
112
7
2
2
= 1A72
8/17,'89
APPENDIX G:
ASCII-EBCDIC-HEX TABLE
The following table lists ASCII characters and their octal,
decimal, and hexadecimal values.
TEKELEC
G·1
8/17'89
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
HEX
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
OA
OB
OC
00
OE
OF
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
10
1E
1F
20
.21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2ft:.
28
2C
20
2E
2F
TEKELEC
DEC OCT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
34
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
Appendix G: ASCII/EBCDIC/HEX TABLE
ASCII
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
42
PT
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CA
SO
SI
OLE
OC1
OC2
OC3
OC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GSC
AS
AS
'
I
(space)
FF
OLE
SBA
EUA
IC
43
44
NL
45
46
47
48
49
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
50
5E
5F
EM
OUP
SF
FM
ITB
!
..
43
#
44
$
45
46
47
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
EBCDIC HEX DEC OCT
%
&
•
(
)
ETB
ESC
•
+
ENQ
·
I
G-2
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
ASCII
0
1
2
3
4
5
EBCDIC
SYN
6
7
8
9
EOT
,
<
RA
NAK
=
>
?
SUB
@
, • (space)
A
B
C
0
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
A
S
T
U
¢
,
<
(
+
!
&
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
$
\
*
t
.),
-,
!
-,
Appendix G: ASCIl/EBCOIC;HEX TABLE
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
HEX
\
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
88
8C
80
8E
8F
TEKELEC
DEC OCT
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104'
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
ASCII
a
EBCDIC
c
d
e
f
9
h
i
I
m
n
0
,
%
">
?
P
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
Y
z
~
DEL
..
#
,@
-.
"
a
b
c
d
e
f
9
h
DEC OCT
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
162
A2
A3
163
A4
164
A5
165
166
A6
A7
167
A8
168
A9
169
C1
193
194
C2
195
C3
C4
196
C5, 197
C6
198
C7
199
C8
200
C9
201
01
209
02
210
211
03
04 . 212
05
213
06
214
07
215
08
216
217
09
E2
226
E3
227
E4
228
E5
229
E6
230
E7
231
232
E8
E9
233
FO
240
F1
241
F2
242
F3
243
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
/
b
j
k
HEX
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
230
231
242
243
244
245
246
247
250
251
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
310
311
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
342
343
344
345
346
347
350
351
360
361
362
363
ASCII
EBCDIC
j
k'
I
m
n
0
P
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
Y
z
A
8
C
0
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
0
·1
2
3
8/1789
Appendix G: ASCII/EBCDIC/HEX TABLE
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
HEX
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
TEKELEC
DEC OCT
244
245
246
247
248
249
364
365
366
367
370
371
ASCII
EBCDIC
4
5
6
7
8
9
G-4
8:17'89
APPENDIX H:
RS422N.11N.36
RS423N.1 ON .36
INTERFACE MODULES
RS422N .11 N .36
Interface Module
RS422 is an EIA standard that corresponds to the CCITT's
V.11 and V.36 International standards. RS422 specifications
are applicable to asynchronous and synchronous binary data
transmission using either private lines or switched network
systems at speeds up to 64 kbps. The RS422 Interface is
inter-operable with equipment using RS423.
The primary new capabilities available with RS422 as
compared to RS232 are:
•
•
•
Ability to handle significantly higher maximum data rates
Ability to use a longer interface cables and
Additional interface functions, such as loop back testing
The physical connection of interchange circuits within a data
terminal and a data set is made by a pair of pluggable·
connectors (the interface point.) The Chameleon 32 side is a
37 pin O-subminature socket (female) connector (0837S).
The terminal side consists of the matching male connector
(0837P). The pinout below is shown as the connector is
viewed from the rear of the machine:
Figure H.1: RS422 Connector
TEKELEC
H-l
8/17/89
Appendix H: V.36 Interfaces
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Cable
Because of the improvements in the electrical characteristics,
the connections between the computer communications
adaptor and the local data set and between the remote data
set and" the associated terminal can be extended to 4,000 feet
(1,200 meters). This is accurate for data signalling rates of up
to 100 kbps.
Figure H.2 shows the RS422 CCITT equivalent pin numbers
and their functions. The Chameleon 32 can be configured to
simulate either the DCE or DTE, therefore the circuit direction
specifies the direction TO and FROM the DCE rather than TO
and FROM the Chameleon 32.
Electrical
Characteristics
RS422 is a Balanced Voltage Digital Signal with electrical
characteristics which conform to the CCITT's V.111X.27.
Driver
Output resistance:
Lead to ground:
Output current:
Output voltage:
Receiver Input resistance:
Lead to ground:
Input sensitivity:
TEKELEC
H-2
200 ohms differential
175 ohms
150 mAmaximum
+/- 3 volts
" 200 ohms" differential
175 ohms
+ /- 200 mvolts
8117'89
Appendix H: V.36 Interfaces
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
D837 Pin
Number
ISO
Circuit
19
37
20
102
102a
102b
SG
SC
AC
Signal Ground
Send Common
Receive Common
To DCE
From DCE
28
15
12/30
11 /29 ..
135
125
108
107
IS
IC
TR
DM
Terminal in Service
Incoming Call
Terminal Ready
Data Mode
To
From
To
From
4/22
6/24
103
104
SD
RD
Send Data
Receive Data
To DCE
From-DCE
17/35
5/23
8/26
113
114
115
TT
ST
RT
Terminal Timing
Send Timing
Receive Timing
To DCE
From DCE
From DCE
7/25
105
106
109
110
135
112
RS
CS
RR
SQ
NS
SF
SR
SI
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Receiver Ready
Signal Quality
New Signal
Select Frequency
Signaling Rate Selector
Signaling Rate Indicator
To
From
From
From
To
To
To
From
10
14
18
141
140
142
LL
RL
TM
Local Loopback
Remote Loopback
Test Mode
To DCE
To DCE
From DCE
32
36
116
117
SS
S8
Select Standby
Standby Indicator
·To DCE
From DCE
9/27
13/31
33
34
16
16
2
111/126
111/126
CCITT Circuit
Mnemonic and Name
Circuit
Direction
DCE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DCE
Figure H.2: RS422 Connector Pinout
T£K£L£C
H·3
Implemented
by
Chameleon
Circuit
Type
X
X
X
Common
X
X
X
X
Control
Data
Timing
Control
Control
P
R
I
M
A
R
y
C
H
A
N
N
E
L
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Appendix H: V.36 Interfaces
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
DTE TO DCE
INTERCONNECTION
Figure H.3 shows the connections between the Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) and the Data Circuit-Terminating Equfpment
(DeE).
SHIELD
SG
DIRECTION
sc
0
A
T
A
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
E
a
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
RC
IS
IC
04
OM
SO
Ro
,
.I
"~
,~
,
,"
,"
",
"'.
-,"
x",-
~
TR
...,
",","
04
p
X ...
x:
~
"1(
x" ,
,
M
A
R
C
A
T
"
"
~
t
X
",
"
.I
,
,...
)
".I
"
.I
"
,~
'X
",
,"
,
X
X
x
",
".I
.I
X
:,
I
",
o
," N ",
so
NS
SFISR
SI
LL
RL
TM
SS
S8
E
x "
,
~
,
o "
~
'X "
"
X
X
o ,"
F
x"
ST
RT
RS
CS
RR
X
T
X ,"
TT
o "
t
N
X ~
X
,~
SHIELD
SG
SC
RC
IS
IC
TR
OM
so
RO
IT
ST
RT
RS
CS
RR
sa
NS
SF/SR
SI
LL
RL
TM
SS
S8
0
A
T
A
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
T
I
N
G
E
a
u
I
P
M
E
N
T
X TWO CONNECTOR CONTACTS
Figure H.3: DTE to DeE Interconnection
TEKELEC
H-4
8/1789
Appendix H: V.3S Interfaces
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
RS423 N.10N.36
INTERFACE MODULE
RS423 is an EIA standard that corresponds to the ·CCID's
V.10 and V.36 International standard. RS423 specifications
are applicable to asynchronous and synchronous binary data
transmission using either private lines or switched network
systems at speeds up to 64 kbps. The RS423 interface
module is inter-operable with equipment using RS422 and
(with certain considerations) RS232. The requirements and
suggested implementations for such inter-operation is provided
.
by EIA Industrial Electronics Bulletin 12.
Although all of the new capabilities available when using
RS422 are available with the RS423 Interface Module, the
following cases should be avoided because of its unbalanced
electrical characteristics:
•
Avoid an interconnecting cable that is too long for proper
unbalanced circuit operation
•
Avoid extraneous noise sources which make unbalanced
circuit operation impossible
•
A~oid
unnecessary interference from other signals
The physical connection of interchange circuits within a data
terminal and a data set is made by a pair of pluggable
connectors (the interface point.) The Chameleon 32 side is a
37 pin O-subminature socket (female) connector (OB37S).
The terminal side consists of the matching male connector
(OB37P). The pinout below is shown as the connector is
viewed from the rear of the machine:
Figure H.4: RS423 Connector
TEKELEC
H-S
8;11'89
Appendix H: V.36 Interfaces
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Cable
RS423 is an unbalanced interchange circuit which creates
complications with the cable length. It is dependent on the
data signalling rate and on the rise time.
With a data signalling rate of 64 kbps, the extension cable to
the DTE can be no longer than 10 to 20 meters in length.
(With decreased data signalling rate, the length can also be
increased.) These limitations are due to interference (nearend crosstalk) and the circuits susceptibility to differential
noise.
Figure H.5 shows the RS423 CCITT equivalent pin numbers
and their functions. The Chameleon 32 can be configured to
simulate either the DCE or DTE, therefore the circuit direction
specifies the direction TO and FROM the DCE rather than TO
and FROM the Chameleon 32.
Electrical
Characteristics .
This is an unbalanced signal which has electrical
characteristics which conform to CCITT's V.1 O/EIA RS423.
Driver
Output voltage:
Output impedance:
Output current:
Receiver Input Voltage:
Input impedance:
Input sensitivity:
T£K£L£C
H-6
+/< 50 ohms
-. 150 rnA maximum
+ /- 10 volts
+ /- 200 mvolts
8/17'89
APPENDIX I:
DSCS INTERFACE MODULE
Introduction
This section describes the Digital Signal Customer Service (DSCS)
Interface for the Chameleon. The interface operates at 56 Kbps.
A unit which operates at 9.6 Kpbs is available on special order.
The DSCS interface contains two receiver circuits and one
transmitter circuit. This allows the interface to operate in either of
two modes when connected to a Chameleon port:
•
Simulation using one transmitter and one receiver. In this
mode, the interface provides the clock to the
Chameleon. The Chameleon must, therefore, be
configured as a DTE.
•
Analysis
using two receivers
The Interface Module
Figure 1.1 shows the DSCS Interface module.
(±)
(±)
DSCSINTERFACE
BRIDGE
MASTER
BRIDGE
00
DO DO
TERM
RCV
SLAVE
RCV
XMT
TERM
- - - - - SIMULATE - - - " " ' - - MONITOR - LOCK
UNLOCK
CAUTION
(D
I
I
DISCONNECT DEVICE FROM
PRIMARY MAINS BEFORE
REMOVING THIS MODULE
eo
Figure I.1: DSCS Interface Module
Tekelec
I-1
09/27/91
Appendix I: DSCS Interface
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
The receiver and transmitter connections to the DSCS interface
(shown asA for receivers and B for transmitters) are made with
industry-standard 3-conductor bantam jacks. These connections
are split into two sections:
SIMULATE
This section includes the receiver (A) and the transmitter (B) used
in simulation. A TEAM/BRIDGE switch is provided by the receiver
for selection of the input impedance.
•
TEAM
Provides a 135 ohm nominal input impedance
•
BRIDGE
ohms
Provides an input impedance greater than 3 K
A second switch, located by the transmitter jack, is used to select
the transmitter clock used by the DSCS Interface. Figure 1.2
illustrates the transmit clock between the DSCS Interface, the
Chameleon and the Network.
•
•
Master
Transmits using the internally generated clock
Slave
Transmits using the recovered received clock
Chameleon
(DTE)
1---'" DSCS Interface 1 - - - "
(DCE)
i
DSCS Interface
always provides
Transmit clock
i
Master/Slave
Switch determines
Transmit dock
Figure I.2: Transmit Clock during Simulation
MONITOR
The Monitor section is the second receiver, also designated as A.
It is used with the Simulate receiver to perform Analysis tasks. A
TERM/BRIDGE switch is provided for this receiver as well.
For both of the receivers, the DSCS Interface derives a clock from
the received signal for use in received timing.
A switch is also provided on the interface to select either TERM or
BRIDGE as the terminating resistance for each receiver.
Tekelec
I-2
09/27/91
Appendix I: DSCS
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Inter1ac~
SPECIFICATIONS
Receivers
operate with standard DSCS/DDS signals per:
•
•
•
Coding method: AMI with zero suppression
•
Distance from OCU and DSU up to 1000 feet
•
Input Impedance:
•
•
Transmitter
AT&T Pub 62310
Bellcore TA-TSY-000083
Terminated (TERM)
Bridged (BRIDGE)
135 5 ohms, balanced
> 3 K ohms, balanced
provides a balanced output
•
Pulse amplitude and shape is in accordance with:
•
•
•
.•
AT&T Pub 62310
Bellcore TA-TSY-000083
Encoding method: AMI with zero suppression
Internal clock provides 56 kbps 0.01 %
This clock times the transmission when the Masterl Slave
switch is in the Master pOSition.
•
Pulse amplitude: 1.66 volts nominal
The documents used as standards are:
Teke/ec
•
AT& T Pub 62310 - Digital Data System Channel Interface
Specification
•
Bel/core TA-TSY-000083 - Generic Requirements for the
Digital Data System (DDS) Network Office Channel Unit
I-3
09/27/91
APPENDIX J:
G.703 CO-DIRECTIONAL INTERFACE MODULE
Introduction
This document describes the cCln G.703 Co-Directional
Interface for the Chameleon 32. The interface operates at 64
Kbps.
The Co-Directional interface contains two receiver circuits and
one transmitter circuit. This allows the interface to operate in
either of two modes when connected to a Chameleon port:
•
Simulation
using one transmitter and one receiver. In
this mode, the interface provides the clock
to the Chameleon. The Chameleon must,
therefore, be configured as a DTE.
•
Analysis
using two receivers
The Interface Module
Figure J.1 shows the Co-Directional Interface module as
viewed from the rear of the machine.
@)
<@
CO-DIRECTIONAL INTERFACE
e
BRIDGE
~
,,~
MASTER
BRIDGE
0 ~.. ---.1..0 0
RCV
__
XMT
RCV
- - - - SIMULATE
'§'
~
"'M
MONITOR -
II CAUTION!!
UNLOCK
<@
e
DISCONNECT DEVICE ROM
PRIMARY MAINS BEFORE
REMOVING THIS MODULE
LOCK
~
'Ej
Figure J.1: Co-Directional Interface Module
TEKELEC
J-1
8/03/90
App. J: G.703 Co-Directional Interface
Chameleon User's Guide
The receiver and transmitter connections to the Co-Directional
interface are made with 2-conductor balanced BR2
connectors. These connections are split into two sections:
SIMULATE
In simulate mode, the Co-Directional interfaces uses both the
transmitter and receiver. In this mode, the Co-Directional
interface module must be configured as a DTE.
The
Master/Slave switch selects the transmitter clock source used
by the Co-Directional interface, as follows:
•
When Master is selected, the transmit clock is generated
by the internal clock of the Co-Directional interface.
•
When slave is selected, the transmit clock is derived from
the recovered receive clock, and is thus synchronous to
the receive clock.
MONITOR
In Monitor mode, the Co-Directional interfaces uses two
rec.eivers: the Simulate receiver and the Monitor' receiver.
Both receivers use the received clock for receive timing.
Term/Bridge
Each receiver is provided with a Term/Bridge switch. When
Term is selected, the line is terminated with a 120 ohm
nominal input impedance. When Bridge is selected, the input
impedance is greater than 3k ohms.
If multiple receivers are connected to one line, only one
should be terminated, and the remaining receivers set for
Bridge mode. If only one receiver is connected, it should be
in Term mode.
TEKELEC
J-2
8103/90
App. J: G.703 Co-Directional Interface
Chameleon User's Guide
SPECIFICATIONS
Receiver
•
Receivers operate with standard Co-Directional signals
per CCITT Recommendation G.703.
•
Coding method: per G.703
•
Input Impedance:
•
120 ohms ± 5 ohms, balanced (Term mode)
•
> 3k ohms, balanced (Bridge mode)
•
Bipolar signal input range 5.0 Volts peak-to-peak to 0.3
Volts peak-to-peak
•
The transmitter provides a balanced output
•
Output impedance:
•
Pulse amplitude and shape is in accordance with
CCITT Recommendation G.703.
•
Encoding method: per CCITT Rec. G.703
•
Internal clock movides 64 KBPS + 100 ppm
This clock times the transmission when the Master/
Slave switch is in the Master position.
•
Pulse amplitude:
balanced
•
Peak voltage of no pulse: 0
Transmitter
120 ohms ± 5 ohms
1.0 volts nominal, into 120 ohm
+ 0.1
yolts
The document used as a standard reference is:
•
TEKELEC
CCITT. Red Book, Volume III - Fascicle 111.3,
Recommendation G.703
J-3
8/03/90
APPENDIX K:
256k DATA CAPTURE OPTION
Introduction
On Dual Port machines, there are two monitoring modes
available:
•
. Monitor mode enables the Chameleon to monitor up to
64k bps with dense traffic (one flag between frames).
•
Fast Monitor mode enables the Chameleon to monitor full
duplex traffic up to 256k bps. This mode is also referred
to as 256k data capture mode.
The mode is selected in the main configuration menu using
the Mode of Operation parameter. Fast' Monitor mode is
available only on Port A.
The 256k data capture option requires specific hardware and
software. When available, the Port A Mode of Operation
parameter includes a Fast Mo (Fast Monitoring) option as
shown in the figure below.
-8----------------------Tekelec CHAMELEON 32 Rel 4.xx Copyright (C) 1986-1989
I Press
F6
to change the PROTOCOL setup
I
I Press
GO to Accept
Setup Mode
Port A Mode of Operation
Physical Interface
Protocol
Press F6 to change
I Busy
Port B Mode of Operation
Monitoring IPORT AIOata Source
Capture Mode
TEKELEC
K-1
11/15/89
Chameleon User's Guide
App. K: 256K Acquisition Module
A Chameleon can support only one 256k port. Therefore,
- - when you select Fast Monitor mode for Port A, Port B is not
available. To indicate that Port B is not available, the
message Busy appears next to the Port B parameters.
Once Fast Monitoring is selected, you configure and use the
Chameleon in the same manner as for standard 64k bps
Monitoring.
Limitations
When using Fast Monitoring, the following guidelines and
limitations apply:
c~n
•
A Dual Port machine is required, and only one port
operate while 256k is being used
•
For dense traffic (less than five flags between frames at
greater than 64 kbps) the Chameleon may loose frames.
•
Due to the large amount of data being processed on a
dense line with large frames at a high baud rate, you may
elect not to run several tasks simultaneously. You may
experience a slight performance degradation, depending
on which tasks you run.
For example, if you are running Statistics, Direct-to-Disk
and Analysis, you may notice the following:
•
The Statistics display may not be updated as frequently
as usual. The Statistics display may appear to be
frozen or the machine may appear to be hung up.
This is not the case. The data is still being processed
and the information is still being captured on disk. The
updating of the screen has a lower priority. If you stop
acquisition by pressing Run/Stop, the display will be
updated to reflect the data acquired up to that point.
To then start a new Statistics session, press the Reset
function key. If you resume acquisition by pressing
Run/Stop (instead of restarting statistics by pressing
Reset), the maximum response time fields will include
the time that acquisition was halted.
• The number of triggers that can be used is dependent
on the type of trigger and the nature of the traffic being
monitored.
)
TEKELEC
K-2
11/15/89
APPENDIX L:
TTL INTERFACE MODULE
Introduction
The TTL interface is a standard Chameleon 32 interface
module. It provides access to a serial I/O port at TTL voltage
levels.
This module functions in the same way as the V-series
modules (V.24, V.35, V.36), but signal levels conform to TTL
specifications. The module will support Monitoring and
Simulation in both DeE and DTE modes.
The module can be used to:
•
interface a Chameleon 32 to a Chameleon 8{)00
(A sample application and the required cable are available
as Part Number 999-2003).
•
interface a Chameleon 32 to any other device using TTL
logic.
This module is selected as the physical interface by selecting
the V-Type Interface.
TEKELEC
L-l
4:20,90
App. L: TTL Interface
Chameleon User's Guide
Interface Module
Figure L.1' shows the TTL Interface module as viewed from the
rear· of the machine. Note that it has two connectors and a
bank of DIP switches.
0
100000000\
0
TEKELEC - CHAMELEON 20132
P1
.................
.................
NOTE: TTL LEVEL SIGNALS
P2
.\ .............
............ / .
ICAUTION I
Disconnecl Device trom
Primary Mains before
remcwi
module.
0
'''is
0
Figure L 1: The TTL Interface
Pl
The first connector is a 34 pin flat ribbon cable
connector. This connector is convenient for cabling to a
PCB or breadboard.
P2
The second connector is a 08-258 connector. It has
the same logical pin out as a V.24 I R8-232 connector.
This connector is convenient for cabling using standard
DB25 hardware and cables.
Switches
The DIP switches are accessible from the outside of the
machine. They provide programmable signal polarity
and other features.
The details of these will be
described later in this chapter.
TEKELEC
L-2
4"20/90
Chameleon User's Guide
Specifications
App. L: TTL Interface
The TTL Interface module conforms to the following
specifications:
•
•
•
•
Minimum output high voltage
Maximum output low voltage
Minimum input high voltage
Maximum input low voltage
2.4V
0.6V
2.0V
O.BV
•
•
Maximum low level output current
Maximum high. level output current
24mA
-3.2mA
•
Maximum input low current ( pullup )
2.smA
•
Maximum short circuit"Current (1 alP)
1SOmA
•
•
Maximum input voltage
Minimum Input voltage
6.0V
-O.sV
Notes: 1.
2.
Exceeding the short circuit current or
maximum/minimum input voltage specifications
will damage the interface.
All lines are pulled up to + SV internally via a 2.2
Kohm resistor. This is to prevent pickup of noise.
on unconnected pins. Other termination
configurations are possible (220/330 etc.).
Contact Tekelec if different termination schemes
are required.
The interconnect cable provided with the interface kit is
described later in this chapter.
If you intend to construct additional cables for use with this
interface, standard TTL deSign rules should be observed.
•
Cables should not be over 6 feet in length.
they will be under 3 feet.
•
Shielded, twisted pairs are preferable.
Note:
TEKELEC
Preferably,
Crosstalk and other cable effects may seriously affect
the operation of this interface at high clock and data
rates.
L-3
4/20/90
App. L: TTL Interface
Chameleon User's Guide
TIL Interface
Connectors
The pin outs for the two connectors on the module are shown
in Figures L.2 and L.3.
Figure L.2 shows the connections for the 34 pin ribbon cable
connector (P1). This table shows the ISO CCT Number, signal
description and the direction of the signal when simulating a
DCE, simulating a DTE and monitoring. Any pins not shown in
this table are not connected.
PIN
No.
ISO CCT
Number
2
105
3
7
114
·104
8
DESCRIPTION
(or mnemonic)
SIGNAL DIRECTION
DCE
DTE
MON
In
Out
In
Transmit clock
Out
In
In
Receive data
Out
In
In
103
Transmit data
In
Out
In
10
107
Data set ready
Out
In
In
11
102
Signal ground
12
102
Signal ground
RTS
13
+ 5 volts (switch select)
.14
+ 5 volts (switch select)
17
109
Data carrier Detect
Out
In
In
20
108
Data terminal ready
In
Out
In
22
102
Signal ground
23
115
Receive clock
Out
In
In
24
125
Ring indicator
Out
In
In
27
106
Clear to send
Out
In
In
31
-12 volts Oumper sel.)
32
-12 volts Oumper sel.)
33
+ 12 volts (jumper sel.)
34
+ 12 volts (jumper sel.)
Figure L2: P1 Connector - 34 Pin Ribbon Cable
Notes:
1. See DIP switch description for Signal polarity control and
other configuration information.
2. + S Volt power is available at the interface if DIP Switch 8 is
ON. This is provided for use as a reference voltage only.
No more than SOmA should be drawn from this circuit.
3. + 12 Volt and ·12 Volt power is available from the interface
by shorting jumper posts JP1 and JP2 on the PCB inside
the module. The default condition is not to supply power to
the interface. Current draw from + 12V or -12V must not
exceed SOmA.
TEKELEC
L-4
App. L: TTL Interface
Chameleon User's Guide
Figure L.3 shows the connections for the 25 pin connector
(P2).
This table shows the ISO CCT Number, signal
description and the direction of the signal when simulating a
DCE, simulating a DTE and monitoring. Any pins not shown in
this table are not connected.
PIN
No.
ISO CCT
Number
2
103
3
DESCRIPTION
(or mnemonic)
SIGNAL DIRECTION
DCE
DTE
MON
Transmit data
In
Out
In
104
Receive data
Out
In
In
4
105
Request to send
In
Out
In
5
106
Clear to send
Out
In
In
6
107
Data set ready
Out
In
In
7
102
Signal ground
8
109
Data carrier Detect
Out
In
In
15
114
Transmit clock
Out
In
In
17
115
Receive clock
Out
In
In
20
108
Data terminal ready
In
Out
In
22
125
Ring indicator
Out
In
In
Figure L.3: P2 Connector - 25 Pin D-Sub
Notes:
TEKELEC
1. See the DIP switch description for signal polarity control
and other configuration in.formation.
L·5
4'20'90
Chameleon User's Guide
App. L: TIL Interface
DIP Switch
C~nfiguration
The bank of switches accessible through the module control
the polarity of certain signals on the TTL interface.
The
switches can also be used to disable certain handshake
signals when they are unused.
The default setting of all switches as shipped is OFF.
SWITCH
SWITCH ON
SWITCH OFF (Default)
1
Invert circuit 103 TxData
Do not invert 103 TxData
2
Invert circuit 104 RxData
Do not invert 104 RxData
3
Invert circuit t 14 TxClock
Do not invert' 14 TxClock
4
Invert circuit 115 RxClock
Do not invert 115 RxClock
5
Invert 105-109,125
Do not invert 105-109.125
S
Enable 105-109,125
Disable '05-109,125
7
Reserved
Reserved
8
Supply + 5V to Pl
Do not supply + 5V to P 1
Figure L4: DIP Switch Configuration
Notes:
TEKELEC
1.
Switch 6, in the OFF position, disables all non-data or
clock lines. This prevents unused lines from picking up
spurious noise and causing excessive interrupts to the
CH32 front end acquisition hardware.
It is recommenced that Switch 6 be left in the OFF
position at all times unless circuits 105-109 and 125 are
required.
2.
The default polarity of the signals is inverted with respect
to V.24/AS-232 logic levels.
As V.24 drivers and
receivers are usually inverting, this allows direct
connection to TTL compatible devices that would
normally be used with discrete V.24 drivers/receivers.
In the event the circuit signals are of different polarity,
switches 1-5 may be used to invert the logical levels of
the data, clock and handshake signals.
L-S
4'20!90
App. M: Remote Control Via Modem
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
APPENDIX M:·
REMOTE CONTROL VIA MODEM
Introduction
Required
Equipment
This appendix describes how to interconnect .Chameleon
20/32 test systems using dial-up modems. This enables you
to remotely control a Chameleon from another Chameleon.
The following equipment is required to interconnect two
Chameleon systems for remote control via modem:
•
Two Chameleon 20 or Chameleon 32 machines (any
combination)
•
Two dial-up modems of similar types
Any asynchronous serial dial-up modems can be used;
however, tor maximum utility, modems with the following
features are recommended:
Capable of originating calls (dialing)
Capable of auto-answer
Highest baud rate possible (1200 baud or higher)
Hayes AT or compatible
•
Equipment
Setup
TEKELEC
Chameleon cable option 932-5001-01 which can be
purchased from T ekelec or can be made to conform to
the diagram on page M-8.
The Chameleon being operated remotely is referred to as the
slave Chameleon. The Chameleon operating the remote
Chameleon is referred to as the master Chameleon.
M-1
9/4190
App. M: Remote Control Via Modem
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Slave Chameleon
Setup
To set up .the slave Chameleon, perform the following steps:
1.
Attach the modem to the Remote I/O port (Remote
Control port on the Chameleon 20) using a cable as
described on page 6. This cable. configuration is wired
specifically for the Chameleon.
2.
Attach the. modem to the telephone line, following the
modem manufacturer's instructions.
3.
Configure the modem, following
manufacturer's instructions, as follows:
the
modem
•
Enable automatic answer
•
Activate RS232 Carrier Detect (DCD) when carrier
is detected. This is required by the Chameleon.
•
Configure all other setting.s to be suitable for the
modem and the line condition. Note that these
must match the modem settings that you set at the
master Chameleon.
4.
Power up the modem, and then the Chameleon.
5.
On the Chameleon, press Shift Utilities to invoke the
Utilities banner.
6.
Press Shift Hide Page to display the Utilities menu, as
shown in the following figure.
. .. ".
.....
.
.....-------------------fjII:iI:il::::~l:~~iii"::,it':::r':'::'•
Utilities Menu
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
TEKELEC
Remote I/O Port Setup
Printer Setup
Set Date and Time
Traffic Load/Save
Chameleon II File Conversion
Check Free Disk Space
Kermit/Connect Mode Setup
BacKup/Restore Menu
FMS File Conversion
M-2
9/4190
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
App. M: Remote Control Via Modem
7.
Press F1 Remote I/O Port Setup to display the
menu for the Remote I/O port, as shown below.
setup
Term; nal Setup Menu
Compatible Termi nal Type
Baud Rate
CHAM32 +-
Number of Data Bits
Number of Stop Bits
Parity
Configuration Files
After making selections Press
8.
9600
8
2
None
None
GO
Select the following configuration parameter values:
Terminal Type CHAM32
Baud Rate
(Select according
requirement)
Data Bits
8
Stop Bits
2
Parity
None
to
modem
9.
Save this configuration with the file name TERMINAL.OF,
which is the default setup file. This will allow the slave
Chameleon to be automatically configured for remote
control when it boots up unattended.
10.
Press Go to initialize the Remote I/O port using the
displayed parameters.
11 .
Press F10 Exit to exit the setup menu.
12.
Press F10 Exit to exit the Utilities menu.
The slave Chameleon is now ready to be remotely
controlled. This machine can now be powered up and
r~motely controlled without further human intervention.
TEKELEC
M-3
9/4190
App. M: Remote Control Via Modem
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Master Chameleon
Setup
To set up the master Chameleon, perform the following steps:
1.
Attach the modem to the Aux 2 serial port using a cable
as described on page 7.
2.
Attach the modem to the telephone line, following the
modem manufacturer's instructions.
3.
Configure the modem, following
manufacturer's instructions, as follows:
the
modem
•
Originate (dial) call
•
Configure all other settings to be suitable for the
modem and the line condition. Note that these
must match the modem settings that you set at the
master Chameleon
4.
Power up the modem, and then the Chameleon.
5.
On the Chameleon, press Shift Utilities to invoke the
Utilities menu.
6.
Press Shift Hide Page to display the Utilities menu, as
shown in the figure below.
Utilities Menu
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Fa
F9
Remote I/O Port Setup
Printer Setup
Set Date and Time
Traffic load/Save
Chameleon II File Conversion
ChecK Free DisK Space
Kermit/Connect Mode Setup
BacKup/Restore Menu
FMS File Conversion
Utilities
TEKELEC
Menu
M-4
9/4190
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
7.
App. M: Remote Control Via Modem
Press F7 Kermit/Connect Mode Setup to access the
setup menu for the Aux 2 serial port, as shown below.
Kermit/Connect Mode Setup
Baud Rate
Number of Data Bits
Number of Stop Bits
Parity
Fil e Type
Number of Retransmissions
Transmission Interval
Configuration Files
9600 ....
8
1
None
Binary
6
3_Sec
None
After making selections Press
GO
Kermit Connect Mode Setup Menu
8.
9.
TEKELEC
Select the following configuration parameter values:
Baud Rate
(Select according to the modem's
requirements. It must be the same
baud rate as configured on the
slave Chameleon.)
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Parity
8
2
None
This setup must match the slave Remote JlO port setup.
Save this configuration with the file name KERMIT.OF,
which is the default Aux 2 serial port setup file. This will
allo~ the master Chameleon to automatically use remote
control when booted, without reconfiguring the Aux 2
serial port.
10.
Press Go to initialize the port using the displayed
parameters.
11.
Press F10 Exit to exit the setup menu.
12.
Press F10 Exit to exit the Utilities menu.
9/4190
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
App. M: Remote Control Via Modem
13.
Press Files to invoke the File Management menu.
14.
Press F9 Connect.
into terminal mode.
This puts the master Chameleon
You should now be able to communicate directly with the
modem. With a Hayes-compatible modem, to connect to
the modem, type the attention string:
+++
Establishing the
Connection
Once the Chameleons and modems are correctly configured
and the master Chameleon is in terminal mode, you can dial
the telephone number of the slave Chameleon from the
keyboard of the master Chameleon. For Hayes Compatible
modems, dial:
atdtphonenumber
< Return >
phonenumber is the. telephone number of the line connected
to the slave modem. The modem of the slave Chameleon will
then answer and a connection will be established. At this
point. the master Chameleon screen will be blank. To refresh
(update) the screen, on the master Chameleon, press:
You should then see the screen of the slave machine.on the
master machine. Please note the following:
TEKELEC
•
The screen update will be at modem speeds. This is
substantially slower than the internal update rate of a
Chameleon.
In addition, the Chameleon uses an
algorithm to attempt to update the screen over slow lines
in the minimum time. If you are scrolling the display, the
remote display may be unintelligible until scrolling stops.
•
On the master Chameleon, the slave screen will a/ways
have a black background color. This is to help you
distinguish between master and slave screens on the
master Chameleon.
•
If the master screen becomes corrupted, refresh the
screen by pressing Tab twice.
•
On the slave Chameleon, the screen will display
normally, as if it were being controlled by the local
keyboard. The slave keyboard will remain active during
remote control.
M-6
9/4190
App. M: Remote Control Via Modem
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
•
If you wish to exit terminal mode so that you can perform
an action on the master while on-line to the slave, do the
following:
1.
Press Shift Cancel. This exits terminal mode and
returns the master machine to normal control. Note
that this does not terminate the connection between
the two machines.
2.
Perform the operation on the master.
3.
To return to terminal mode, on the master
Chameleon, do the following:
a.
b.
c.
Terminating
the Connection
Press Files to invoke File Management.
Press F9 Connect.
Press Tab twice to refresh the master screen.
To terminate the remote control session, you must hang up
the line from the Chameleon master. With Hayes-compatible
m9dems, this requires the following sequence:
a.
Type: + + +. The screen will attempt to update.
b.
Type: ath. The modem will hang up.
c.
Press Shift Cancel.
The master Chameleon exits
terminal mode and returns to normal mode.
The slave will be usable locally immediately; however, the
modem may not hang up after loss of carrier for some time
(depending on the modem type). You cannot re-establish a
connection between the master and slave until the slave
modem has hung up.
TEKELEC
M-7
9/4190
App. M: Remote Control Via Modem
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Cable
Requirements
A special cable is required for this application. Chameleon
Cable 932-5001-01 is available as an option from Tekelec or
you can construct a cable following the diagram below.
Connector B
Male DB25P
Chameleon Remote I/O Port
Connector A
Male D825P
Modem
Pin
Pin
2 ---------------------------------- 3
3 ---------------------------------- 2
6 ---------------------------------- 20
7 ---------------------------------- 7
20
----------------------------?----.
i
8
I
i
.. ----- 4
TEKELEC
M-8
9/4/90
GLOSSARY
GLOSSARY
ADCCP
Advance Data Communications Control Procedure.
A bitoriented protocol developed by ANSI. ADCCP defines three
LAP link level access procedures: SNRM (Set Normal
Response Mode), SARM (Set Asynchronous Response Mode),
and SABM (Set Asynchronous Balance Mode).
Address
1) A location that can be specifically referred to in a software
program.
2) The identification of a physically and/or logically distinct
entity in a network.
Alphanumeric
Characters
Upper and lower case alphabet letters from A to Z and the
numerals 0 to 9.
AMI Coding
Alternate Mark Inversion Coding. A technique for encoding
data using a three state signal to convey binary digits in which
successive digits are of alternating positive and negative
polarity, but equal in amplitude (and in which zeros are of zero
amplitude ).
Analysis
The process of passively monitoring a data communications
link to display the traffic in a format designed to permit
meaningful evaluation.
ANSI
American National Standards Institute. A group affiliated with
ISO that establishes standards for transmission codes,
protocols, high level languages, and so forth .
. Application
Layer
The seventh layer defined by ISO in its seven layer OSI (Open
System Interconnect) model. This layer provides users with
access to the OSI environment and distributed information
services.
ASCII
American National Standard Code for Information Interchange.
A coded character set of 7-bit coded characters, and a parity
bit used for data communications, which defines 128
characters.
Async
Tekelec's Asynchronous Simulation software.
Asynchronous
Refers to events that occur without regular timed relationships
to other events or clocks.
.
TEKELEC
Gloss-1
8/17/89
GLOSSARY
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Asynchronous
Communication
A method of data communications characterized by the use of
local rather than system clocks. Synchronization is maintained
via a leading (start) bit and at least one trailing (stop) bit per
character.
AT&T
American Telephone and Telegraph Company.
B Channels
Channels that are provided for data transmission in ISDN at 64
Kbps; with PRI, 23 channels are provided for this purpose. (In
BRI,2 channels are provided.)
B8ZS Coding
Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution Coding. Consists of an AMI
encoded signal using a technique for meeting ones density
requirements on 1.544 Mbps facilities by using a special
pattern of coding violations as a substitute for an all zero byte.
BCC
Block Check Character.
BCD
Binary Coded Decimal. A notation in which each decimal digit
is represented by four binary digits.
BOP
Protocols that rely on positional
Bit Oriented Protocol.
significance and coded control fields, such as HOLC, LAPB,
and SOLC.
BOS
Bit Oriented Signaling. One at two signaling techniques used
with OMI. The separate channel provides a multiplex of the
per channel signaling bits which are used in T carrier
signaling.
BPS
Bits Per Second.
BSC
Binary Synchronous Communication. A character-oriented
protocol in half-duplex designed by IBM in 1964.
Baud
A measure of data rate equal to the number of bits per
second.
Binary Code
A numbering code that is based on only two characters or
states, usually zero and one.
Bisync
Tekelec's BSC Simulation software package.
Bisynchronous
A method of transmission, based on synchronous system
clocks, and a defined SYNC character used to synchronize the
transmitter and receiver. The SYNC characters (tor example,
32. 16, or 96 in HEX) are transmitted prior to data and usually
in pairs.
.
TEKELEC
Gloss-2
8117/89
GLOSSARY
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Bit
Bit-oriented
Protocols
Boolean
Operators
Break Sequence
Broadband
Channel
The smallest information unit, named as a contraction of
Binary digiT.
A protocol in which each bit may have independent
significance and without octet alignment.
An operator such as AND, OR and NOT used in Boolean
algebra applied tb logical units. The result of any operation is
restricted to either zero or one (true or false).
Interruption in a transmission, often permits ", controlled
terminal to interrupt its controller.
Transmission channel with a bandwidth wider than that
required for transmitting voice signals.
Bug
A hardware or software problem causing malfunctions.
Buffer
A storage medium that holds blocks of data being transferred
between devices.
CCIS
Common-Channel Inter-office Signaling. A signaling system
developed for use between central office switching stations
(with stored program control).
ccrrr
International Telegraph and Telephone Consultive Committee.
An international standards organization.
Chameleon
1) A small animal characterized by its ability to change its skin
color to match its environment.
2) Tekelec's Simulator/Analyzer which adapts to the needs of
a data communications environment.
Chameleon BASIC
A generic programming language based on BASIC developed
by Tekelec. The commands and functions are used in
Tekelec's FRAMEM, SIMP/L, Bisync, and Async Simulators.
Character
Term often used to refer to an eight bit pattern in a code.
Clock
Equipment used in a transmission system that provides a time
base to control certain functions, such as the the duration of
signal element, and the sampling.
Command,
Direct
TEKELEC
A command in Chameleon BASIC which is executed
immediately, and is unnumbered (no line number).
Gloss-3
8/17/89
GLOSSARY
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Command,
Statement
Communications
Processor
A type of computer used for processing the overhead of data
communication (allowing the CPU to concentrate on the
applications).
"
Control Field
Eight or sixteen bits of information following the address in a
BOP frame, consisting of the number of transmissions
received count, a poll/final bit, the number of transmissions
sent count, and a concluding bit.
CPU
Central Processing Unit.
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check. A check word generated by a
polynomial sequence that allows errors to be detected. It is
sent with the transmission and checked after being
recalculated by the receiver.
D-Channel
The 24th channel used with DMI for common channel call setup and tear-down signaling.
·04 Framing
.
A command in Chameleon BASIC which is preceded by a line
number. It is stored in memory, and executed according to
line number sequence when the entire program is run.
Framing format used on most existing 1.544 Mbps facilities;
Data bits
The number of data" bits specifies the number of significant
bits in an asynchronous transmission .
Data Endpoint
The point at which the DMI channel protocol is terminated.
Data Endpoints may be at the Host or at the PBX, at terminal
equipments, or terminal adapters behind the PBX.
Data Mode 0
The data channel protocol mode which supports clear 64 Kbps
data transmission.
Data Mode 1
The data channel protocol mode which supports 56 Kbps data
transmission.
Data Mode 2
The data channel protocol mode which supports standard
synchronous or asynchronous data transmission up to 19.2
Kbps using HOLC-type framing to perform rate adaptation.
Data Mode 3
The data channel protocol that supports virtual circuit service
for statistical multiplexing of data streams.
Datapac
The Canadian X.25 Packet Switching Network.
(
TEKELEC
Gloss-4
8117/89
GLOSSARY
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
DCE
Data Circuit Terminating Equipment.
Decimal Code
System in which each numeric position may be anyone of ten
states.
Default
Condition which is set or occurs automatically when no
instructions are stated to the contrary ..
Dial Pulses
Interruptions in loop of a calling end. The interruptions consist
of the breaking and making of the dial pulse contacts when a
digit is dialed.
DMI
Digital Multiplexed Interface. DMI refers to:
1) The requirements and specifications for multiplexed data
communication over digital facilities, between a Host
computer and a PBX.
2) The actual interface that allows the above communication.
DSO
Digital Signal level O. The term used widely in North America
for the basic digital channel rate (64 Kbps).
DS1
Digital Signal level 1. The term used widely in North America
for the first level 1.544 Mbps PCM multiplex signal.
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment.
EBCDIC
Extended Binary-Coded Decimal Interchange Code.
8-bit coded characters, defined by IBM.
Encode
Conversion of a character into a specific bit pattern.
FE Framing
Extended Framing Format. This format is replacing the 04
format in North America on 1.544 Mbps facilities.
It
incorporates error measuring and a data link, in addition to
providing framing.
FIFO
First In, First Out. Term used to describe sequential flow of
data through a buffer.
Flow Control
In general, a method of maintaining the orderly flow of data
traffic across a data link. Also, the use of buffers and controls
to avoid loosing data during transmission.
Fox Message
A sentence reading: THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER A
LAZY DOG'S BACK 1234567890, containing all the
alphanumeric characters. Several variations are commonly
used.
TEKELEC
Gloss-S
A set of
8117/89
GLOSSARY
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Frame
Frame
Alignment
A logical grouping of data and control information usually used
to define a bit-oriented sequence.
.
The state in which the frame of the receiving equipment is
correctly phased with respect to that of the received signal.
Frame Level
The second or link level access procedure defined by ISO in
its seven layer OSI (Open System Interconnect) model.
FRAMEM
Tekelec's FRAMe EMulator software package.
Full Duplex
Communications in which transmission occurs simultaneously
in two directions.
Glare
Occasional simultaneous seizures occurring at both ends of a
two-way channel tie-trunk signaling system. Glare conditions
may be minimized, but not completely eliminated.
HOLe
High-level Data Link Control. A bit-oriented protocol specified
by ISO.
Half-Duplex
Describes communications in which transmission occurs in two
directions, but not simultaneously.
Hexadecimal
A numbering code which is based on 16 characters, or states.
These characters are 0 - 9 and A-F.
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
I-Field
The data portion of an· Information frame in bit-oriented
protocols.
I-Frame
A bit-oriented protocol frame containing an I-Field.
Inpulse
Incoming dial pulse.
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network.
ISO
International Standards Organization.
Input-Output (1/0)
Device
A system component used to transfer data between the main
storage and other devices.
Interface
The physical connection between two devices.
Interface Signal
A method of physical signaling defined by various
specifications such as V.24, V.35, V.36, RS232, and RS449.
KBPS
Kilobits Per Second.
TEKELEC
G/oss-6
8/17/89
GLOSSARY
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Link Level
The second or link level access procedure defined by ISO in
its seven layer OSI (Open System Interconnect) model.
LMA
Loss of Multiframe Alignment. Indicates a loss of signaling
integrity. Must be declared if a Multiframe Alignment Error
(MER) occurs in at. least 3 out of 5 consecutive frames.
Logical Channel
One of 4095 logical communications paths defined by the
CCITT X.25 Recommendations.
LRC
Longitudinal Redundancy Check.
An a-bit block check
character calculated by a polynomial used for error detection.
Mark
The signal or communications channel state corresponding to
binary one. Occurs when the current flows, or when the
voltage is less than -3 V.
MBPS
Megabits Per Second.
MHz
Megahertz.
MER
Multiframe Alignment Error. Used .to indicate an error in the
signaling framing. In signaling frames 1 to 23, a MER is
defined as an error in the multiframe alignment sequence. In
signaling frame 24, it is defined as either an error in the
multiframe alignment sequence, andlor an error in one or
more multiframe alignment signal bits.
Mnemonic Codes
Operations translated to a symbolic notation to facilitate human
recognition and memory. They must be converted back to
their original binary bit patterns by a compiler (or other device)
before a· computer can interpret them.
The symbolic
representations, for example SABM, are called mnemonics.
Mnemonic Table
A . table showing the names of mnemonics, their binary
equivalents, and representation in other codes.
Modem
A communications device that modulates digital signals at the
transmitting end, and demodulates them at the receiving end.
The name is a contraction of modulate and demodulate.
Modulo 8
A finite number system (0 - 7) used to count the number of
frames sent and received on a line [N(s) and N(r)].
Modulo 128
An expanded finite number system (0 - 127) that counts the
number of frames sent and received on a line [N(s) and N(r)].
Modulus
In a finite number system, the modulus is the exact number of
integers available.
TEKELEC
Gloss-7
8117/89
GLOSSARY
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
MOS
Message Oriented Signaling. One of two signaling techniques
used with OMI, and designed to eventually replace 8it
Oriented Signaling (80S). Provides a high functionality control
mechanism. that allows features such as endpoint parameter
negotiation, improved maintenance procedures, and better call
set-up .and tear-down. The data link layer protocol is LAPO.
Multi-Point
Refers to a line with more than two stations connected.
NRZ
Non-Return to Zero encoding.
NRZI
Non-Return to Zero Inverted enCOding.
Network
A system of connected devices used for communications.
Network Layer
The third level defined by ISO in its seven layer OSI (Open
System Interconnect) model, responsible for establishing,
maintaining, and terminating connections.
Off-Hook
Connected state.
On-Hook
Disconnected state.
Outpulse
An outgoing dial pulse.
Packet
A subdivision of a message. In packet switching operations, a
message that exceeds a maximum defined length is broken
.
into smaller units, c·alled packets.
Packet Level
The third level of the ISO model, also defined by' CCITT
specifications.
Packet Switching
A method of transmitting messages through a communication
network, in which messages are subdivided into short packets.
Pages
Chameleon 32's unique windowing system that allows the
screen to be shared between several applications.
Each
active application program has its own page that can be
overl.apped to display multiple pages simultaneously.
Parity Bit
A zero or one check bit added to a byte to force the total
number of the binary one digits to be always odd or always
even.
Parity Checking
An error checking method in which character bit patterns are
forced into parity (odd or even) by adding a one or zero parity
bit to the transmission.
TEKELEC
Gloss-8
8/17/89
GLOSSARY
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
PBX
Private Branch Exchange. A private switching system, either
manual or automatic, usually serving a businesss, and located
on the customer's premises.
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation. Conversion ·of an analog signal, such
as voice, to a digital format in the form of binary-coded pusles
representing the quantized amplitude samples of the analog
signal.
Physical Link
Layer
The first level defined by ISO in its seven layer OSI (Open
System Interconnect) model, concerned with transmission of
unstructured bit stream over the physical medium.
Point-to-Point
Refers to a line with exactly two stations.
Poll/Final Bit
The fifth bit (low to high order) used for various signaling tasks
in the AOCCP subset SABM, SARM, and SNRM.
PRSS
Pseudo-Random Bit Sequence.
Presentation
Layer
The sixth layer defined by ISO in its seven layer OSI (Open
System Interconnect) model, provides independence to the
application processes from differences in data representation.
Primary Rate
The term used in ISDN documentation to describe the first
level for PCM transmission systems. There are two versions
of Primary Rate Access: 1.544 Mbps and 2.048 Mbps (CEPT).
Primary Station
The main station in a network. In an SOLC environment, the
primary station is usually a front-end processor.
Protocol
A set of rules and procedures for establishing and controlling
communication on a line.
Protocol Specific
Used in this manual to refer to commands that are only used
with a particular software package.
Pseudo-user
A portion of the Chameleon's SITREX code which is a logical
entity capable of supporting a logical communications channel.
QRSS
Quasi-:Random Bit Sequence.
RAM
Random Access Memory.
RMA
Remote Multiframe Alarm. Indicates loss of signaling integrity
at the far end. Implies a terminal' equipment failure rather than
a facility failure.
TEKELEC
Gloss-9
8/17/89
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Robbed Bit
Signaling
GLOSSARY
Signaling. in which digit time slots primarily used for the
transmission of encoded speed are periodically used for
signaling.
RS232C
Specifications publisned by the Electronic' Industries
Association (EIA) for mechanical and electrical interface
standards.
RS449
Specifications published by the Electronic Industries
Association (EIA) that provides mechanical and electrical
interface standards.
RZ
Return to Zero. A line code that returns to zero level half way
through the bit interval. This provides a pulse for each "one"
bit.
SNA
Systems Network Architecture, developed by IBM.
SOLC
Synchronous Data Link Control. A bit-oriented protocol used
. as the link access procedure for IBM's SNA.
SIMP/L
Tekelec's Simulated Interactive' Multi-Protocol Language
software packages used to simulate SDLC, HOLC, and LAPD
protocols with the Chameleon 32.
Scenario
A .series of commands structured into a program used. in
Tekelec's SITREX software.
Secondary Station
Any station controlled by a primary station. Usually a terminal
controller.
Session Layer
The fifth level defined by ISO in its seven layer OSI (Open
System Interconnect) model, establishes, manages, and
terminates sessions between applications.
Signal
An intentional introduction of energy onto a line to transmit
information.
Simulation
When one device imitates the functional behavior of another.
The simulator will transmit and receive the same data and
produce results identically to the simulated device.
SITREX
The Chameleon 32's automatic X.25 Simulator that allows
generation of scenarios in an X.25 environment and creation of
normal or abnormal situations to troubleshoot an X.25
Subscriber or Network.
TEKELEC
Gloss-tO
8117/89
GLOSSARY
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Space·
The signal or communications channel state corresponding to
binary zero. Occurs when no current flows or when the
voltage is more than + 3 V.
Split Screen
A CRT divided into two independent sections vertically.
Start Bit
A signal. used to indicate the beginning of a character
transmission in asynchronous protocols.
Stop Bit
The quiescent state usually one, one and half, or two bits long
following the transmission of a character in asynchronous
transmissions.
..
The internal variables used to maintain the state of a specific
data communications device.
State Variables
Station
Input or output devices within a system.
Subscriber
A device using the services of a network, such as an X.25
network.
Supervisory
Frames
A type of frame used to enforce flow control in bit-oriented
protocols.
TOM
Time Division Multiplexing. A method of serving a number of
simultaneous channels over a common transmission path by
assigning the transmission path sequentially to the various
channels, each assignment being for a discrete time interval.
Terminal
An input or output device used to send data to or receive data
from another device in the system.
Transmission Mode
Control Byte
An eight bit word used in Tekelec' s Bisync software to provide
instructions to the hardware designating the procedure for
handling frames.
Trace
An analysis function within Tekelec's Simulation software in
which each frame transmitted or received on the line is stored.
Transport Layer
The fourth level defined by ISO in its seven layer OSI (Open
System Interconnect) model, provides transparent transfer of
data between end points, end-to-end error recovery, and flow
control.
Trigger
The definition of a condition or event used to initiate a
specified action.
TEKELEC
Gloss-11
8/17/89
Chameleon 32 User's Guide
Transparency
Unnumbered
Frame
GLOSSARY
A transmission mode which suspends the recognition of
control characters so that any bit pattern may be transmitted
as data..
A type of frame used for a variety of control functions in bitoriented protocols. U-frames do not carry sequence numbers,
and do not alter the sequencing or flow of numbered I-frames.
Video Attribute
The way a character is displayed on a CRT screen, for
example color, blinking, half intensity, reverse video, bold, or
italics.
Window
The maximum number of frames which may be outstanding or
unacknowledged during transmission at any time.
Write Protected
A disk or file which cannot be erased or written over.
X.2S
A set of packet switching standards developed by the CCITT.
TEKELEC
GlosS-12
8/17/89
INDEX
A.
AC Voltage Selection, 1-1
Acquisition, ~24
256k Data Capture, App. K
Buffer, 1-8, 3-12, 4-15
Run/Stop Key. 3-30
ACTIONS, Triggering; 8-44
Add new trigger, 8-7
Analysis,
Analysis Page. General Features of, 4-2
Applications, 4-1
Baud Rate,
Calculation of, 4-4
Changes. 4-4
Buffer, 4-15
Colors, 4-3
Control Keys, 4-10
Ctrl B, 4-10
Ctrl C, 4-11
Ctrl E, 4-11
Ctrl N, 4-11
Ctrl P, 4-11
Ctrl Z, 4-14
Data, Saving, 4-1
DCElDTE Display, 4-2
Event,
Incomplete, Display of, 4-4
Overwritten message, 4-16
Files, Function Keys, 4-9
Function Keys, Analysis:
Fl,4-6,
F2,4-7
F3,4-8
F4-F9,4-8
FlO, 4-8
History Page, 4-1, 4-2
Buffer, 4-15
Ctrl + P, Use of, 4-11
Features of, 4-17
Freeze, 4-18
History Lock, 4-17
History Display Commands, 4-18
Printing, Methods of, 4-:-11
Incomplete Event Display, 4-4
Interface Lead Transitions, 4-3
Overwritten Event,
Mechanism,
Message, 4-16
Printing,
Data, 4-11
Methods of, 4-12
Real-TIme Page, 4-1, 4-2
Replay traffic. 6-4
RUN/STOP.
SS7. 4-10. 4-14
Save Traffic. 4-1. 6-1 • 6-3. 6-6
Search, Protocol parameters, 4-14
Starting, 4-1
TIme Stamping. 4-4
use of, 4-3, 4-17
User Data, 4-8
Application Selections Menu.
1-9,3-17, 3-28
Function Keys. 3-20
F1 Load/Stop A, 3-20. 3-28
F2 Load B. 3-28
F3 Load AB, 3-28
F6 Reset, 3-21
F7 Menu, 3-21
F8 Save, 3-22
F9 Set T.O., 3-23
FlO Exit, 3-23
Monitoring Applications, 3-18
Simulation Applications, 3-18
Stopping Applications, 3-24
Applications
Monitoring, 3-18
Simulation, 3-18
Starting, 3-20
Stopping, 3-23, 3-24
ASCII keys, 3-36
Aux Serial Port 1, 2-5
Connector Pinouts, c-4
Aux Serial Port 2, 2-5
Connector Pinouts, c-4
B.
Back up files (to floppy), 9-24
Basic Rate Interface. p-4, 1-6, 3-13
Overlay, E-7
Battery, Lithium, installation of, A-2
BERT
Une Synchronization, 11-17
Procedure for using, 11-2
Pattern Editor, 11-13
Run-Time Display, 11-15
Setup Menus, 11:...s
ASYNC, 11-6
ISDN PRI, 11-7
ISDN 2B1Q and BRI, 11-7
SYNC, 11-6
Setup parameters, 11-8, 11-9
Testing configurations, 11-1
Bit Error Rate Testing (See BERT)
Board Configurations, A-2
Index-1. 09/27/91
INDEX
Booting, 1-3
Autoboot Timer, 3-16, 3-23
D~FAIJLT configuration, 3-14
Butters
Acquisition, 1-8, 3-12, 4-15
Event. 5-1
c.
C Development System (See Vol IV)
Applications, 3-19, 10-6
Features, p-3
Ubraries, p-4
ccrrr ISUP, Triggering on, 8-35
CC!TT TUP, Triggering on, 8-33
Cancel key, 3-35
Card Cage, 2-8
Chameleon II File Conversion, 9-16
Change Directory, 1O-S
Clock, Real TIme, 2-8, 3-24, 3-30
Co-Oirectional Interlace (G.703), App. J
Configuration Menu, 3-3, 3-27
Capture Mode, 3-12
Description, 3-4
Function Keys, 3-13
F1 - F5, 3-13
F6 Setup, 3-13
F7 Physical. 3-13
Fa Version, 3-13
F9 Save, 3-14
FlO Set T.O, 3-15
Mode of Operation Parameter, 3-7
Monitoring Data Source, 3-11
Physical Interlace Parameter, 3-8
Protocol Parameter, 3-9
Red arrow cursor, 3-3
Setup Mode Parameter, 3-5
Connect Mode, 9-19
Control Keys (Analysis), 4-10
Ctrl S, 4-10
Ctrl C, 4-11
Ctrl E, 4-11
Ctrl N. 4-11
Ctrl p, 4-11
Ctrl S, 4-14
Ctrl U, 4-14
Ctri V,
Ctrl Z, 4-14
Conversion
645fl05 Analysis files, 9-16
FMS Files, 9-27
Copy files, 10-10
CRC Error, -12
Customer Support, 2-16,A-l
D.
Data Capture, 256 k, App. K
DASS 2 Triggering, 8-20
Delete files, 10-12
Delete trigger, 8-7
.
Device(s), external, triggering to, 8-53
Diagnostic Test (Hardware), 2-10
Coupler Test, 2-11
. Error Messages, 2-12
RAM Test. 2-14
Dired-To-Disk, 6-1 ff
Configuration, 3-11
General Notes, 4-1, 6-2
loading a File, 6-7
Recording Traffic, 6-3
Replaying Traffic, 6-4
Saving Data to a File, 6-6
Disk Copy, 10-15
Display (CRT). 2-7
Disk Drives, 2-8
DPC, formatting options, 8-22
DSCS Interlace Module, App. I
DTElDCE,8-12
Dualline Application
Introduction, 5-1
Dual Une vx. AnalYSiS, 5-1
Modes, 5-3
Run Mode, 5-3
Freeze Mode, 5-7
Dual Port p-5, 3-25
Analysis Control keys, 4-10
Applications Selection Menu, 3-28
Configuration, 3-27
lEO Display, 3-27
Run/Stop Key, 3-30
E.
Erasing trigger entries. 8-8
Error, CRC.( See CRC Error)
Event Overwritten Message, 4-16
External device(s), triggering to, 8-53
F.
Fast Mo(nitoring), p-6, App. K
File Management Menu
C Applications, 10-0 .
Change Diredory(Chdir-Fl}.10-8
Connect (F9), 10-21
Copy (Copy Files - F2), 10-10
Delete File ( F3), 10-12
Disk Copy (F6), 10-15
Index-2. 09/27/91
INDEX
File Format. 10-2
File Name Convention. 10-2
File Name Extensions. 1Q-4
Floppy Disk Directories. 10-2
Format Floppy Disk (F5), 10-14
Hard Disk Directories, 10-2
Hard Disk Directory Structure, 10-3
Ust Selector, 10-7
Menu Access, 10-6
Receive File (F8), 10-19
Redisplay files, 10-9
Rename (Rename File - F4), 10-13
Transmit File (F7), 10-16
View files, 10-9
File Name Convention, 10-2
File Name Extensions, 1Q-4
File Transfer
Connect Mode, 10-21
Kermit Setup, 9-19,10-16 to 10-21
Receive File, 10-19
Transmit File, 10-16
Files,
Function key, 3-5, 4-6, 4-9
Files (keyboard) key, 10-6
Floppy Disk Drive
Description, 2-8
Disk Storage, 1-3
Diskette Usage, 2-9
Protector, 1-2
FMS File Conversion , 9-29
Format floppy disk, 10-14
Formatting options, DPC/OPC, 8-22
Frame, 8-13
FramLen, 8-15
Freeze, History, 4-18
Front Panel, 2-3
Function Keys
Analysis, 4-6 to 4-8
Configuration, 3-4 to 3-23
Event. 5-5
Statistics. 7-2 to 7-8
Triggering, 8-7
G.
G.703 Co-Directional Interface. App. J
Go key, 3-35
H.
Hardware Self-Tests, 2-10
Coupler Test. 2-11
Error Messages, 2-12
RAM Test. 2-14
HDLC Triggering, 8-16
Help, 3-38
Hide Page key, 3-34, 3-37
Highlight/Search feature, 4-14
History Freeze. 4-18
History Lock. 4-17
History Page. 4-1, 4-2
History Display Commands, 4-18
I.
Incomplete Event Display, 4-4
Installation
Hardware, 1-1
Software. 2-15
Interface LEDs. 2-4, App. E
Internal Components, 2-6
Card Cage, 2-8
Disk Drives, 2-8
Display, 2-7
Power Supply, 2-9
Interpretation,
Perfonnance page, 7-9
ISUP, Triggering on. 8-34
J.
(No entries.)
K.
Keyboard,2-4,3-33
Arrow Keys, 3-36
ASCII Keys. 3-36
Dedicated Keys, 3-33
Function Keys. 3-39
Hex values. 9-8
Left-Hand Keys, 3-34
Remote tenninal. -9-7
Right-Hand Keys, 3-35
Kennit File Transfer, 9-19. 10-16 to
Index-3. 09/27/91
10-2~
INDEX
L.
Power Cord. 1-1
Ports
Aux Serial 1, 2-6, C-4
Aux Serial 2, 2-6. C-4
Video Connector, 2-6. C-5
Parallel Printer. 2-5, C-1
Remote I/O, 2-5. C-3
SCSI. 2-6. 0-1
Serial Printer. 2-5. C-2
Parallel Printer Port. 2-5
Connector Pinout. C-1
Port, triggering; 8-35
Power Switch, 1-2
Power Supply, 2-9
Power Up. 1-1
Primary Rate Interface. p-4 (See Vol II.
Chapter 11)
ANSI LED Overlay, E-3
CEPT LED Overlay. E-5
Print Page key. 3-34
Print Screen key, 3-34
Print (AnalySiS). 4-10
Printer Setup. 9-9
Printer Ports
Serial Printer. 2-5, C-2
Paranel Printer, 2-5, 0-1
Programming examples. triggering. 8-44
Protocol Selection, 3-9, 3-13
LED Displays, App. E
Leads, 4-3,8-43
Ust Selector, 10:-7
Uthium battery, A-2
Loading trigger files, 8-8
M.
Menus
BERT, 11-5
Main Configuration Menu, 3-3
Applications Selection Menu, 3-17
File Management Menu, 10:-1. 1Q-6
Utilities Menu. 9-1. 9-2
Triggering Menus, 8-1
Mode of Operation. 1-6,3-7
Modem.App.M
Monitor Display Port, 2-6
Connector Pinout, c-s
Monitoring
AppliCations, p-1. 1-12
at external device, 8Features. p-1
Une (from the). 3-11
Disk (from). 3-11
Protocols. p-2
Move keys, 3-35. H7
<
...
<
<
Q.
N.
0.921 Triggering. 8-17
0.931 Triggering, 8-19
New name. trigger, 8-7
R.
o.
On-Line Help, 3-38
OPC formatting options, 8-22 .
Overlay, U-Imerface. E-l1
P.
Page, Performance (See Performance Page)
Pages, 3-31
'
Active Page, 3-32; i
Multiple Pages, 3-31
Page Manipulation Keys, 1-11. 3-31
Performance Page. 7-91. .
Physical Interface, 3-8
Picture Control. 1-3
Port Configuration. 1-4
Real-Time Clock. 2-8, 3-24. 3-30
Rear Panel, 2-5
R&-Oisplay files, 10:-9
Remote Control. App. M
Remote I/O Port. 2-5
Connector Pinout, C-3
Serialized Remote Mode. 9-3
Setup, 9-3
Remote keyboard, 9-7
Rename file, 10:-13
Replace key, 3-34. 3-37
Reset Button, 1-3
Restore files (from floppy). 9-24
Run/Stop Key. 3-30. 4-3. 4-17. 7-2
RunTime Message (see Messages. RunTime
Triggering)
RunTime Triggering Page. 8-42
Index-4. 09/27/91
INDEX
s ..
SCSI, 2-B, 0-1
Saving
Data, 4-1, 6-1
Trigger entries, 8-8
Scroll keys, 3-35
Search
Protocol--based, 8-15
Frame, 8-13
Select key, 3-34, 3-37
Serial Number, 2-1
Serial Printer, 2-5
Connector Pinout, G-2
Serial Ports. 2-5, c-4
Setting Up, 2-1
Show Page key, 3-34, 3-37Simulation (See Volume III)
Features, p-2
BASIClanguages,p-3
Software Installation, 2-15
System Disks, 2-2
SS#7
Analysis (Vol II, Chapter 13)
Statistics (Vol II, Chapter 13)
Triggering, 8-22 to 8-46
ISUP, 8-35
LeveI2,8-23
Level 3, 8-25
Level 4, 8-25
TR7ISUP, 8-39
TUP, 8-33
Statistics
Address Key, 7-4
Byte key, 7-8
Display, 7-2
Example page, 7-3
Function Keys. 7-2
Performance Page, 7-9f.
Protocol Layer key, 7-B
Protocols, 7-1
Print key, 7-7
Report, 7-7
Reset key, 7-8
Time/Date key, 7-8
Status field, trigger, 8-9
Storage Compartment, 1-1,2-3
Support, customer, A-1
T.
Temperature Requirements, 2-9
Tekelec Customer Support, 2-16
Timer, Triggering, 8-12
lime, System, 9-12
lime Stamping, 2-8, 3-24, 3-30, 4-4,
Dual Port. 3-30
Triggering
Actions Parameter, 8-44
=>Disk, 8-45
Arm, 8-44
Display, 8-44
IncCnt,8-45
Mesg,8-45
ResCnt, 8-46
SetVars, 8-46
Stats, 8-44
StopAcq, 8-45 ..
Timer, 8-46
V Arith, 8-46
TrigOut, 8-46
Add trigger, 8-7
Conditions Parameter, 8-10
Counter, 8-12
DASS 2, 8-20
DTElDCE, 8-12
Error, 8-12
Frame, 8-13
FramLen, 8-15
ISUP, 8-35
Leads, 8-43
Menu Structure, 8-11
Negative (Logical NOT), 8-1-0
Protocol,8-15
0.921,8-17
0.931. 8-19
RLlime, 8-13
SS#7, 8-22
SS#7 Level 2, 8-23
SS#7 Level 3 and 4, 8-25
Timer, 8-13
TR7ISUP, 8-39
TUP, 8-33
Variable, 8-42
X.25,8-18
DASS 2, 8-20
Default Names, 8:-7
Delete Trigger, 8-7
Editor,8-B
Examples, 8-49
External device(s), triggering to,8-53
Name Parameter, 8-7
F1 Addtrig, 8-7
F2 NewName, 8-7
F3 Deltrig, 8-7
Fa Restart, 8-8
F9 Load, 8-8
FlO Save, 8-8
Index-5. 09/27/91
INDEX
Page, 8-5
F1 Start New Session, 8-5
F2 Load Triggering Disk, 8-5
Run-time, 8-47
0.921,8-17
0.931,8-19
Rename Trigger, 8-7
Run Time Triggering Page, 8-47
Messages, 8-48
Starting, 8-4
Status Parameter, 8-9
F1 1stTime, 8-9
F2 Disable, 8-9
F3 Whenever, 8-9
F8 Restart, 8-8
F9 Load, 8-8
F10Save, 8-8
Triggering Page, 8-5
Run-Time, 8-47
X.25,8-18
u.
u-tntenace Overlay, E-11
Utilities
645n05 Analysis Conversio~ (F5), 9-16
Backup/Restore Menu (F8). 9-26
Operation, 9-27
Source, 9-25
Check Free Disk Space (F6), 9-20
Disk Drive, 9-20
Configuration Files, 9-6, 9-10, 9-25
• Connect Mode (F7), 9-21
FMS File Conversion (F9), 9-29
Dir;9-29
Convert, 9-29
Full Cv, 9-29
Kermit Setup (F7), 9-21
Configuration files (saving), 9-25
Modes, 9-21
Data Transfer, 9-21
Connect Mode, 9-21
Default Setup File, 9-22
Baud Rate, 9-22
Number of Data BitS, 9-23
Number of Stop Bits, 9-23
Parity, 9-23
File Type, 9-23
Number of Retransmissions, 9-24
Transmission Intervai, 9-24
Menu Access, 9-2
Printer Setup (F2), 9-9
Printer Type, 9-10
Print Commands and Keys, 9-11
Remote i/o Port Setup (F1). 9-3
Serialized Remote Mode, 9-3
Compatible Terminal Type, 9-5
Baud Rate. 9-5
.
Number of Data Bits, 9-5 .
Number of Stop Bits, 9--5
Parity,9-6
Remote Terminal Keyboard. 9-7
Keyboard Hex Values, 9-8
Set Date and Time (F3). 9-12
Traffic; load/Save (F4). 9-13
Operation, 9-13
File Name, 9-14
Data Source. 9-14
Percentage. 9-15
Data Size, 9-15
Unfreeze (History). 4-19
v.
Variable, comparison of, 8-35
Variable $7, $8, $9; 8-14
View files, 1Q-9
Volume Control, 1-3
V.24 Intenace, App. B
V.35 Interlace, App. B
V.36 Intenace, App. H
Voltage Selection, 1-1
w.
(No entries.)
x.
X.21 LED Overlay, E-9
x'25 Triggering, 8-18
Index-S. 09127191
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Create Date : 2016:12:19 08:06:33-08:00 Modify Date : 2016:12:19 08:24:01-08:00 Metadata Date : 2016:12:19 08:24:01-08:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:fb8e0b07-eb12-6248-9e50-ef64cd0f63fe Instance ID : uuid:88f6f4c3-1eb6-d141-92d4-c4fd16d61cf0 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 358EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools